ICIHelp8.1 - User contributions [en]

ICI for SAP Ariba Integration

2022-09-16T13:00:14Z

IDT-1: Created page with " = ICI for SAP Ariba Integration = == Overview == '''Icertis Contract Intelligence (ICI) integration with SAP Ariba Contracts''' The Icertis Contract Intelligence (ICI..."

= ICI for SAP Ariba Integration =

== Overview ==

'''Icertis Contract Intelligence (ICI) integration with SAP Ariba Contracts'''

The Icertis Contract Intelligence (ICI) for SAP Ariba Contracts integration provides organizations an intelligent and flexible contracting platform leveraging the value of the SAP Ariba supplier network through a seamless source-to-contract workflow featuring the best-in-class contract management functionality. 

Some key challenges to the organizations are:

*Lack of speed, collaboration among stakeholders: Inefficient processes lead to high turnaround time. Delays in contracting cause a delay in value realization which impacts the revenue. 
*Lack of insights from contract data leads to limited visibility to enforce performance. 
*Security, risk, and compliance helps to safeguard the brand and intellectual property rights. 

The ICI for SAP Ariba adapter provides the following capabilities.<br/>  
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Sa1.png|RTENOTITLE]]</div>
The diagram above depicts how the end-to-end source to contract business flow can be orchestrated leveraging the ICI for SAP Ariba Contracts integration.  

*A contract manager can create a standalone SAP Ariba Contract Workspace (ACW) or a corresponding ACW from SAP Ariba Contract Request. 
*A contract manager can also create an SAP Ariba Contract Workspace while awarding a sourcing event. 
*ICI can automatically assemble the legal language leveraging the predefined template and rules. 
*The contract review, approval, and signature can be done in ICI. 
*Once the contract is executed in ICI, the metadata and a signed PDF is synchronized with the SAP Ariba Contract Workspace.

 

== ICI for SAP Ariba Solution ==

*'''Contract Authoring'''

Contract Managers can create an ACW, provide minimal information, and initiate authoring in ICI. You can leverage ICI’s AI capabilities to extract metadata and clauses for ease of redlining. ICI assembles the legal language based on predefined legal template and rules.

*'''Repository Contract'''

A contract manager can easily manage signed PDF contracts by uploading it directly to the ACW and publishing it. The solution automatically creates an executed agreement in ICI.

*'''Contract Review, Approval, Signature, and Execution'''

ICI capabilities around contract redlining (such as Microsoft Word Experience, online editing), approval, signature can streamline the process with proper governance. Once executed, the metadata along with a signed PDF can is synced back in ACW.

*'''Contract Amendment'''

You can initiate an amendment in ACW and complete the legal authoring for the amendment in ICI. Once the contract amendment is executed in ICI, the changes in the contract are reflected in ACW. 

*'''Supplier Master Data'''

 You can also synch supplier master data from SAP Ariba Contracts to ICI..

The following data is synchronized between ICI and SAP Ariba Contracts.  

*Agreement data  
*Agreement document data 
*Agreement team data 
*Supplier master data

== Benefits ==

*Accelerate contract turnaround times: seamless integration with SAP Ariba Contracts enables organizations to easily run contracting processes and quickly author and negotiate contracts closer to their clause positions and operationalize it in SAP Ariba Contracts with the best-in-class technology.<br/>  
*Realize the full value of every contract: seamless data integration between ICI and SAP Ariba Contracts ensures negotiated commercial terms are enforced during the procurement and payable processes, helping maximize the value of every contract.<br/>  
*Effectively manage legal and business risk: preapproved legal templates, predefined corporate policies, and constant monitoring of contractual obligations and SLAs (Service Level Agreement) enable organizations to effectively manage legal and business risks.

== Prerequisites ==

The ICI SAP Ariba Adapter is supported with ICI version 8.2 and 8.1.2. Ensure that the following prerequisites are met:

*SAP Ariba Contracts prerequisites 
**Use the REST API collection to integrate SAP Ariba Contract Workspaces (ACW), SAP Ariba Documents, and SAP Ariba Team. 
**The SAP Ariba REST APIs are configured with API rate limit values to make uninterrupted API calls for data syncing.  
**Task Service is up and running  
**Required events and jobs are enabled  
**SAP Ariba Contracts allows ICI Client to consume their APIs  

'''Note:''' To know more about the SAP Ariba prerequisites, click [https://help.sap.com/docs/ARIBA_SOURCING/9e0dca5bce1347ceb72ccae76a15c2c9/a1709b3b0a824b018577e0add8d1b27a.html here].  

*ICI configuration prerequisites 
**Creating ICI entities  
**Mapping attributes for ICI entities (Client App Cross Reference and Client App Entity Mapping)  
**Creating filters in the Client App Filter Condition  
**Defining Date Filter criteria in the Client App Master data Sync for field: Effective Date  
**Storing SAP Ariba API connection information in the Azure Key Vault    
**The required SAP Ariba Contracts master data is imported to ICI – ICI side 
**SAP Ariba Contracts users are provisioned in ICI 
**SAP Ariba Contracts IDP integration is configured in ICI 

'''Note:''' Contact your Icertis Contract Intelligence (ICI) implementation team to complete the configuration of the '''ICI for SAP Ariba''' adapter.

= Managing Contracts =

After integrating ICI with SAP Ariba Contracts, you can perform the following contract authoring activities:

The ICI SAP Ariba Adapter enables you to create and manage the following records:

*Executed paper agreements
*Own paper agreements
*Third party paper agreements
*Amendments (full and termination)

== Working with Contracts ==

=== Managing Contracts Created Using Executed Paper ===

The executed paper contracts refer to the types of contracts that are created offline and uploaded to the system. As a part of the organization’s contract systems these must be stored in a repository.

For example, a contract manager or a contract lead receives an already executed agreement and enters the agreement into the system for keeping records.

The following table explains the possible scenarios while working with contracts created using executed paper.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Sa14.PNG|600x600px|Sa14.PNG]]</div>
 

=== Creating a Contract Using Executed Paper ===

1. Create a Contract Workspace in SAP Ariba Contracts in the '''Draft''' status.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Sa2.png|RTENOTITLE]]</div>
2. The signature task is associated with the main agreement document. This signature task can be completed either through the e-signature process or you can upload a signed copy that is created offline.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Sa15.png|RTENOTITLE]]</div>
3. To publish the agreement, click '''Actions '''> '''Publish '''in ACW.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Sa3.png|RTENOTITLE]]</div>
'''Note''': To know more about the standard Ariba Contract Workspace creation process, click [https://help.sap.com/docs/ARIBA_SOURCING/fa6038501b9b4b548e7a7628356e33ca/7cd9712c71ea1014a8d3d6cf4fe940c0.html here].

4. To open the ICI equivalent agreement, click the link in the '''External ID''' column (for example: ICMNDA_82).
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Sa4.png|RTENOTITLE]]</div>
5. To view the SAP Ariba information in ICI, click '''''Details '''''> '''A''riba Information.'''''
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Sa5.png|RTENOTITLE]]</div>
6. To view the owners of the agreement, on the left navigation pane, click '''Team'''.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Sa6.png|RTENOTITLE]]</div>
7. To view the contract details, click '''Details''' > '''General Information'''.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Sa16.png|RTENOTITLE]]</div>
8. To navigate back to the ACW, click '''Details''' > '''Ariba CW Link'''.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Sa7.png|550x300px|Sa7.png]]</div>
9. The ACW now shows both the '''ACW ID''' and the '''Icertis ID'''.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Sa8.png|RTENOTITLE]]</div>
=== Managing Contracts Created Using Own or Third party Paper ===

You can choose to create an agreement using your own paper or third-party paper:

*Own paper: Create an agreement by using your own template 
*Third-Party paper: Create an agreement by using a template provided by by the supplier

The following diagram explains the contract initiation to contract execution process.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Flowchart 1.PNG|650x500px|Flowchart 1.PNG]]</div>
=== Creating a Contract Using Own Paper or Third party Paper ===

1.   Create a Contract Workspace in SAP Ariba Contracts in the '''Draft''' status.

2.   Click '''Initiate Authoring'''. The ICI application opens.

3.   On the Contract Type Details page, select the options and click '''Next'''.

4.   On the Attributes page, enter the required values and click '''Next'''.

5.   (For third party paper only) Upload a contract document and click '''Next'''.

6.   (For own paper only) Select or upload a template and click '''Next'''.

7.   Click '''Create and Publish'''.

8.   Send the contract for required approvals.

9.   Initiate internal and external signatures.

10. Execute the contract in ICI.

11. Once the contract is executed in ICI, you can view the contract details in ACW.

12. Publish the ACW to complete the process.

 

=== Managing contracts in unique scenarios ===

The following table explains the few unique scenarios of SAP Ariba Contract Workspace (ACW), and statuses that reflect in SAP Ariba and ICI. Note that status names are not changed, but only synching SAP Ariba Contract Status to ICI in attribute is changed.

[[File:Sa9.PNG|500px]]

=== Syncing Contract Line Item Documents (CLID) ===

A Contract workspace can contain Contract Line items Documents (CLID).

Refer to the tables to see different CLID statuses and corresponding impact in ICI before authoring is initiated and when authoring is already initiated.

*Contract authoring is not initiated

[[File:CLID 1.PNG|500x250px|CLID 1.PNG]]

*Contract authoring is already initiated

[[File:CLID 2.PNG|500x350px|CLID 2.PNG]]

 

== Working with Amendments ==

An amendment is a change made to an executed or a signed agreement. In ICI, you can amend an agreement whether it is in executed, terminated, or expired state.

'''Prerequisite'''

The ACW must be created, and the contract should be published.

'''Creating an Amendment'''

1.    Open the SAP Ariba Contract Workspace that you want to amend.

2.    From the '''Actions '''menu, click '''Amend'''.

3.    Enter the relevant information and the reason for the amendment.

4.    ''(Optional)'' Edit the required attributes.

5.    From '''the Actions '''menu, click '''Initiate Authoring'''. The agreement opens in the ICI application.

[[File:Sa11.png|650x300px|Sa11.png]]

6. Enter the details and click'''Create'''. The amendment record is created.

[[File:Sa12.png|RTENOTITLE]]

Like agreements, a unique amendment ID is created and is synched back in ACW. The amendment is created in the '''Draft''' status.

7. Publish the amendment in ACW.

'''Note the following important points'''

*An ICI amendment record is created against the amendment of  a Ariba Contract workspace (ACW) · 
*An ICI amendment records goes through the same process of an agreement.
*The History tab shows the old values and the new values for all changed attributes.

 

== Configuration ==

=== SAP Ariba Contracts Side configurations ===

To know more on SAP Ariba Contracts side configurations, click [https://help.sap.com/docs/ARIBA_SOURCING/9e0dca5bce1347ceb72ccae76a15c2c9/79e20b26eabc4af0a486acd8818877d5.html here].

=== ICI Side configurations  ===

Contact your Icertis Contract Intelligence (ICI) implementation team to complete the configuration of the ICI for SAP Ariba adapter.

== Glossary ==

[[File:Glossary Ariba.PNG|720px]]

'''Related Topics''': [[Working_with_Agreements|Agreement Management]]

File:Sa16.png

2022-09-16T11:23:09Z

IDT-1:

File:Sa15.png

2022-09-16T11:23:05Z

IDT-1:

File:Sa14.PNG

2022-09-16T11:22:41Z

IDT-1:

File:Sa13.png

2022-09-16T11:22:07Z

IDT-1:

File:Sa12.png

2022-09-16T11:21:54Z

IDT-1:

File:Sa11.png

2022-09-16T11:20:39Z

IDT-1:

File:Sa10.PNG

2022-09-16T11:19:53Z

IDT-1:

File:Sa9.PNG

2022-09-16T11:19:42Z

IDT-1:

File:Sa8.png

2022-09-16T11:19:11Z

IDT-1:

File:Sa7.png

2022-09-16T11:19:02Z

IDT-1:

File:Sa6.png

2022-09-16T11:18:50Z

IDT-1:

File:Sa5.png

2022-09-16T11:18:40Z

IDT-1:

File:Sa4.png

2022-09-16T11:18:24Z

IDT-1:

File:Sa3.png

2022-09-16T11:16:27Z

IDT-1:

File:Sa2.png

2022-09-16T11:16:16Z

IDT-1:

File:Sa1.png

2022-09-16T11:16:05Z

IDT-1:

File:MCU.PNG

2022-09-16T11:15:54Z

IDT-1:

File:Glossary SA.PNG

2022-09-16T11:15:45Z

IDT-1:

File:Glossary Ariba.PNG

2022-09-16T11:15:37Z

IDT-1:

File:Flowchart 1.PNG

2022-09-16T11:15:20Z

IDT-1:

File:CLID status.PNG

2022-09-16T11:15:11Z

IDT-1:

File:CLID 2.PNG

2022-09-16T11:15:02Z

IDT-1:

File:CLID 1.PNG

2022-09-16T11:14:53Z

IDT-1:

ICI Supplier Relationship Management

2022-08-05T05:33:10Z

IDT-1:

= ICI Supplier Relationship Management =

== Overview ==

Icertis is expanding its market coverage through Supplier Relationship Management (SRM) Suite  that provides value to the procurement functions in the enterprise set up.

Built on top of the ICI Platform, this app enables businesses to  handle both standard supplier management challenges and those unique to their business <br/> cases, processes, and policies.

Icertis gives the flexibility to configure the App as per the customer requirement, making it a truly enterprise App. 

 

 

 

 

== The Solution Framework ==

The App brings forth a solution to supplier relationship management, before Sourcing processes are kicked off. The App comprises these stages in the Supplier Relationship Management process:

 

*Supplier Onboarding
**Supplier Registration: This stage is the initial registration process of suppliers, wherein potential suppliers express their interest to engage in business with the buyer organization, by submitting a registration request. This includes suppliers’ complete profile information along with the industry and category of goods or services they offer. 
**Supplier Qualification: This stage is where suppliers are assessed and qualified to be eligible for onboarding. The procurement and compliance teams in qualification will<br/> perform due diligence by checking supplier’s industry vertical, geography, conformance to compliance regulations, and their overall business credibility and capabilities.
**Supplier Profile: Once suppliers pass qualification, they are onboarded and their detailed supplier profiles are auto created. Suppliers also get access to their profiles to view and update. 
*Supplier Evaluation: The Supplier Evaluation module introduced in the Supplier Relationship Management suite helps organizations manage supplier performance and evaluate and mitigate risks associated with working with suppliers. It is part of the Supplier Relationship Management application, which is built on Icertis Contract Intelligence.

Each stage is unique and has its own process flow that connects and contributes to the overall lifecycle of the supplier relationship management process.
<div class="image-green-border"> </div>
*Supplier Registration 
**Comprehensive Approval Process
**Email invitiation with link to registration form. 
**Self-registration with easily available public registration form. 
*Supplier Qualification 
**Supplier Capability Assessment for business products/ services. 
**Supplier Due Diligence for regulatory compliance, diversity compliance(if applicable) and background check. 
*Supplier Management
**Supplier Onboarding
*Supplier Evaluation
**Gathering supplier documents 
**Configuring Evaluation KPIs 
**Evaluate KPIs based on the metrics
**Review and approval activities

== The Benefits  ==

The App ensures that buyers and suppliers are both facilitated in procurement activities and <br/> processes, with significant benefits for both parties. It focuses on managing suppliers efficiently, and therefore, eliminates the woes of procurement <br/> teams, who are constantly striving to assess and choose the right suppliers. The App is a comprehensive solution to the existing pain points in buyer-supplier relationships, <br/> and it helps by:

*Providing a single source of truth, with a unified and synchronized data source solving problems related to data disparity between multiple systems (CLM, ERP, P2P etc.).
*Improving Governance and Compliance by real-time tracking, monitoring and detection of changes in critical supplier information (external databases and federated lists).
*Expediting the supplier onboarding cycle time, and removing potential bottlenecks, with automated workflows, rules, notifications/reminders and dashboards, all of which ensure continuous tracking of SLAs.
*Improving relationships through collaboration, allowing supplier’s self-service capabilities to keep their information updated and relevant.
*Fostering interoperability with other business apps, and deriving benefits by seamless  integration with Sourcing App.

== The Users  ==

There are multiple classes of users with varied privileges and responsibilities within the App. The current class of users include:

*Procurement Team: This team will be involved with Supplier Registration and Onboarding.
**Review Registration.
**Initiate Onboarding (after qualification).
**Define service related KPIs along with business.
*Compliance Team: This team will take care of Supplier Qualification. 
**Perform due diligence and background checks. 
**Check with external database for risk, non-compliance, sanctions, watchlists etc. 
*Supplier: This is the primary focus of the App, the  the quintessential Suppliers, who will be part of all processes and stages of the app’s lifecycle.
**Suppliers can submit registration through a web page. 
**Suppliers can provide qualification documents. 
**A provisioned supplier can edit supplier profile and bid to invited sourcing event. 

 

 

 

 

 

== Navigating the App  ==

Based on the user or security group access, the tile options visible to a user would vary: 

*View Access: the ability to view: 
**Supplier Registration 
**Supplier Qualification 
**Supplier Profile 
**Supplier Evaluation
*Manage Access: the ability to view and create: 
**Supplier Registration 
**Supplier Qualification 
**Supplier Profile 
**Supplier Evaluation

Users within the buyer organization can create and view supplier registration, supplier qualification ,supplier profile and supplier evaluation based on the permissions provided in security group. <br/> Supplier contacts, when provisioned in ICI and based on the permissions provided, can only view and not create the Supplier Qualification, Supplier Evaluation and Supplier Profile.

'''Note''': External users can only view their supplier organization records and no other supplier organization records. Supplier contacts (external users) do not have “Manage” access after being provisioned in ICI.

Buyers can access the available options by clicking the supplier management tile. <br/> To access the options under supplier management: 

'''Click''' ''Supplier Management'' tile on the ''Home'' page. The following options are displayed.

*Dashboard
*Supplier Registration
*Supplier Qualification 
*Supplier Profile  
*Supplier Evaluation
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-NavigatingApp.png|520px|8.0-SRM-NavigatingApp.png]]</div>
 

== Working with Supplier Registration  ==

An integral part of the App, Supplier Registration is the process that sets the overall app objectives in motion. This stage is the initial registration process of suppliers, wherein potential suppliers express their interest to engage in business with the buyer organization, by submitting a registration request. This includes suppliers’ complete profile information along with the industry and category of goods or services they offer.

Supplier registrations have to be created at first, before their workflow moves forward towards qualification and onboarding.

 

=== Supplier Registration Workflow  ===

In the App, these are the ways for submitting a Supplier Registration request:

*Supplier can submit a registration form from a publicly available web location outside ICI. This can happen in two ways:
**Buyer can send a public web page link, via email, to the supplier registration form hosted on an external web location, which the supplier can access.
**Supplier can browse and visit the buyer’s website and locate the publicly hosted registration form.
*Buyer can also submit the registration request on behalf of the supplier from within the App.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-SupplierRegistrationWorkflow.png|720px|8.0-SRM-SupplierRegistrationWorkflow.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

=== Submitting the Registration Request from External Location  ===

As mentioned in the previous section, the supplier registration form can be hosted external to App, and accessible to all. The form’s web location can either be shared to the supplier by the <br/> buyer, or a supplier browsing the web can directly visit the buyer’s website, fill and submit the form.

With a publicly available form that is conveniently accessible for any interested supplier to register, it becomes quite easy to collect basic information about suppliers, as a foundational <br/> step towards building a good supplier network.

With this feature: 

*Suppliers can easily fill up and submit a publicly available registration request form, on a public web page accessible by all and external to the App.
*Appropriate data format guidelines and validations are provided in filling up the form.
*Mandatory fields are marked, and validation messages are provided, if the form is submitted without filling such fields.
*Success messages will be displayed when the form is submitted.
*Email notifications will also be sent to the potential suppliers for successful form submissions, acknowledging the registration form submission in the email.
*The information captured in the form will be transmitted to the registration form within  the App.
*All standard form data types will be supported in the registration form.
*Multiple users can simultaneously use and submit the registration form.
*Users may open the same page on multiple browser tabs.

Potential suppliers may submit the public registration form as follows:

1. Open the external URL and '''Click''' on the ''Supplier Registration'' button. The supplier registration form opens, in English language, by default.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SupplierRegistration1.png|720px|8.0-SupplierRegistration1.png]]</div>
2. Fill out all the required and desired fields in the form.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-SubmittingRegistrationRequest-2.png|720px|8.0-SRM-SubmittingRegistrationRequest-2.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">3. '''Click '''"Submit"''. ''</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">''[[File:8.0-SRM-SubmittingRegistrationRequest-3.png|720px|8.0-SRM-SubmittingRegistrationRequest-3.png]]''</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">'''Note''': If 1. Introduction term is selected as “No” then submission of form is not allowed.</div>
When a Supplier Registration form gets submitted:

*A confirmation message is displayed if the submission is successful.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-SubmittingRegistrationRequest-4.png|720px|8.0-SRM-SubmittingRegistrationRequest-4.png]]</div>
*Appropriate notifications are sent to both the supplier and the buyer via email, containing a unique “Registration Code”.
*An instance of the supplier registration is automatically created within the App with the status “Waiting for Registration Approval”.
*If, for any technical reason, the form submission fails, a failure notification will be sent to the buyer team.

 

 

 

 

 

=== Creating Supplier Registration  ===

The buyer can create a registration, on behalf of the supplier, from within the App:

*From the “Create” workbench on the “Home” page.
*From the “Supplier Management” tile<br/>  

'''Creating Supplier Registration using “Create” workbench'''

'''Click''' the plus icon on the top right corner of the “Home” page to open the “Create” workbench and then click “Supplier Registration” to open the “Create  Supplier Registration” page.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierRegistrationWorkbench.png|520px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierRegistrationWorkbench.png]]</div>
 Follow the steps mentioned below to create supplier registration. 

'''Creating Supplier Registration using “Supplier Management” tile'''

1. '''Click''' the "Supplier Management" tile, and '''click''' the "Supplier Registration" option. The "Supplier Registration" index page opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierRegistration.png|520px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierRegistration.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">2. '''Click''' "Create" on the supplier registration index page.   </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-CreateSupplierRegistration.PNG|720px|8.1-CreateSupplierRegistration.PNG]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">'''Fill''' out all the mandatory and desired attribute fields.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="note-box">'''Note''': The toggle button in the Introduction category is Yes, by default, and changing it to No will stop the registration process with the message "Without the acceptance, the registration will not be processed".</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
*Introduction: This is a generic welcome message for supplier registrations, including instructions and suggestions.
* Terms of Use: This is a conditional message asking the user to comply and accept the terms of using supplier registrations in the App. Selecting Yes allows to move forward <br/> with the registrations, whereas, if No is selected, then the registration will not be  processed any further.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierRegistration1.png|720px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierRegistration1.png]]</div>
*Vendor Type: It is used to depict the type of vendor. For example, supplier, provider, sub-contractor and so on.
*Legal Entity Name: This is the legal name of the supplier’s organization.
* Doing Business As: The business name used by the supplier, in cases where suppliers may conduct business by a name different from their registered legal entity name.
*D&B Number: A 9-digit unique number assigned by Duns & Bradstreet to any organization.
*Primary Business Address Line 1: This is the first part of the supplier organization’s official address, covering the building and street details.
*Primary Business Address Line 2: This is the supplier’s official address, second part.
*City: This is the supplier company’s official location city.
*State: This is the supplier company’s official location state.
*Country: This is the supplier company’s official location country.
*Zip Code: This is the supplier company’s official location zip code.
*Website: This is the supplier company’s official website.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierRegistration2.png|720px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierRegistration2.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
*Primary Contact First Name: The first name of the designated primary contact of the supplier organization. 
*Primary Contact Last Name: The last name of the designated primary contact of the supplier organization.
*Designation: The name or title of the designated primary contact of the supplier organization.
*Email: The email address of the designated point of contact from the supplier side. 
*Telephone: The phone number of the designated point of contact from the supplier side.
*Fax: The fax of the designated point of contact from the supplier side.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierRegistration3.png|720px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierRegistration3.png]]</div>
*Ownership Status: This is a dropdown to select the supplier’s type of business ownership, for example – “LLC”, “Corporation”, “Partnership” etc.
*Supplier Operative Industry: This is the supplier company’s industry vertical.
*Products /Services Provided: This is to select the category of products or services that  the supplier provides.
*Head of Organization Name: This is the supplier organization’s head personnel.
*Head of Organization Email: This is the supplier organization’s head personnel’s official email address.
*Year of Incorporation: This is the supplier organization’s year of incorporation.
*Annual Revenue: This is to select the supplier organization’s annual revenue range, in US Dollars, from a dropdown with different ranges.
*Do you have a Parent Company: This is to indicate if there is a parent company of the supplier organization.
*Holding Company Name: This displays the list of all holding companies where “Is Holding Company” option is set as “True”.
*Are you a Holding Company: This helps capture whether the selected company is a holding company. Select “Yes” to make it the holding company. Holding companies are setup specifically to group multiple subsidiaries together. 
*Are you a Parent Company: This helps capture whether the company is the parent company. The default value of this attribute is set to “No”. Select “Yes” to make it the parent company. Parent companies typically have controlling interest in other companies that provides them the right to control other company’s interests.    
*Parent Company Name: Is the one that has controlling interest and has the right to control  the subsidiaries operations. This option is enabled only if the "Do you have a Parent Company" is selected as "Yes". This displays the list of all parent companies where “IsParentCompany” option is set as “True”.
*Parent Company DBA: This option is enabled only if the "Do you have a Parent Company" is selected as "Yes". This specifies the name with which the company does the business.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierRegistration4.png|920px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierRegistration4.png]]</div>
The following attribute fields are internal, for buyer procurement team to assess registrations. This section is not available on the public webpage for supplier's view.

*Registration Code: This is the auto-generated code given as a reference identification for each supplier registration.
*Supplier Classification: This indicates the classification of the supplier per their credibility, for example – High Potential Supplier, Standard Supplier etc.
*Internal Comments: This is to add any internal note for the supplier in consideration.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierRegistration5.png|920px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierRegistration5.png]]</div>
3. '''Click''' "Next", once all desired and mandatory attribute fields are filled out. The Discard option is chosen to discard/delete registrations.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierRegistration6.png|720px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierRegistration6.png]]</div>
'''Note''': The user can click on Save to save the information entered so far to finish later.

4. '''Verify''' all information, and '''click''' "Create Registration".
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierRegistration7.png|600px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierRegistration7.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
The supplier registration is created, with the status "Registration Initiated".
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierRegistration8.png|720px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierRegistration8.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">The supplier registration is created, with the status “Registration Initiated”.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierRegistration9.png|720px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierRegistration9.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

 

 

=== Viewing Supplier Registration ===

A supplier registration can be viewed as follows: 

1. '''Click ''' the "Supplier Management" tile, on the App Home page.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-NavigatingApp.png|520px|8.0-SRM-NavigatingApp.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">2. '''Click''' "Supplier Registration" option, an index page opens displaying all the supplier registrations.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierRegistration.png|520px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierRegistration.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">3. Choose desired registration and '''click''' on the corresponding eye icon to view.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-ViewSupplierRegistration2.png|720px|8.0-SRM-ViewSupplierRegistration2.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">4. The selected Supplier Registration Details page opens. </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-ViewSupplierRegistration3.png|720px|8.0-SRM-ViewSupplierRegistration3.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

 

=== Editing Supplier Registration  ===

A supplier registration can be edited as follows: 

1.  '''Click''' "Edit Registration" on the Supplier Registration Details page. The Attributes page opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-EditSupplierRegistration.png|720px|8.0-SRM-EditSupplierRegistration.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">2. Make desired changes and '''click''' ''Next''.</div> <div class="image-green-border">3. '''Verify''' all information and '''click''' ''Update''. The registration will get updated with the latest changes.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-EditSupplierRegistration1.png|720px|8.0-SRM-EditSupplierRegistration1.png]]</div>
 

 

 

=== Discarding Supplier Registration  ===

Supplier registrations can be deleted or discarded, as required, at the discretion of the buyer, in case the buyer created the registration request incorrectly in the system and would need to <br/> discard the same.

To delete the registration: 

1. '''Navigate''' to Supplier Registrations page and open the desired Supplier Registration in draft state (Registration Initiated).

2. '''Click '''on "Discard Registration". A delete confirmation popup opens. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-DiscardingRegistration.png|520px|8.0-SRM-DiscardingRegistration.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">3. '''Click''' "Yes" to discard. The supplier registration will be discarded and it will no longer be available to view in the list of Supplier Registration.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-DiscardingRegistration1.png|720px|8.0-SRM-DiscardingRegistration1.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">'''Note''': Clicking "No" will take you back to the registration Details page with the status "Registration Initiated".</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

 

=== Sending Registration for Approval  ===

After the buyer creates the registration request in the App and the supplier registration goes to ''Registration Initiated'' status, it is required to send the registration for approval.<br/> On the bottom right of the Supplier Registration ''Details'' page click ''Send For Approval''. This will initiate the approval request and notify respective approvers, as necessary. The supplier registration status will now become ''Waiting for Registration Approval''.

'''Note''': All web applications submitted by suppliers, via the public registration form, will directly go to a ''Waiting for Registration Approval'' status by default.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-SendingSupplierRegistrationforApproval.png|520px|8.0-SRM-SendingSupplierRegistrationforApproval.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">Once a supplier registration is sent for approval, the assigned approver/s will receive notifications to approve the registration. At this stage, approvers can take decisions like:</div>
*Scoring the registration application by starting internal assessment.
*Reject the registration. 
*Put the registration on hold. 
*Approve the registration. 

 

 

 

=== Internal Assessment of Supplier Registration  ===

When a supplier registration is sent for approval and is in the Waiting for Registration Approval state, it can be internally assessed as follows:

1.  '''C''''''lick''' Start Internal Assessment on the Supplier Registration Details page. The Attributes page opens.
<div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-InternalAssessmentSupplierRegistration.png|720px|8.0-SRM-InternalAssessmentSupplierRegistration.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">2. '''Assess '''and '''make '''the required changes. </div> <div class="image-green-border">3. '''Click '''Next. </div> <div class="image-green-border">4. Verify all information, '''click''' Update. The registration will get updated with latest changes.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-InternalAssessmentSupplierRegistration1.png|720px|8.0-SRM-InternalAssessmentSupplierRegistration1.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

 

=== Rejecting Supplier Registration  ===

A supplier registration can be rejected when its in the Waiting for Registration Approval state. For the approver to Reject the supplier registration request.

1. '''Click '''on "Reject Registration". 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-RejectRegistration.png|720px|8.0-SRM-RejectRegistration.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">2. '''Add '''relevant notes. </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-RejectRegistration1.png|720px|8.0-SRM-RejectRegistration1.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">3. '''Select '''a "Reason Code". </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-RejectRegistration2.png|720px|8.0-SRM-RejectRegistration2.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">4. Confirm and '''click '''"Add". The supplier registration will be rejected with the status Registration Rejected.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-RejectRegistration3.png|720px|8.0-SRM-RejectRegistration3.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">5. Buyer receives a notification of the rejection in an email containing a link to the registration case.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">6. Supplier also receives a notification, in email, about their registration request rejected status.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

 

=== Putting Supplier Registration on Hold  ===

When a need arises to pause the supplier registration, mostly because sufficient registration requests have been received already for a business category, a registration could be put On Hold.

To put a Supplier Registration On Hold:

1. On the supplier registration Details page, '''click''' on "Show More" to expand more options.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-HoldRegistration.png|720px|8.0-SRM-HoldRegistration.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">2. '''Click '''on "Hold Registration" button. </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-HoldRegistration1.png|720px|8.0-SRM-HoldRegistration1.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">3. Add a desired note, and select an appropriate Reason Code.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">4. '''Click''' Add.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-HoldRegistration2.png|720px|8.0-SRM-HoldRegistration2.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">5. The supplier registration will be put on hold, with the status On Hold.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-HoldRegistration2.png|720px|8.0-SRM-HoldRegistration2.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">6. Buyer receives a notification of the hold status in an email containing a link to the registration case.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">7. Supplier also receives a notification, in email, about their registration request being put on hold.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

 

=== Recalling Supplier Registration  ===

If there is any anomaly or reason to recall a supplier registration, while it is in the state Waiting for Registration Approval, the buyer who submitted the request on behalf of supplier can do so.

To recall a supplier registration:<br/> 1. On the supplier registration "Details" page, click on "Show More" to expand more options.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-RecallRegistration.png|720px|8.0-SRM-RecallRegistration.png]]</div>
2. '''Click''' on the "Recall" button.<br/> 3. Add a desired note, and select an appropriate Reason Code.<br/> 4. '''Click''' Add. The supplier registration will be recalled and assigned a Registration Initiated status.
<div class="image-green-border"><br/>  </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

=== Delegating Supplier Registration  ===
<div class="image-green-border">When a supplier registration is sent for Approval and is in the “Waiting for Registration Approval” state, the designated approver user can delegate the approval task to someone else of their choice.<br/> To Delegate a supplier registration:<br/> 1. The approver logs into App and goes to Tasks window and opens the case.<br/> 2. '''Click''' Delegate to delegate the supplier registration approval. Team popup window opens.</div> <div class="image-green-border"><br/> [[File:8.0-SRM-DelegateRegistration.png|720px|8.0-SRM-DelegateRegistration.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">3. Select and '''Add''' a desired user to delegate to. The said user will now become the designated approver of the supplier registration.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-DelegateRegistration1.png|720px|8.0-SRM-DelegateRegistration1.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">Once a supplier registration is delegated by the Approver, it can also be reversed by recalling the delegation. To recall the delegation, '''click''' on ''Recall Delegation''.<br/>  </div> <div class="image-green-border">A success message is displayed confirming that the delegation has been recalled.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

=== Approving the Supplier Registration  ===

As described in previous sections, either the buyer creates the supplier registration within the App or the supplier submits an externally hosted registration request which automatically goes to the Waiting for Registration Approval status in the App.<br/> Once the approver receives the approval request notification:<br/> 1. The approver logs into App and goes to Tasks window and opens the case.<br/> 2. The approver clicks "Approve Registration" to approve the supplier registration request.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-ApproveRegistration.png|720px|8.0-SRM-ApproveRegistration.png]]<br/>  </div>
*If the registration is approved, then the registration status changes to "Registration Approved".
*When supplier registration is approved the buyer receives a notification of the approval in an email containing a link to the registration case.
*Supplier also receives a notification, in email, about their registration request approved status.
*Once the registration is approved, a Supplier Qualification is auto-created, triggering the workflow for Supplier Qualification.<br/>  
<div class="image-green-border">'''Note''': Per standard ICI functionality, while approving registration if an approver exists in the supplier registration team (added by approver rule), the registration will wait for the approver to open the registration and approve it. If such a rule is not configured or no approver is present in the team, the registration will directly be approved.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-ApproveRegistration1.png|720px|8.0-SRM-ApproveRegistration1.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

=== Post-Approval Supplier Registration Details  ===

Once a supplier registration is approved, a new set of attributes get added to the registration details, and that is ''Registration KPI''.

*Registration Creation Date: The auto-computed date when the supplier registration is initiated in the SRM app system. 
*Registration Decision Date:    The date when registration decisions (like On-hold, Reject, Approve etc.) are taken.
*Decision Time Taken: This indicates the duration taken in days from registration creation to actual decision.
*Registration SLA: SLAs defined by organization  based on which registration decisions are usually taken.
*Deviation from SLA:    This is the difference between decision time taken and registration SLA to identify if there is any deviation.
*Is Registration process completed timely:     If decision time exceeds SLA, then it implies that the registration process is not completed in a timely manner. If it is less than the SLA, then the registration process is marked as completed in time.<br/>  
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-PostApprovalRegistration.png|720px|8.0-SRM-PostApprovalRegistration.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-PostApprovalRegistration1.png|720px|8.0-SRM-PostApprovalRegistration1.png]]</div>
 

=== Validating the Duplicate Registrations ===

Buyers may receive more than one registration from the same supplier submitted through the web page.

ICI Supplier Relationship Management can now match the supplier registration records based on the unique identifier attributes. This helps identifying the duplicate registrations and the status of the supplier registration is marked as “Duplicate”. Buyers can perform limited actions on the duplicate registrations and the supplier qualification is not generated.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1srmapp3.png|720px|8.1srmapp3.png]]</div>
== Supplier Registration Details page  ==

The Supplier Registration ''Details'' page is based upon standard ICI structure. 

 

=== Registration Left Pane  ===

These are the left pane line items seeded with the supplier registration Details page:

*Summary: Displays the name of the supplier registration instance (that is added when creating), who created it, and supplier registration instance details.
*Details: Displays the details specified when creating the supplier registration instance.
*History: Displays how the supplier registration has progressed till now, including the actions performed in supplier registration, as is also under “History” in the left pane.
*Associations: Displays the number of associated documents to the registration agreement. Click the plus icon to add new associations to the supplier registration.
*Team: Displays the members added to the team for this supplier registration instance. Click the plus icon to add new team members to the registration.
*Collaboration: Allows the internal team members to communicate with other internal team members by creating topics and posting messages in it.
*Notes: Displays the additional information about the supplier registration if it is added.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-RegistrationDetailsPage.png|720px|8.0-SRM-RegistrationDetailsPage.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

=== History  ===

The History displays how the supplier registration has progressed till now and presents an overall audit for the supplier registration, under History in the left navigation pane on supplier registration Details page. History includes the activities and statuses for supplier registration, with Events, User Name, User Role, Date and Time, Details and Notes.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-RegistrationHistory.png|720px|8.0-SRM-RegistrationHistory.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

== Working with Supplier Qualification  ==

== Supplier Qualification Workflow  ==

This stage is where suppliers are assessed and qualified to be eligible for onboarding. The procurement and compliance team performs due diligence by checking supplier’s industry vertical, geography, conformance to compliance regulations, and their overall business credibility and capabilities.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-SupplierQualifcationWorkflow.png|520px|8.0-SRM-SupplierQualifcationWorkflow.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">Buyers can define assessment forms that can be filled externally by the suppliers or internally by the buyers. Such suppliers could be rated and qualified as registered and entered automatically in the supplier master in ICI. </div> <div class="image-green-border">Buyers can:</div>
*Create the supplier qualification manually.
*View the history of the actions performed on the supplier qualification.
*Initiate request for missing documents or certificates from supplier.

'''Note''': The left navigation pane and the icons on the supplier qualification “Details” page are displayed based on the privileges granted to the logged-on user.

 

 

 

 

 

 

=== Creating a Supplier Qualification  ===

Supplier Qualification is created automatically after the supplier registration is approved or is created manually by buyers. 

The buyer can create a qualification from within the App in the following ways:

*From the “Create” workbench on the “Home” page.
*From the “Supplier Management” tile.

'''Creating Supplier Qualification using “Create” workbench'''

'''Click''' the plus icon on the top right corner of the “Home” page to open the “Create” workbench and then click “Supplier Qualification” to open the “Create Supplier Qualification” page. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-SupplierQualificationWorkbench.png|520px|8.0-SRM-SupplierQualificationWorkbench.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">Follow the steps mentioned below to create supplier qualification. </div> <div class="image-green-border"><br/> '''Creating Supplier Qualification using “Supplier Management” tile'''<br/>  </div>
To create supplier qualification: 

1. '''Click''' Supplier Management on the Home page and then '''click''' "Supplier Qualification". The  Supplier Qualification index page opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierQualification.png|520px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierQualification.png]]</div>
2. '''Click '''"Create" on the supplier qualification index page. The "Create Supplier Qualification" page opens. 
<div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-SupplierQualificationIndexPage.PNG|720px|8.1-SupplierQualificationIndexPage.PNG]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">You can inherit the supplier registration for which you want to create the supplier qualification. <br/> The Create Supplier Qualification page consists of the following sections: </div>
*Introduction: This section consists of the basic information about the supplier.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierQualification1.png|720px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierQualification1.png]]</div>
*Supplier Profile Details: This section consists of multiple options as below: 
**Vendor Type: It is used to depict the type of vendor. For example, supplier, provider, sub-contractor and so on.
**Legal Entity Name: This is the legal entity name of the supplier organization. For example, Acme Corporation. 
**Doing Business As: The business name used by the supplier, in cases where suppliers may conduct business by a name different from their registered legal entity name.
**D&B number: A 9-digit unique number assigned by Duns & Bradstreet to any organization.
**Primary Business Address Line 1: This is the supplier company’s official address, that includes the building and street details.
**Unique Supplier ID: This is a unique ID assigned to all suppliers.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierQualification2.png|720px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierQualification2.png]]</div>
*Supplier Contact Information: Type the values of attributes in this section to add the supplier contact information.
**Primary Contact First Name: The first name of the designated primary contact of the supplier organization.
**Primary Contact Last Name: The last name of the designated primary contact of the supplier organization.
**Designation: The name or title of the designated primary contact of the supplier organization.
**Email: The email address of the designated point of contact from the supplier side. 
**Phone number: The phone number of the designated point of contact from the supplier side.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierQualification3.png|720px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierQualification3.png]]</div>
*Key Business Information: Type the values of attributes in this section to enter the key business information.
**Ownership Status: The ownership status of the supplier organization. For example,  Corporation. 
**Select the industry in which supplier operates: The industry in which the supplier organization operates in. For example, Appliance Parts.
** Product/Services Provided: The products or services provided by the supplier organization. For example, Ball Bearings.
** Head of Organization Name: This is the supplier organization’s head personnel.
** Head of Organization Email: This is the supplier organization’s head personnel’s official email address.
**What year was your company incorporated: The year in which the supplier organization was incorporated.
**Annual Revenue of the last financial year in USD: The annual revenue of the supplier organization for the last financial year.
**Do you have a parent company: Select “Yes” if the supplier organization for which the qualification is being created has the parent organization.
**Are you a Holding Company: This helps capture whether the selected company is a holding company. Select “Yes” to make it the holding company. Holding companies are setup specifically to group multiple subsidiaries together. 
**Holding Company Name: This displays the list of all holding companies where “Is Holding Company” option is set as “True”.
**Are you a Parent Company: This helps capture whether the company is the parent company. The default value of this attribute is set to “No”. Select “Yes” to make it the parent company. Parent companies typically have controlling interest in other companies that provides them the right to control other company’s interests.
**Parent Company Name: Is the one that has controlling interest and has the right to control  the subsidiaries operations. This option is enabled only if the "Do you have a Parent Company" is selected as "Yes". This displays the list of all parent companies where “IsParentCompany” option is set as “True”.
**Parent Company DBA: This option is enabled only if the "Do you have a Parent Company" is selected as "Yes". This specifies the name with which the company does the business.
**Region Served: The region where the supplier organization provides its products and services. 
**Sub Region Served: The sub region where the supplier organization provides its products and services.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierQualification4.png|720px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierQualification4.png]]</div>
*Due Diligence Details: '''Select''' the appropriate value of the attribute under this section
**Do you have a quality management process: '''Select''' Yes if the supplier organization has the quality management process, else '''select''' No.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierQualification5.png|720px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierQualification5.png]]</div>
If a buyer selects Yes, the If you answered yes to the above question, please provide additional details option is enabled. Enter the information if any in this option.

*Internal: This section consists of the following options.
**Qualification Code: Is created automatically after the qualification is created. 
**Qualification Rating: Select the appropriate value to specify the rating of the supplier for whom the qualification is created. For example, select Low Risk. 
**Qualification Score: Type the qualification score for the supplier for whom the qualification is created. For example, 10. 
**Supplier Classification: Lists the different categories of suppliers. For example, select Standard Supplier.
**Internal Comments: Enter the internal comments if any.

 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierQualification6.png|720px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierQualification6.png]]</div>
*KPI: This section consists of the following options. 
**Registration Decision Date:  The date when registration decisions (like On-hold, Reject, Approve etc.) are taken.
**Time taken to complete registration: The time taken by the procurement team to approve the supplier registration.
**Deviation from SLA for Registration: Indicates whether there was a deviation from the SLA for supplier registration.
** Is registration process completed timely? : If decision time exceeds SLA, then it implies that the registration process is not completed in a timely manner. If it is less than the SLA, then the registration process is marked as completed in time.
** Qualification Creation Date: The date on which the supplier qualification was created.
** Qualification SLA: The decided commitment between the buyer and external supplier about completing the supplier qualification.
** Qualification Decision Date: The date on which the qualification was approved or rejected for the supplier.
**Time taken to complete qualification: The time taken by procurement or compliance team to approve or reject the supplier qualification.
**Deviation from SLA for Qualification: The deviation if any from the SLA for the supplier qualification.
**Is qualification process completed timely? : If decision time exceeds SLA, then it implies that the qualification process is not completed in a timely manner. If it is less than the SLA, then the qualification process is marked as completed in time.
**Qualification is valid till (In Months): The duration (in months) till which the qualification is valid.
**Qualification Expiry Date: The expiry date of the supplier qualification.

2. '''Click''' Next. The Verify (Step 4 of 4) page opens.<br/> 3. '''Click''' Create Qualification. The qualification is created in the Qualification Initiated state.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierQualification7.PNG|600px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierQualification7.PNG]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">You can perform the following actions on this page:  </div>
*Edit Qualification
*Send for Approval
*Need More Information

 

 

=== Viewing Supplier Qualification  ===

Buyers can view the supplier qualification from the Supplier Management tile. 

To view the supplier qualification:

1. '''Click''' Supplier Management and then '''click''' Supplier Qualification on the Home page. The supplier qualification index page opens. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierQualification.png|600px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierQualification.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">2. '''Click''' the icon next to the supplier qualification to view it. </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-ViewSupplierQualification1.PNG|600px|8.0-SRM-ViewSupplierQualification1.PNG]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

 

=== Editing Supplier Qualification  ===

A supplier qualification can be edited as follows:

1. '''Click''' Edit Qualification on the qualification Details page. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-EditSupplierQualification.png|720px|8.0-SRM-EditSupplierQualification.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">2. Make the desired changes and '''click''' Next.<br/> 3. Verify all information and '''click''' Update. The qualification will get updated with the latest changes.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-EditSupplierQualification1.PNG|600px|8.0-SRM-EditSupplierQualification1.PNG]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

 

=== Supplier Outreach  ===

Buyer organization often needs more information from suppliers when performing qualification, procurement, and compliance process for suppliers. Suppliers are provided temporary and restricted access to ICI to provide missing documents. Suppliers can then submit the documents or raise queries.<br/> Users can send the supplier qualification for review for its quality and compliance check. <br/> To perform supplier outreach: <br/> 1. '''Click''' Need More Information on the Supplier Qualification Details page. The Search User window opens. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-SupplierOutreach.png|720px|8.0-SRM-SupplierOutreach.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">2. '''Select''' the supplier contact on the Third Party tab to whom you want to send the supplier qualification for review and '''click''' Send. Buyers can also add a note about the documents that are missing in the Add Note section. The status of the supplier qualification changes to Information Pending from <user>.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-SupplierOutreach1.png|720px|8.0-SRM-SupplierOutreach1.png]]</div>
Suppliers receive a note in the form of email notification indicating the documents that are missing to complete the process of supplier qualification. 

Users can perform following actions in this state:

*Cancel Request: Allows canceling the review request if the buyer raised it accidentally. Clicking this changes the status of the supplier qualification to Qualification Initiated again.
*Submit: Suppliers can upload the missing or additional documents and submit them on which a notification is sent to the buyer team. 
*Raise Query: Suppliers can raise query with the buyer team on which a notification is sent to the buyer team. Clicking this changes the status of the supplier qualification to Qualification Initiated again.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-SupplierOutreach2.png|720px|8.0-SRM-SupplierOutreach2.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 '''Accessing Supplier Qualification as Supplier'''

External Suppliers can access the supplier qualification to provide more information as required. <br/> To access the supplier qualification: <br/> 1. '''Click''' the eye icon next to the specific task to open the supplier qualification in “Information Pending from <Supplier” state.>.''' '''<br/> 2. '''Click''' Raise Query to edit the supplier qualification and make the required changes or '''click''' Submit to the supplier qualification as a supplier. 
<div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-SupplierOutreach3.png|720px|8.0-SRM-SupplierOutreach3.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

 

=== Approving Supplier Qualification  ===

The approvers can perform the following actions on the Supplier Qualification “Details” page. 

*Approve Qualification
*Delegate Qualification
*Start Internal Assessment 
*Reject Qualification
*Rework Required
*Review Qualification

To approve the qualification:

1. '''Click''' Approve Qualification on the Supplier Qualification Details page. The Add Note window opens.

 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-ApproveQualification.png|720px|8.0-SRM-ApproveQualification.png]]</div>
2. '''Type''' the information if any in the Add Note window and '''click''' Add. The status of the supplier qualification changes to Qualification Approved.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-ApproveQualification1.png|720px|8.0-SRM-ApproveQualification1.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-ApproveQualification3.png|720px|8.0-SRM-ApproveQualification3.png]]</div>
Supplier Profile is created automatically after the supplier qualification is approved, if the supplier profile did not exist.  If supplier profile already existed based on unique parameters, the supplier profile is updated. 

 

 

=== Delegating a Supplier Qualification  ===

Approvers can delegate the task of approving or rejecting the supplier qualification to other users. <br/> To delegate a supplier qualification:<br/> 1. '''Click '''Delegate on supplier qualification Details page. The Search User window opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-DelegateQualification.png|720px|8.0-SRM-DelegateQualification.png]]</div>
2. Search the required user or select it from the available list. <br/> 3. '''Click''' Add. The Agreement task delegated successfully message appears.

'''Note''': You can recall delegation on supplier qualification Details page by clicking Recall Delegation.

 

 

=== <br/> Starting Internal Assessment of Supplier Qualification  ===

Approvers can perform internal assessment of the supplier qualification when it is sent for approval.

1. '''Click''' Start Internal Assessment on the qualification Details page.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-InternalAssessmentSupplierQualification.png|720px|8.0-SRM-InternalAssessmentSupplierQualification.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">2. Make the desired changes and '''click''' Next.<br/> 3.  Verify all information and '''click''' Update. The qualification will get updated with the latest changes.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

 

=== Rejecting Supplier Qualification  ===

Approvers can reject the supplier qualification if it does not meet the requirements of the buyer organization.<br/> To reject a supplier qualification: <br/> 1. '''Click''' Reject Qualification on supplier qualification Details page. The Add Note window opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-RejectQualification.png|720px|8.0-SRM-RejectQualification.png]]</div>
2. Enter a note and select a reason for rejection. <br/> 3. '''Click''' Add. The status of the supplier qualification changes to Qualification Rejected.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-RejectQualification1.png|720px|8.0-SRM-RejectQualification1.png]]<br/>  </div>
'''Note''': Users cannot perform any action on the rejected supplier qualification.

 

=== Reworking Supplier Qualification  ===

Approvers can click the ''Rework Required'' on the supplier qualification ''Details'' page to send the supplier qualification for rework. This changes the status of supplier qualification to ''Qualification Initiated''. The qualification is sent for rework if the approver finds that the qualification is not done properly.

=== Reviewing Supplier Qualification  ===

Buyer teams may require reviewing the supplier qualification from compliance or other business teams. They can do this by initiating the review by clicking the ''Review Qualification'' button.<br/> Follow the same steps mentioned in the Supplier Outreach section to review the supplier qualification. 

 

=== Recalling Supplier Qualification  ===

Buyer can recall the supplier qualification to make any changes to it as required.<br/> To recall a supplier qualification: 

1. '''Click''' Recall on supplier qualification Details page. The Add Note window opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-RecallQualification.png|720px|8.0-SRM-RecallQualification.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">2. Enter the note and select the reason code for recalling. <br/> 3. '''Click''' Add. The status of the supplier qualification changes to Qualification Initiated state. </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

 

== Supplier Qualification Details Page  ==

Buyers can view the status and details of the supplier qualification in various sections of the left navigation pane on supplier qualification Details page. Buyers can also perform a variety of actions based on the status of the supplier qualification.

=== Qualification Left Pane  ===

Here is a brief description of the options in the left navigation pane of supplier qualification Details page.

*Summary: Displays the name of the supplier qualification instance (that is added when creating), who created it, and supplier qualification instance details.
*Details: Displays the details specified when creating the supplier qualification instance.
*Supplier Registration: Supplier Registration is the process that sets the overall app objectives in motion. Supplier registrations must be created at first, before their workflow moves forward towards qualification. Click this option to view the list of associated supplier registration. 
*Team: Displays the members added to the team for this supplier qualification instance. Click the plus icon to add new team members. 
*Collaboration: Allows the internal or external team members to communicate with other internal or external team members by creating topics and posting messages in it. 
*Notes: Displays the additional information about the supplier qualification if it is added.

'''Note''': The left navigation pane of supplier qualification Details page is displayed differently for buyers and suppliers. Some options such as Team, Notes are not displayed to the supplier in the left navigation pane.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-QualificationLeftPane.png|520px|8.0-SRM-QualificationLeftPane.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
=== History  ===

The History displays how the supplier qualification has progressed till now and presents an overall audit for the supplier qualification, under History in the left navigation pane on supplier qualification Details page. History includes the activities and statuses for supplier qualification, with Events, Username, User Role, Date and Time, Details and Notes.
<div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

== Working with Supplier Profile  ==

== Supplier Profile Workflow  ==

Once suppliers pass qualification, they are onboarded, and their detailed supplier profiles are auto created. Suppliers also get access to their profiles to view and update. Supplier Profile is created automatically after the supplier qualification is approved, if the supplier profile did not exist.  If supplier profile already existed based on unique parameters, the supplier profile is updated. 

'''Note''':  Buyers can also create the supplier profile on behalf of the suppliers.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-SupplierProfileWorkflow.png|520px|8.0-SRM-SupplierProfileWorkflow.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">Buyers can: </div>
*Create the supplier profile manually.
*View and edit the supplier profile. 
*View the history of the actions performed on the supplier profile.

'''Note''': The left navigation pane and the icons on the supplier profile ''Details'' page are displayed based on the privileges granted to the logged-on user.

 

 

 

 

 

=== Creating Supplier Profile  ===

Supplier Profile is created automatically after the supplier qualification is approved. After qualification is approved, ICI checks the unique parameters and creates the supplier profile if no match is found.

The buyer can create a  supplier profile from within the App in the following ways:

*From the “Create” workbench on the “Home” page.
*From the “Supplier Management” tile.<br/>  

'''Creating Supplier Profile using “Create” workbench'''

'''Click''' the plus icon on the top right corner of the “Home” page to open the “Create” workbench and then click “Supplier Profile” to open the “Create Supplier Profile” page.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-SupplierProfileWorkbench.png|520px|8.0-SRM-SupplierProfileWorkbench.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">Follow the steps mentioned below to create supplier profile. </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">'''Creating Supplier Profile using “Supplier Management” tile'''<br/>  </div>
 To create supplier profile:

1. '''Click''' Supplier Management on the Home page and then '''click'''  "Supplier Profile". The "Supplier Profile" index page opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierProfile.png|520px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierProfile.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">2. '''Click '''"Create" on supplier profile index page. The "Create Supplier Profile" page opens. </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-SupplierProfileIndexPage.PNG|700px|8.1-SupplierProfileIndexPage.PNG]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">You can inherit the supplier qualification for which you want to create the supplier profile.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierProfile1.png|520px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierProfile1.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">The Create -Supplier Profile page consists of the following sections: </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
*Supplier Account Details: This section contains basic information about the supplier profile being created.
**Vendor Type: It is used to depict the type of vendor. For example, supplier, provider, sub-contractor and so on.
**Products /Services Provided: This is to select the category of products or services that  the supplier provides.
**Global Supplier Code: Is created automatically after the supplier profile is created. 
**Legal Entity Name: This is the legal entity name of the supplier organization.
**Primary Contact First Name: The first name of the designated primary contact of the supplier organization.
**Primary Contact Last Name: The last name of the designated primary contact of the supplier organization.
**Designation: The title of the designated primary contact of the supplier organization.
**Email: The email address of the designated point of contact from the supplier side.
**Phone Number: The phone number of the designated point of contact from the supplier side. 
**Are you a Holding Company: This helps capture whether the selected company is a holding company. '''Select''' “Yes” to make it the holding company. Holding companies are setup specifically to group multiple subsidiaries together.
**Holding Company Name: This displays the list of all holding companies where “Is Holding Company” option is set as “True”.
**Are you a Parent Company: This helps capture whether the company is the parent company. The default value of this attribute is set to “No”. Select “Yes” to make it the parent company. Parent companies typically have controlling interest in other companies that provides them the right to control other company’s interests
**Do you have a parent company?  Select “Yes” if the supplier organization for which the supplier profile is being created has the parent organization. Enter the parent company name if you select “Yes” in this option.
**Parent Company Name: Is the one that has controlling interest and has the right to control  the subsidiaries operations. This option is enabled only if the "Do you have a Parent Company" is selected as "Yes". This displays the list of all parent companies where “IsParentCompany” option is set as “True”. 
** Parent Company DBA: This option is enabled only if the "Do you have a Parent Company" is selected as "Yes". This specifies the name with which the company does the business.
**Supplier Activation Status: Specifies whether the supplier is active or not. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierProfile2.png|720px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierProfile2.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">
 

Supplier Business Details: This section contains the business specific information.

*D&B Number: A 9-digit unique number assigned by Duns & Bradstreet to any organization.
*Ownership Status: The ownership status of the supplier organization. For example, Partnership, Corporation.
*Select the industry in which supplier operates: The industry in which the supplier organization operates in.
*Head of Organization Name: This is the supplier organization’s head personnel.
*Head of Organization Email: This is the supplier organization’s head personnel’s official email address. 
*What year was your company incorporated? The year in which the supplier organization was incorporated.
*Annual Revenue of the last financial year in USD: The annual revenue of the supplier organization for the last financial year.
*Region Served: The region where the supplier organization provides its products and services. 
*Sub Region Served: The sub region where the supplier organization provides its products and services.
</div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierProfile3.png|720px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierProfile3.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border">
 

Supplier Due Diligence Details: Select the appropriate value of the attribute under this section.

*Do you have a quality management process? '''Select''' Yes if the supplier organization has the quality management process, else '''select''' No.
</div>
If a buyer selects Yes, the If you answered yes to the above question, please provide additional details option is enabled. Enter the information if any in this option.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierProfile4.png|720px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierProfile4.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
*Supplier Payment Information: This section contains the payment details of the supplier.
**Preferred Payment Method: The preferred payment method to be used for the suppliers. For example, Check.
**Preferred Payment Terms: The preferred payment terms agreed upon with the supplier. For example, 60 days.
**Bank Account Information: The bank account information of the supplier.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierProfile5.png|720px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierProfile5.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border">
 

Tracking for internal use: This section contains the information to be used by the buyer organization as provided by the supplier.

*Latest Qualification Rating: The latest qualification rating of the supplier profile being created. For example, Low Risk.
*Latest Qualification Score: The latest qualification score of the supplier profile being created. For example, 10. 
*Supplier Classification: The criteria that can be used to classify the suppliers for the business category. For example, High Potential Supplier.
*Registration Decision Date: The date on which the supplier registration was approved. This value is populated automatically based on the legal entity (supplier registration record) selected.
*Time taken to complete registration: The time taken by the procurement team to approve the supplier registration.
* Latest Qualification Decision Date: The date on which the qualification was approved for the supplier profile being created.
*Time taken to complete qualification: The time taken by procurement or compliance team to approve the supplier qualification. 
*Qualification Expiry Date: The expiry date of the supplier qualification. 
</div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierProfile6.png|720px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierProfile6.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">2. '''Select''' the template and '''click''' Next. The Create Supplier Profile page opens <br/> 3. '''Click''' Create Profile to create the supplier profile. The supplier profile is created in Draft state.</div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierProfile7.png|520px|8.0-SRM-CreateSupplierProfile7.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

=== Viewing Supplier Profile  ===

Buyers can view the supplier profile from the Supplier Management tile. <br/> To view the supplier profile:

1. '''Click''' Supplier Management and then '''click''' Supplier Profile on the Home page. The supplier profile index page opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-ViewSupplierProfile.PNG|600px|8.0-SRM-ViewSupplierProfile.PNG]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">2. '''Click''' the icon next to the supplier profile to view it.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-ViewSupplierProfile1.png|720px|8.0-SRM-ViewSupplierProfile1.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

 

=== Editing Supplier Profile  ===

A supplier profile can be edited as follows:

1. '''Click''' Edit Profile on the profile Details page.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-EditSupplierProfile.png|720px|8.0-SRM-EditSupplierProfile.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">2. Make the desired changes and '''click''' Next.</div> <div class="image-green-border">3. Verify all information and '''click''' Update. The profile will get updated with the latest changes.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">'''Note''': Buyers or Supplier can edit the supplier profile when its status is Approved and the status changes to Draft after editing it.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

 

=== Approving Supplier Profile  ===

The approvers can perform the following actions on the Supplier Profile Details page.

*Edit Profile
*Approve
*Reject
*Delegate

To approve the supplier profile:

1. '''Click''' Approve on the supplier profile Details page. The Add Note window opens. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-ApproveProfile.png|720px|8.0-SRM-ApproveProfile.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">2. '''Type''' the information if any in the Add Note window and '''click''' Add. The status of the supplier qualification changes to Approved.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

 

=== Rejecting Supplier Profile  ===

Approvers can reject the supplier profile if it does not meet the requirements of the buyer organization. 

To reject a supplier profile:

1. '''Click''' Reject on supplier profile Details page. The Add Note window opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-RejectProfile.png|720px|8.0-SRM-RejectProfile.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">2. Enter a note and select a reason for rejection.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-RejectProfile1.png|720px|8.0-SRM-RejectProfile1.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">3. '''Click''' Add. The status of the supplier profile changes to Draft.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

 

=== Recalling Supplier Profile  ===

Buyer or Supplier can recall the supplier profile to make any changes to it as required when it is in Waiting for Approval state.

To recall a supplier profile: 

1.  '''Click''' Recall on supplier profile Details page.  The Add Note window opens indicating to add the reason for recalling the supplier profile.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-RecallProfile.png|720px|8.0-SRM-RecallProfile.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">2. '''Select''' the Reason Code on the Add Note window and '''click''' Add.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-RecallProfile1.png|720px|8.0-SRM-RecallProfile1.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">The status of the supplier profile changes to Draft again.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

 

=== Delegating Supplier Profile  ===

Approvers can delegate the task of approving or rejecting the supplier profile to other users.

To delegate the supplier profile:

1. '''Click''' Delegate on supplier profile Details page. The Search User window opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-DelegateProfile.png|RTENOTITLE]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">2. '''Search''' the required user or select it from the available list. <br/> 3. '''Click''' Add. The Agreement task delegated successfully message appears.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">'''Note''': You can recall delegation on supplier profile Details page by clicking Recall Delegation.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

 

== Supplier Profile Details Page ==

Buyers can view the status and details of the supplier profile in various sections of the left navigation pane on supplier profile Details page.

=== Profile Left Pane ===

Here is a brief description of the options in the left navigation pane of supplier profile Details page.

*Summary: Displays the name of the supplier profile instance (that is added when creating), who created it, and supplier profile instance details.
*Details: Displays the details specified when creating the supplier profile instance.
*All: Displays the list of associations relevant to the supplier profile being created.
**Supplier Qualification: Supplier Qualification is the process of ensuring that the registered supplier is qualified to meet the requirements of the buyer organization. Click this option to view the list of associated supplier qualifications. 
*Supplier Master: This manages the details of all suppliers and their organizations. Suppliers are created automatically after qualification is approved and the supplier is added automatically in the supplier master.
*Supplier Contact: This manages the list of all supplier contact information of every supplier organization.  The supplier contact is created automatically in supplier contact master. It is used by Sourcing teams for events such as RFx.
*Team: Displays the members added to the team for this supplier profile instance. '''Click '''the plus icon to add new team members to the supplier profile.
*Collaboration: Allows the internal or external team members to communicate with other internal or external team members by creating topics and posting messages in it.
*Notes: Displays the additional information about the supplier profile if it is added.

 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-SupplierProfileLeftPane.png|720px|8.0-SRM-SupplierProfileLeftPane.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">'''Note''': The left navigation pane for the buyer displays all the options relevant to the supplier profile as against the options displayed relevant to and for the supplier profile. Some options such as Team, Notes are not displayed to the supplier in the left navigation pane.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
=== History  ===

The History displays how the supplier profile has progressed till now and presents an overall audit for the supplier profile, under History in the left navigation pane on supplier profile Details page. History includes the activities and statuses for supplier profile, with Events, Username, User Role, Date and Time, Details and Notes.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SupplierProfileHistory.png|720px|8.0-SupplierProfileHistory.png]]</div>
'''Accessing Supplier Profile as Supplier '''

External Suppliers can access the supplier profile after onboarding.

To access the supplier profile:

1. '''Click''' Supplier Profile on the Home page. The Search page opens and displays their profile.

2. '''Click''' the supplier profile to be accessed by clicking the eye icon to open the supplier profile in Approved state. 

3. '''Click''' Edit Profile to edit the supplier profile and make the required changes or '''click''' Send for Approval to send the supplier profile for approval. The status of the supplier profile changes to Approved once it is approved by the buyer team.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SupplierProfileSupplierView.png|720px|8.0-SupplierProfileSupplierView.png]]</div>
 

 

== Managing Supplier Hierarchy ==

=== Managing Relevant Supplier Organizations ===

The Supplier Relationship Management application now provides a mechanism to connect supplier organizations with their Parent, Holding or Subsidiary organizations. This is to ensure that you have a complete overview of the business you do with one supplier and its related entities.

Following attributes have been updated or newly introduced when creating or editing supplier registration, qualification, or profile.

•    Vendor Type: It is used to depict the type of vendor. For example, supplier, provider, sub-contractor and so on.<br/> •    Are you a Holding Company: This helps capture whether the selected company is a holding company. Select “Yes” to make it the holding company. Holding companies are setup specifically to group multiple subsidiaries together.  .  <br/> •    Holding Company Name: This displays the list of all holding companies where “Is Holding Company” option is set as “True”. <br/> •    Are you a Parent Company: This helps capture whether the company is the parent company? The default value of this attribute is set to “No”. Select “Yes” to make it the parent company. Parent companies typically have controlling interest in other companies that provides them the right to control other company’s interests.  <br/> •    Parent Company Name: Is the one that has controlling interest and has the right to control  the subsidiaries operations. This option is enabled only if the "Do you have a Parent Company" is selected as "Yes". This displays the list of all parent companies where “IsParentCompany” option is set as “True”. <br/> •    Parent Company DBA: This option is enabled only if the "Do you have a Parent Company" is selected as "Yes". This specifies the name with which the company does the business.<br/> •    Supplier Activation Status: Specifies whether the supplier is active or not.

 

== Unique Supplier ID across Supplier Onboarding ==

After the supplier registration is created, the “Unique Supplier ID”  is populated automatically.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-UniqueSupplierID.png|920px|8.0-SRM-UniqueSupplierID.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">After the supplier registration is approved, and qualification is auto created, the value of the “Unique Supplier ID” is same as that for the supplier registration. <br/> The value for “Unique Supplier ID” is displayed after creating qualification without an existing  supplier registration. </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-UniqueSupplierID1.png|920px|8.0-SRM-UniqueSupplierID1.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"><br/> After the supplier qualification is approved, and supplier profile is auto created, the value of the “Unique Supplier ID” remains the same as that of supplier registration and qualification.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-UniqueSupplierID2.png|720px|8.0-SRM-UniqueSupplierID2.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">When creating another supplier registration or profile for the same vendor with the same legal entity name, an error is displayed indicating that the record already exists.  </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-UniqueSupplierID3.png|300px|8.0-SRM-UniqueSupplierID3.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">ICI allows creating only one registration and one profile per supplier. However, one supplier can have multiple qualifications.<br/> The values for “Legal Entity Name”, “Unique Supplier ID” are not editable as displayed in the image below.  <br/>  </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-UniqueSupplierID4.png|720px|8.0-SRM-UniqueSupplierID4.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">'''Vendor Database'''</div> <div class="image-green-border"><br/> The masterdata record is created in the vendor database with the same “Unique Supplier ID”. </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">To access the masterdata record:<br/> 1. '''Click''' “Configure” > “Masterdata” and then click the “View Details” icon next to the vendor database masterdata record. </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-VendorDatabase.png|720px|8.0-SRM-VendorDatabase.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">The value for “Unique Vendor ID” is the same as that of “Unique Supplier ID” for Supplier Registration, Qualification and Profile. </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-VendorDatabase1.png|720px|8.0-SRM-VendorDatabase1.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">The unique vendor ID is stored as a Global Supplier Code in the Supplier Master and Supplier Contact Master.<br/> '''Note''': The Legal Entity Name is the parameter to uniquely identify supplier. Every client implementation can have a different set of identifiers to uniquely identify a supplier.<br/>  </div> <div class="image-green-border">
=== Managing Unique Supplier Records ===

The uniqueness of a supplier record is validated based on a combination of attributes.  One or more of the unique identifier’s attributes can be made editable. This is to account for entities that may change the Legal Entity Name while doing business, considering legal entity name is one of the unique identifier attributes. 

If the unique identifier attributes are configured as editable, only then the attributes will be editable in supplier profile. If such attributes are changed for an organization, the ICI Supplier Relationship Management validates and checks for duplicate records before allowing users to make the change. For example, buyers can edit the existing supplier master using the following steps:

1.     '''Click '''“Masterdata” and then '''click '''the icon next to “Supplier Master”. The Supplier Master “Details” page opens.

2.    '''Edit '''the value in the “Name” option and '''click '''“Update”.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1srmapp1.png|600px|8.1srmapp1.png]]</div>
The following error is displayed indicating that the supplier already exists.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1srmapp2.png|480px|8.1srmapp2.png]]</div>
If the supplier does not exist already, then the masterdata record is updated and synchronized with the supplier profile and vendor database.

Users can modify any attributes of the vendor database apart from the unique set of supplier identifiers in Supplier Registration, Qualification or Profile.
</div>

== Supplier Onboarding Dashboard ==

ICI Supplier Onboarding and Diversity Compliance App allows users with appropriate privileges to access the newly introduced “Dashboard” tile. <br/> To access the Supplier Onboarding Dashboard:

1. Click on “Supplier Management” tile on Home page. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-SRM-SupplierOnboardingDashboard.png|600px|8.0-SRM-SupplierOnboardingDashboard.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">2. Click on “Dashboard”. “Supplier Registration” dashboard opens. </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">Users can access the following reports from the “Supplier Management Dashboard” page.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
*Supplier Registration
*Supplier Qualification 
*Onboarded Supplier Dashboard
*Supplier Profile

'''Supplier Registration Dashboard'''

This Dashboard provides overall insight of Suppliers who are registered. Filters such as Registration Status, Annual Revenue, Country etc. facilitate user to get accurate data. 
<div class="image-green-border" paraeid="{f8a17157-1c0c-4b72-ab93-c38ad1a7f3a6}{97}" paraid="1416407541">[[File:Supplier Registration Dashboard.png|720px]]</div>
 

Users can filter and view the supplier registration specific information such as :

*The number of registrations filtered by its status. 
*The number of registrations filtered by the product or service categories.
*The number of submitted registrations per year, month or quarter.
*The details   of registrations by the legal entity name, registration status and so on. Clicking the case URL under the Reg code column opens the case details in a new tab.<br/>  

[[File:8.0-SRM-SupplierRegistration.png|720px|8.0-SRM-SupplierRegistration.png]]

'''Supplier Qualification Dashboard '''
<ol start="3">
<li>
Click on “Supplier Qualification” tab from bottom tabs. 
</li>
</ol>

This Dashboard provides overall insight into Supplier Qualifications along with filters such as Case Status, Ownership Status, Supplier classifications etc. 
<div class="image-green-border" paraeid="{f8a17157-1c0c-4b72-ab93-c38ad1a7f3a6}{130}" paraid="188440877">[[File:Qualification Dashboard.png|720px]]</div>
 
<div class="image-green-border">Users can filter and view the supplier qualification specific information such as:</div>
*The number of qualifications filtered by its status. 
*The number of qualifications filtered across the product or service categories.
*The details   of qualifications by the legal entity name, qualification status and so on.   Clicking the case URL under the Case ID column opens the case details in a new tab. 
* It also captures the cases that await supplier inputs for tracking.

'''Onboarding Dashboard'''
<ol start="4">
<li>
Click on “Onboarded Supplier Dashboard” from bottom tabs. 
</li>
</ol>

This Dashboard provides an overview of onboarded suppliers. It has geographical distribution, Supplier on watchlist, Ownership structure section for better clarity on onboarded suppliers. It provides filters such as Profile Status, Products/ Services Provided etc. 
<div class="image-green-border" paraeid="{f8a17157-1c0c-4b72-ab93-c38ad1a7f3a6}{177}" paraid="416222021">[[File:Onboarding Dashboard.png|720px]]</div>
 

Users can filter and view the onboarding specific information such as:

*The number of suppliers onboarded by status and country. 
*The number of suppliers across products, or services.
*The details   of suppliers onboarded based on the legal entity name, and so on.   Clicking the link under the Global Supplier Code column opens the case details in a new tab. 
*It also displays the suppliers on the watchlist that helps the teams to track them.

'''Supplier Profile Dashboard'''
<ol start="5">
<li>
Click on “Supplier Profile” tab from bottom tabs. 
</li>
</ol>
<ol start="6">
<li>
Select supplier from “Legal Entity Name” dropdown  
</li>
</ol>

This dashboard will provide specific supplier profile details along with its evaluation and qualification details. 
<div class="image-green-border" paraeid="{f8a17157-1c0c-4b72-ab93-c38ad1a7f3a6}{228}" paraid="1052857358">[[File:Supplier Profile.png|720px]]</div>
 

Users can search by the legal entity   name and view the Supplier Profile specific information such as: 

*Details of qualifications linked with the supplier profile.
*Details of supplier contacts linked with the supplier profile

'''Note''': The supplier does have access to the Dashboard. 

'''Performance Evaluation Dashboard '''
<ol start="7">
<li>
Click on “Supplier Evaluation” tab from bottom tabs. 
</li>
</ol>

This Dashboard allows the Procurement team to analyze and evaluate performance of all Suppliers based on status and take appropriate actions with help of KPI metrics performance.  It provides an overview of the ageing of evaluations in review or approval states. Also, the complex process of identifying top and poor performing suppliers is made easy. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Performance Evaluation Dashboard.png|720px]]</div>
'''Performance Score Card Dashboard '''
<ol start="8">
<li>
Click on “Performance Score Card” tab from bottom tabs. 
</li>
</ol>
<ol start="9">
<li>
Select supplier from “Legal Entity Name” dropdown at right navigation. 
</li>
</ol>

 In addition to other dashboards, a 360-degree snapshot of any specific supplier is provided in the Performance Score Card dashboard. Users can view the performance trend, Supplier certificates that are expired or are expiring within 5 days, color coded performance evaluation section, KPI – Expected Rating vs Actual Rating. 
<div class="image-green-border" paraeid="{ec6423c1-ba7c-405c-8136-4ba59b41051f}{72}" paraid="1926899406">[[File:Performance Score Card.png|720px]]</div>

== Working with Supplier Evaluation ==

Supplier Evaluation module is part of the Supplier Relationship Management application, which is built on Icertis Contract Intelligence. <br/> Once suppliers are onboarded, users can evaluate suppliers on the products or services they offer. The KPI criteria, schedule, and the evaluators can be set up within the module and on   completing the assessment the supplier can be classified as high performing, low performing or standard supplier.<br/> A routine supplier evaluation can help organizations set expectations from their preferred suppliers and manage low performing suppliers.<br/> Supplier Evaluation can be created using the following details: 

*Supplier Details 
*Evaluation Details 
*Evaluation Schedule
*Outcome 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-SupplierEvaluationOverview.png|600px|8.1-SupplierEvaluationOverview.png]]</div>
 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-SupplierEvaluationFlow.png|600px]]</div>
 

=== Creating Supplier Evaluation  ===

To create a supplier evaluation: 

Buyers must inherit the specific supplier profile for creating the supplier evaluation.  Buyers can create the evaluation from the “Create” workbench as well as from the supplier evaluation index page. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-SupplierEvaluation1.png|600px|8.1-SupplierEvaluation1.png]]</div>
The “Create Supplier Evaluation” page consists of the following sections. 

1. '''Select''' or enter the information on this page.

*Supplier Details: This section includes the basic information about the supplier such as: 
**Unique Supplier ID
**Legal Entity Name
**Vendor Type 
**Industry in which the supplier operates 
**Products/Services Provided 
**Primary Contact First Name 
**Primary Contact Last Name
**Primary Contact Email 
*Evaluation Details: This section includes the evaluation specific information such as:
**Evaluation ID: The unique identification details of the supplier evaluation that is generated automatically after creating.
**Evaluation to be performed for: This consists of the following options.
***Suppliers across all products/services : The suppliers are evaluated for all products and service offerings.
***Suppliers for a particular product/service category: Suppliers must select the product or service offerings for which the supplier must be evaluated. Selecting this option enables the option to select the “Product/Service category for evaluation”.
***Supplier for a particular Agreement: Suppliers are prompted to capture agreement ID for reference when evaluating the supplier performance against a specific agreement. Selecting this option enables the option to enter the “Agreement ID”.
**Evaluation Type: Buyers can perform different types of evaluations depending on the type of industry. For example, Technical evaluation is conducted to ensure that the supplier is capable of providing relevant products or services with the required quality.
**Evaluation Sub Type: This captures the evaluation details and categorization.
**Triggering Event: Is the event that initiates the performance evaluation for the supplier.
*Evaluation Schedule: This section includes the evaluation schedule specific parameters such as :
**Performance Evaluation Period Start Date   : This is used for capturing the start date of the time in which supplier performance is evaluated. For example, if the supplier is evaluated for the past quarter, then enter the date as 1 January 2022. 
**Performance Evaluation Period End Date : This is used for capturing the end date of the time in which the supplier performance is evaluated. For example, if the supplier is evaluated for the past quarter, then enter the date as 31 March 2022.
**Completion Due Date: This is used to capture the deadline by which the supplier evaluation must be completed.
**Actual Completion Date: This captures the actual date of completing the supplier evaluation.
**Time taken to complete Evaluation: This calculates the time taken to complete the supplier evaluation (in days).
**Evaluation is valid for (in Months) : This defines the time in months for which the performance scoring and classification will be valid. 
**Evaluation validity date: Is the addition of the actual completion date and the period for which the evaluation is valid for. ICI Supplier Relationship Management computes the date till when the performance scoring and classification will be valid.
*Outcome: This section includes the evaluation outcome specific parameters such as:
**Performance Evaluation Overall Score : It is the sum of the actual score of all the Evaluation KPIs added to the supplier evaluation.
**Performance Evaluation Overall Rating : Supplier performance overall rating is defined based on the overall evaluation score.
**Rating Comments (If Any): This is the additional information to justify the comments added for a particular supplier when performing the evaluation. 
**Supplier Performance Classification: This helps in classifying the performance and defining the relationship with the supplier. For example, a supplier can be a high performing supplier, standard supplier etc.
**Does Supplier require development plan for performance improvement and monitoring periodically: This option will be enabled when the supplier is classified as poor performing supplier. 
**Development Plan Comments: The development plan is introduced for suppliers classified as poor performers. 
**Create Tracking Obligation: This is enabled if the supplier requires a development plan and if tasks need to be created for tracking the performance improvement.
**Create Tracking Risk: This is enabled if the supplier requires a development and if there are risks involved in the process of performance improvement.

2. '''Click''' “Next” to open the “Verify” page and verify the information added.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-SupplierEvaluation2.png|720px|8.1-SupplierEvaluation2.png]]</div>
3. '''Click''' “Create Evaluation”. The evaluation is created in “Evaluation Initiated” state. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-SupplierEvaluation3.png|720px|8.1-SupplierEvaluation3.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>

=== Supplier Evaluation Details Page''' ''' ===

The Supplier Evaluation Details page is based upon the standard ICI structure. 

'''Evaluation Left Pane '''

These are the left pane items seeded with the supplier evaluation “Details” page for the buyer team.

*Summary: Displays the name of the Supplier Evaluation (that is added while creating), who created it, and Supplier Evaluation instance details. 
*Details: Displays the details specified while creating the supplier evaluation.
*History: Displays how the supplier evaluation has progressed till now, including the actions performed in supplier evaluation, as is under “History” in the left pane. Buyers can also view the history by clicking the status of the supplier evaluation which opens the “History” drawer. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-SupplierEvaluation-History.png|500px|8.1-SupplierEvaluation-History.png]]</div>
*Associations: Displays the number of associated documents to the supplier evaluation. Click the plus icon to add new associations to the supplier evaluation.
**Supplier Profile: Displays the supplier profile associated with the supplier evaluation. 
**Supplier Documents: Supplier documents can be accessed by buyers and suppliers. Suppliers can provide additional information relevant to evaluation as per the requirement. Click the plus icon to create the supplier documents.
**Evaluation KPI: Displays the key performance indicators based on which the supplier will be evaluated. Click the plus icon to create the evaluation KPI. 
**Internal Documents: Displays the list of documents relevant to the supplier being evaluated and are visible to the buyer team only.

The left navigation pane also displays the Commitments, Collaboration, Team, Notes relevant to the supplier evaluation. 

'''Note''' : Suppliers get limited access on the left navigation pane on the evaluation “Summary” page based on the privileges.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-SupplierEvaluation-LeftPanel.png|920px|8.1-SupplierEvaluation-LeftPanel.png]]</div>
 

=== Editing Evaluation ===

A Supplier Evaluation can be edited as follows: 

1. '''Click''' “Edit Evaluation” on the Supplier Evaluation “Summary” page. The “Edit Supplier Evaluation” page opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-EditEvaluation.png|400px|8.1-EditEvaluation.png]]</div>
2. Make the desired changes and '''click''' “Next”.

3. '''Verify''' all the information and '''click''' “Update”. The evaluation will get updated with the latest changes. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-EditEvaluation1.png|720px|8.1-EditEvaluation1.png]]</div>
 

=== Supplier Outreach ===

Buyer organization often needs more information from suppliers when performing supplier evaluation. Suppliers are provided temporary and restricted access to ICI to provide missing documents. Suppliers can then submit the documents or raise queries.

Request Review option is not displayed when the evaluation is in progress.

Discard Evaluation option is displayed only when the evaluation is in the initiated state.

To perform supplier outreach:

1. '''Click''' “Request Review” on the supplier evaluation “Summary” page. The “Request Review” window opens indicating to select the supplier user from the “Third Party” tab.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-SupplierEvaluation-Outreach.png|720px|8.1-SupplierEvaluation-Outreach.png]]</div>
2. '''Select''' the supplier contact on the “Third Party” tab to whom you want to send the supplier evaluation for review and '''click''' “Send”.

'''Note''': Buyers can add additional information in the “Add Note” section before sending it for supplier review. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-SupplierEvaluation-RequestReview.png|720px|8.1-SupplierEvaluation-RequestReview.png]]</div>
Suppliers receive a note in the form of email notification indicating the documents that are missing to complete the process of supplier evaluation. <br/> The status of the supplier evaluation changes to “Review Pending”.  Buyers can perform the following actions at this stage:

*Download All: This allows downloading the supplier evaluation along with all the supporting documents. 
*Cancel Request: This allows cancelling the review of supplier evaluation. 

Suppliers can perform limited actions at this stage:

*Adding Supplier Documents: Suppliers can add additional documents to support the supplier evaluation.
*Approve: Allows approving the supplier evaluation documentation.
*Reject: Allows rejecting the supplier evaluation documentation.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-SupplierEvaluation-RequestReview2.png|RTENOTITLE]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>

=== Adding Evaluation KPI ===

Buyers can add evaluation KPIs when the evaluation is in “Evaluation Initiated” state. Evaluation KPIs are the quantifiable measure of supplier performance for the decided timeline. 

To add Evaluation KPI: 

1. '''Click''' the plus icon next to “Evaluation KPI” on the Evaluation “Details” page.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-SupplierEvaluation-Add KPI.png|920px|8.1-SupplierEvaluation-Add KPI.png]]</div>
2. '''Select''' or '''enter''' the details in the following sections.

*Supplier Details : The information is populated automatically based on the information entered while creating the supplier evaluation for the following options. 
**Evaluation to be performed for  : This consists of the following options
***Suppliers across all products/services : The suppliers are evaluated for all products and service offerings. 
***Suppliers for a particular product/service category: Suppliers must select the product or service offerings for which the supplier must be evaluated. Selecting this option enables the option to select the “Product/Service category for evaluation”. 
***Supplier for a particular Agreement: Suppliers are prompted to capture agreement ID for reference when evaluating the supplier performance against a specific agreement. Selecting this option enables the option to enter the “Agreement ID”.
**Evaluation Type: Buyers can perform different types of evaluations depending on the type of industry. For example, technical evaluation is conducted to ensure that the supplier can provide relevant products or services with the required quality. 
**Evaluation Sub Type: This captures the evaluation details and categorization. 
**Completion Due Date: This is used to capture the deadline by which the supplier evaluation must be completed.
*Evaluation Department Details: This section captures the hierarchy of business unit of the evaluator who will assess the KPIs.
**Evaluation Party: This is the internal or external organization responsible for performing supplier evaluation.
**Business Unit: Is the business unit responsible for performing the supplier evaluation. For example, product management.
**Functional Team: Is the team within the business unit who is responsible for performing the supplier evaluation. For example, product management applications team. 
**KPI Evaluator: Is the individual person responsible for performing the supplier evaluation. 
**Other KPI Evaluator: Buyers can add more than one KPI evaluators in case the assigned evaluator is not available. 
**KPI Evaluation Approver: Is the user responsible for approving the evaluation performed based on the defined KPIs.
*KPI Details: This section contains the following options. 
**KPI Category: Is the category of the KPI against which the supplier performance is evaluated. For example, Annual Revenue of the supplier organization.
**KPI Metric Name: Are the specific metrics that must be captured under the KPI category against which the supplier performance is evaluated. For example, revenue gains in terms of percentage.
**Unit of Measurement: Is the unit against which the KPI metrics are captured. For example, percentage,
**Expected Rating : Is the rating that is expected as an outcome of the performance evaluation of the supplier.
**Tolerance Threshold Rating: Is the minimum rating expected as an outcome of the performance evaluation.
**KPI Weightage: Is the  weight of the KPIs based on which the supplier performance will be evaluated.
**Value : Is used to capture the absolute KPI score without weightage. 
**Actual KPI Score: It is the multiplication of the values added in KPI Weightage and Value options. This score is used in calculating the performance evaluation overall score.
**Actual Rating: Is the actual rating added for a particular supplier after evaluating.
**Rating comments (if any): This is the additional information to justify the comments added for a particular supplier when performing the evaluation.
**Deviation from Threshold Rating  : Toggle the button as “Yes” in case there is a deviation in the supplier performance rating from the tolerance ratings.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-SupplierEvaluation-Add KPI1.png|600px|8.1-SupplierEvaluation-Add KPI1.png]]</div>
3. '''Click''' “Next”. The “Extension Attributes” window opens displaying the configured questions.

4. '''Select''' or enter the appropriate answers to the questions configured under extension attributes. For example, toggle the option to “Yes” for “Is the Price under Company Structure” and enter the value for “Is the Price under Company Structure Comment” as appropriate.

'''Note''': The questions added under Extension Attributes are defined by buyer team. 

5. '''Click''' “Create”. The evaluation KPI is created, and the count is updated in the left navigation pane on the supplier evaluation “Details” page. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-SupplierEvaluation-Add KPI2.png|720px|8.1-SupplierEvaluation-Add KPI2.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>

=== Starting the Evaluation ===

It is mandatory to add an evaluation KPI before starting the evaluation.  On clicking “Start Evaluation” the evaluation KPIs are sent for assessment to the evaluator if they are not in “Approved” state already.

'''Note''': Clicking “Start Evaluation” before adding an evaluation KPI displays an error indicating to add evaluation KPI. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-SupplierEvaluation-Start-Error.png|300px]]</div>
To start evaluation: 

1. '''Click''' “Start Evaluation” on the evaluation “Details” page. The “Please Confirm” window opens indicating to review if the evaluation KPI are ready before sending to evaluator. Click “Yes” or “No” dependent on whether you want to start evaluation. Clicking “Yes” changes the evaluation status to “Evaluation in Progress  ”.   Clicking “No” keeps the evaluation in the “Evaluation Initiated” state.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-SupplierEvaluation-Start.png|450px]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-SupplierEvaluation-Start1.png|920px]]</div>
 

=== Submitting the Evaluation  ===

Evaluators can submit the evaluation after performing all the necessary steps. <br/> To submit the evaluation: <br/> 1. '''Click''' the eye icon next to the relevant task under “My Tasks” that displays the relevant supplier evaluation to be submitted. The Evaluation KPI “Summary” page opens. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-SupplierEvaluation-Submit.png|600px|8.1-SupplierEvaluation-Submit.png]]</div>
2. '''Click''' “Edit” to edit the supplier evaluation and add the scores, answer questions, and '''click''' “Next”. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-SupplierEvaluation-Submit1.png|520px|8.1-SupplierEvaluation-Submit1.png]]</div>
3. '''Click''' “Update” to open the evaluation KPI “Summary” page.

4. '''Click''' “Submit Evaluation” after making the necessary updates to the evaluation. The “Add Note-Submit Evaluation” window opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-SupplierEvaluation-Submit2.png|920px|8.1-SupplierEvaluation-Submit2.png]]</div>
5. '''Add''' the desired information on the “Add Note- Submit Evaluation” window and '''click''' “Add”.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-SupplierEvaluation-Submit3.png|600px|8.1-SupplierEvaluation-Submit3.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
The status of the evaluation KPI changes to “Approved  ” .
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-SupplierEvaluation-Submit4.png|920px]]</div>

=== Closing the Evaluation  ===

On closing the evaluation, the actual score of the evaluation KPIs is set automatically based on the addition of all evaluation KPIs. <br/> If the evaluation KPI is not approved, an error message is displayed indicating that evaluation KPI is ongoing.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-Closing Evaluation Error.png|300px]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"><br/> After all the evaluation KPIs are approved, buyers can close the supplier evaluation. </div> <div class="image-green-border"><br/> To close the evaluation:</div>
1. '''Click''' “Close Evaluation” on the evaluation “Details” page. The “Please Confirm” window opens indicating to confirm closing the evaluation.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-ClosingEvaluation.png|300px]]</div>
2. '''Click''' “Yes” to confirm closing the evaluation.  The status of the evaluation changes to “Evaluation Completed”.  Clicking “No” on this window keeps the evaluation status to “Evaluation in Progress”.

After the evaluation is completed, buyers can define the performance classification. For low performing suppliers, buyers can define a plan as per the requirement using the “Edit Evaluation” section.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-ClosingEvaluation1.png|920px]]</div>
 

=== Sending the Evaluation for Approval  ===

Buyers can send the evaluation for management approval after the evaluation is completed. This changes the status of the supplier evaluation to “Waiting for Approval” state.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-SendingEvaluationforApproval.png|920px]]</div>
The approver from the buyer team can perform the following actions in this stage.

*Start Internal Assessment: This allows performing the internal review of the supplier evaluation after the supplier evaluation is completed.
*Approve: This stage involves approving the supplier evaluation.
*Rework Required: This stage involves rejecting and sending the supplier evaluation for rework.
*Download All: Allows downloading the supplier evaluation along with its attachments.
*Delegate : Allows delegating the process of approving the supplier evaluation.
*Recall: Buyers can recall the evaluation sent for approval. 
*Review Evaluation: This allows sending the evaluation for additional reviews as per the requirement.

=== Starting Internal Assessment ===

To start internal assessment: 

1. '''Click''' “Start Internal Assessment” on the evaluation “Details” page. The “Edit Supplier Evaluation” page opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-StartingInternalAssessment.png|920px|8.1-StartingInternalAssessment.png]]</div>
2. '''Make''' the required changes to the “Edit Supplier Evaluation” page and '''click''' “Update” to complete the internal assessment. 

 

=== Approving the Supplier Evaluation  ===

On approving the supplier evaluation, the supplier evaluation status changes to “Evaluation Approved”. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-Approving Evaluation.png|920px]]</div>
Supplier evaluation can be rejected by clicking the “Rework Required” on the evaluation “Summary” page. Rejecting the supplier evaluation changes its status to “Evaluation Initiated”. 

'''Note''': Approvers can request for additional information about the evaluation using the “Review Evaluation” option on the evaluation “Summary” page. 

=== Recalling the Supplier Evaluation ===

Buyers can recall the supplier evaluation only after the evaluation is completed and its status changes to “Waiting for Approval”.

To recall the supplier evaluation: 

1. '''Click''' “Recall” under the three dots on the supplier evaluation “Summary” page. The “Add Note-Recall” window opens. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-RecallEvaluation.png|920px|8.1-RecallEvaluation.png]]</div>
2. '''Type''' the necessary information on the “Add Note-Recall” window and '''click''' “Add”.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-RecallEvaluation1.png|720px|8.1-RecallEvaluation1.png]]</div>
This changes the status of the evaluation to “Evaluation Initiated”. 

3. '''Click''' the icon next to the evaluation KPI to open it and click “Edit” on the evaluation KPI “Summary” page. The “Edit KPI” page opens which now displays a new section called “Re-evaluation Requirements”.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-RecallEvaluation2.png|920px]]</div>
4. '''Toggle''' the “Is KPI re-evaluation required” option as “Yes" and click “Next” to open the “Extension Attributes” section.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-RecallEvaluation3.png|300px]]</div>
5. '''Click''' “Update”. The Evaluation KPI is updated with the latest information and its status changes to “Draft”.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-RecallEvaluation4.png|920px]]</div>
6. '''Click''' the link under “Parent Record” on the evaluation KPI  “Summary” page and perform the evaluation process again as described in the above sections and send it for approval after completing the evaluation. 

=== Discarding the Evaluation ===

Buyers can discard the supplier evaluation while initiating the evaluation. <br/> To discard the supplier evaluation:<br/> 1. '''Click''' “Discard Evaluation” on the evaluation “Summary” page. The “Please Confirm” window opens indicating to confirm whether the evaluation must be deleted.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1-Discarding Evaluation.png|300px]]</div>
2. '''Click''' “Yes” to confirm deleting the supplier evaluation. The supplier evaluation is deleted, and the buyer user is redirected to the supplier evaluation index page. 

 

 

'''Related Topics''': [[Agreement_Management|Agreement Management]] 

File:Supplier Profile.png

2022-08-05T05:19:29Z

IDT-1: IDT-1 uploaded a new version of File:Supplier Profile.png

File:Performance Score Card.png

2022-08-05T05:19:22Z

IDT-1: IDT-1 uploaded a new version of File:Performance Score Card.png

File:Supplier Registration Dashboard.png

2022-08-05T05:19:02Z

IDT-1: IDT-1 uploaded a new version of File:Supplier Registration Dashboard.png

File:Qualification Dashboard.png

2022-08-05T05:18:48Z

IDT-1: IDT-1 uploaded a new version of File:Qualification Dashboard.png

File:Performance Evaluation Dashboard.png

2022-08-05T05:18:34Z

IDT-1: IDT-1 uploaded a new version of File:Performance Evaluation Dashboard.png

File:Onboarding Dashboard.png

2022-08-05T05:18:17Z

IDT-1: IDT-1 uploaded a new version of File:Onboarding Dashboard.png

File:Dashboard Access.PNG

2022-08-05T05:18:07Z

IDT-1: IDT-1 uploaded a new version of File:Dashboard Access.PNG

File:Supplier Registration Dashboard.png

2022-07-22T06:59:05Z

IDT-1:

File:Supplier Profile.png

2022-07-22T06:58:41Z

IDT-1:

File:Qualification Dashboard.png

2022-07-22T06:58:35Z

IDT-1:

File:Performance Score Card.png

2022-07-22T06:58:27Z

IDT-1:

File:Performance Evaluation Dashboard.png

2022-07-22T06:58:22Z

IDT-1:

File:Onboarding Dashboard.png

2022-07-22T06:58:16Z

IDT-1:

File:Dashboard Access.PNG

2022-07-22T06:58:12Z

IDT-1:

Icertis Business Apps

2022-06-25T08:23:19Z

IDT-1:

= ICI Business Applications =

ICI Business Applications, built on the Icertis Contract Intelligence (ICI) platform, help customers address specific business requirements and get even more out of their investment in the ICI platform.

== ICI Sourcing Application ==

The ICI Sourcing application places contracts at the center of the sourcing process to ensure compliance, minimize risk, and create long term strategic agility. Get full visibility into supplier’s risk profile and ensure compliance throughout the procurement process. Leverage AI/ML based contract terms and clause recommendations to better negotiate RFx events and surface opportunities for savings. Perform side-by-side analysis of bids or proposals, and score them with both qualitative and quantitative criteria. Get a complete view of your relationship with suppliers including current and past contracts, historical performance and complete risk profile for a unified view for sourcing events.

== ICI Obligation Management Application ==

The ICI Obligation Management application enables companies to better manage their commitments and to realize the full value of their entitlements. This helps optimize business performance, and protects organizations from reputational, commercial and financial risks. Built on the ICI platform and infused with artificial intelligence, the new app transforms how organizations identify, create, manage and fulfill obligations that were previously hidden in complex contract language. The app includes automatic obligation discovery, powerful rule-based obligation ownership, workflow tools to ensure seamless obligation fulfillment, and sophisticated analytics – all designed to protect your business and maximize the ROI of your relationships.

<span style="color:#008000;">'''Extend Contract Type definition to be able to describe the Application Type'''</span>

ICI offers the ability to determine the Application Type (''Contracting'', ''Sourcing'', ''Proposal'', ''Obligation Management'', and ''Supplier Lifecycle Management'') when creating a Contract Type. The access privileges for Business Applications such as Sourcing, are driven through Security Groups.

== ICI Risk Management Application ==

The Icertis Risk Management application to make it easier for professionals to carry out their tasks related to risk management such as assessment, due diligence, remediation, monitoring and reassessment. Risk Management is the process of identifying the potential risk, assessing the magnitude of risk based on the business objectives and devising strategies to mitigate them and tracking the performance until they are completely mitigated.

The platform’s modern, scalable and integration friendly cloud architecture can model even the most complex risk management scenarios. It enables secure communication with different parties involved in the process of risk management that is more effective than the traditional ways of communication such as email. Its user-friendly interface makes it possible for anyone in the enterprise, from the risk management personnel to the supply analytics team, to be able to use the platform with ease.

== ICI Proposal Management Application ==

The Icertis Proposal Management application has devised an opportunity to introduce out-of-the-box entities, drive the lifecycle and entire business process that begins with the inputs from an RFx, qualifies them, plans and reverts with a proposal, and finally facilitates the completion of the proposal. In addition, Icertis gives the flexibility to configure the Proposal Management App as per the customer requirement, making it a truly enterprise App.

 

== ICI Supplier Relationship Management Application  ==

Icertis is expanding its market coverage by adding a major enhancement to its Supplier Relationship Management (SRM) Suite - the Supplier Onboarding & Diversity Compliance App. This enhances the SRM suite and increases value to the procurement functions in the enterprise set up.

Built on top of the ICI Supplier Relationship Management Suite, this app enables businesses to  handle both standard supplier management challenges and those unique to their business <br/> cases, processes, and policies.

Icertis gives the flexibility to configure the App as per the customer requirement, making it a truly enterprise App.

 

'''Related Topics:''' [[ICI_Sourcing_App|ICI Sourcing App]] | [[ICI_Obligation_Management|ICI Obligation Management App]] | [[ICI_Risk_Management|ICI Risk Management App]] | [[ICI_Proposal_Management|ICI Proposal Management App]] | [[ICI_Supplier_Relationship_Management|ICI Supplier Relationship Management App ]]|  [[ICI_Rebates_and_Promotions_App|ICI Rebates and Promotions App]] 

Release Notes

2022-06-25T08:22:22Z

IDT-1:

= ICI Release Notes - Release 8.1 =

== Release 8.1 New Features ==

These release notes provide an overview of the enhancements to ICI, the ICI experience for integrations, and so on.

•      Refer to the [[#_Technical_Requirements_8.1|'''Technical Requirements''']] for the release in this document.

•      Refer to the [https://ici-us-wiki01.icertis.com/ICIHelp8.1/index.php?title=ICI_Help '''Wiki'''] documentation (also found in your ICI help section) for details on all ICI features and functionalities.

The 8.1 Release introduces the following enhancements to the Icertis Contract Intelligence (ICI) platform:

== Icertis Contract Intelligence  ==

=== Agreement & Platform  ===

'''A new collaboration experience with Microsoft Teams'''

ICI now leverages the powerful capabilities of Microsoft Teams to help internal teams collaborate on contract creation workflow and expediting the contracting lifecycle. The Teams integrations will help customers to use a single communication system and discussions can be held in context of the agreement.

The feature includes:

*Contract owner can initiate a collaboration on MS teams from agreement details page and also invite agreement team members to participate in the discussion.
*The latest version of the agreement document is also made available on the teams channel while initiating the collaboration. Participants can review, redline the agreement document in MS teams and publish the edited document back to ICI as a new version.
*The documents associated with main agreement in ICI can also referenced in MS teams channel

Feature ID: 1188391

'''Negotiate and Update Agreements with the new Outlook Add-in'''

The new Outlook Add-in connects users’ emails with Icertis Contract Intelligence and provides improved collaboration capabilities and ensures information sent on emails is tracked for audit and governance on ICI. In addition, the new add-in provides a better interaction design, in line with the modern ACE user experience released in version 8.0.

The Add-in for Microsoft Outlook Desktop is supported on Windows and Mac OS. Once installed, an '''Icertis Experience for Outlook''' pane is accessible from Outlook. The pane provides access to ICI agreement data, along with success and error messaging for interactions. It can be pinned on the interface for easy access.

With the Outlook Add-in improvements, users can now do the following:

*Add attached documents in emails as associations or a new agreement version in ICI.
*Preview Agreement and Association documents from the Outlook Add-in.
*Drag-and-drop single or multiple emails as associations.
*Replace existing associated document with a new email or email attachment.
*Access agreements and associated documents from the Outlook plugin and email them attachments to reviewers or approvers any stakeholders.
*New incoming messages for email threads marked as associated documents are automatically added as new associated documents. 

Feature IDs: 1137119, 1137121

'''Quick & Easy Agreement Creation'''

Agreement Contract Types now come with a Quick Creation option. For all agreements using this option, users can fill all the necessary information on a single page and publish the contract or send it for approval immediately.

Feature ID: 1183356

'''More Quick Action Options'''

The Quick Actions widget “What would you like to do” has been enhanced to provide multiple actions/links with one quick action line item. For example, “Create MSA” quick action now provides multiple links catering to “Own” and “Third Party” paper selections, as displayed in the image below.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 1.png|520px|RN 8.1 1.png]]</div>
Feature ID: 1183310

'''External Emails Split to Ensure Compliance '''

Contracts sent for review or approval by email to other parties, legal consultants and users not within ICI are now split in two parts. A URL and passcode can be shared with the users and the review can be done completely online. No need of downloading and attaching documents and tracking versions offline. The process is quick, secure and easy to audit.<br/> Two emails are sent, One email is sent containing the agreement URL and the other with the passcode to access the URL. This method could be used for requesting reviews, reviews and approval.<br/> <br/> Users can also resend the notification to external users whose reviews are pending, with the help of the “Resend Passcode Notification” button.<br/> <br/> To enable this feature, the implementation team needs to configure it explicitly. <br/> <br/> Feature ID: 1216716 

'''Deviation management for text and tables outside content control'''

If changes are made to the plain text in agreements or tables in associations of an agreement document (text which is not a clause or attribute), a deviation can now be triggered to help Legal teams exercise greater content control. The changes are highlighted and the deviations will flow through an approval process.<br/> <br/> Feature ID: 1183384 

'''Support for Microsoft Powerpoint documents'''

ICI now supports Microsoft Powerpoint file formats (files with .ppt and .pptx extension) as third-party paper agreement file formats. In addition to PDF and DOCX file formats, users can now create and negotiate contracts using PPT and PPTX files.

Feature ID: 1183367

'''Online Editing Of Own Paper'''

In this release, ICI is enhancing its existing online editing feature  by supporting online editing of own paper documents. using Microsoft WOPI.We have improved the experience for editing agreements with Microsoft Online applications In this release.

The following improvements can be observed:

*Documents with editable content control can be edited and and values are is synced seamlessly.
*The track changes option will now track all the changes made by the users in reviewing mode, creating a redlined version of the document.
*The empty content control will be displayed as blank instead of “obj”.
*The content controls within tables can now be edited with associations tagged as tables and saved searches.Content controls within tables will now be editable. 

Feature ID: 1287270 

'''Support for Inheritance of Bulk Associations '''

In addition to attributes and associations, now bulk associations contract types (BACT) and their extension attributes can now be inherited from parent to child agreements. 

The agreements with BACT associations will get inherited asynchronously along with all extension attributes of all the associations. The bulk associations will also work as they do in parent agreements.

Feature ID: 1278205 

'''Enhancement to Download all Agreement & Associated Documents in one click'''  

With this release, we have expanded on the Download all capability which allowed users can to download the agreement and itsall associated documents in one click saving much time and effort. 

This functionality was earlier available when the signature type for the agreement was set to manual, it is now available for electronic and hybrid signature types as well.

Additionally, the “Download All” button will now be visible to users based on the role action mapping in superseded state as well. 

Feature ID: 980342 

'''Platform changes to enhance UX for Business Applications'''

To improve findability and relevance of information pertaining to a particular business application, some configuration changes are now available in the platform. These changes significantly improve the search and usability experience when working with Agreements, Associations or any Business Application.

The following configurations are now supported:

*Business Applications have dedicated index pages, where users can search for the information pertaining to the specific business application.
*Agreements and Associations index pages do not show information from Business Applications.
*On the Advanced Search page, users have a choice to search for information from Agreements or specific business applications.
*Left navigation of a business application entity page can be configured to show the relevant links.
*Results for global search are categorized by the business application name if they are not Agreements or Associations.
*When creating a Contract Type, seeded attributes only relevant to the Business Application Type and Category can be seededwill be selected.

Feature ID: 1183274 

=== Self-Service ===

'''Introduction of a Technical Admin user to access the System Configuration on Self Service Portal'''

With the risk of inaccuracies in technical configurations, given their critical importance, such configurations have been, till now, hosted outside the confines of ICI, where ICI admin users, who have azure subscriptions to an instance, authored the process.

Therefore, the capability of admin users within ICI were being limited and the scope of technical configurations had to be expanded.

Now, a solution has been devised with this feature, as enunciated in the following:

*Technical Administrators can now be configured/added for performing required technical configurations in the System Configuration Portal, using the new “Technical Roles” field while adding, provisioning or editing a user.

'''Note:''' The user has to be Internal in order to be authorized with “Technical Roles”, and selecting an external user will automatically discount the Technical Roles feature.

*The portal has been upgraded for Technical Admin users, with enhancements to the Landing page, header, menu options, along with a static welcome message.
*Appropriate messaging and communication will be provided for any negative scenarios, wherein the Technical Admin User faces any challenge accessing or configuring.
*When a new ICI admin user logs in, they should be able to setup other internal users as technical admin users of the System Configuration portal. 

'''Note:''' Only the ICI Admin user should be able to setup other internal provisioned users as the Technical Admin user.

*The ICI Admin can either create a new Security group, as required, or use an existing security group. 
*The authorization of technical admin users will depend on Security Groups Privilege to the “Self Service” privilege entity, and on roles assigned to specific users.
*The “Self Service” privilege can be configured in the backend and it will be visible to users under the Security Group Privilege tab.
*The “Manage” access option can be selected to grant access to the System Configuration Portal for technical admin users.

'''Note:''' The user who gets Technical Admin privileges can be any internal provisioned user on that instance (even a non admin user).

Feature ID: 1210894

'''Building the Config Key Update utility as part of the System Configuration on Self Service Portal'''

Today, in ICI – There are close to 800 configuration keys in the system. These keys are managed via the ICM Tools which is hosted outside of ICI. With this initiative, we have started the migration these Keys incrementally to be part of the System Configuration – Self Service Portal. 

The scope for this release is to migrate 10 keys into the utility. The access to this utility is driven by the Technical Admin role as explained in the previous section. 

Once the user successfully enters the ‘System Configuration – Self Service’ portal with the correct security groups and technical admin role, they will be able to see the ‘Config Key Updates’ entry point at the top of the screen
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 2.png|720px|RN 8.1 2.png]]</div>
On clicking the Config Key Updates menu, the user will be able to see the utility where the defined 10 keys will be loaded on the screen, along with their existing values.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 3.png|720px|RN 8.1 3.png]]</div>
 

The user will be able to view each key loaded into a card. The card will contain the name of the key along with it’s value. 

The user will be able to see a dedication section to the right of the page for viewing help information

The user will be able to click on the ‘3-dot’ option on each card to edit the value of the key
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 4.png|720px|RN 8.1 4.png]]</div>
 

On clicking the Edit option, the key information will be loaded in the right drawer panel. Here the user can edit the key value and Save using the button at the bottom of the drawer

 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 5.png|720px|RN 8.1 5.png]]</div>
 

The user can edit one or more keys using the ‘3-dot’ option on each card. Once the user has finished editing all the keys, they need to click on the ‘PUSH CHANGES TO ICI’ button at the top of the grid. This will internally update the keys with the edited values in ICI for the changes to take effect

 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 6.png|720px|RN 8.1 6.png]]</div>
Feature ID: 1180864

=== Administration & Configuration  ===

'''Quick Configuration with ICI Import Solution'''

The ICI Import Solution is an automated solution for configuring ICI entities. It simplifies the initial configuration process and reduces the time and complexities involved in the process.

Using the Import Solution tool, ICI users can now:

*Import configurations from a source ICI instance to a target ICI Instance with no pre-existing configuration data.
*Import configurations between different versions of ICI.

'''Note:''' Support will be provided for up to 2 releases preceding the target ICI version.

*Register and publish preconfigured import solutions.
*Import the following information:
*Contract Types
*Templates
*Clauses
*Rules
*Notifications
*Masterdata Instances
*Seeded Masterdata entity instances
*Users & User Groups
*Security Groups

Feature ID: 1262996 

'''Contract Types can now be locked for editing '''

Contract types can now be edited by only one user at a time. This functionality helps prevent data inconsistencies or concurrency errors.

Product enhancements include:

*A Lock/Unlock button on the contract type page. 
*Auto system lock when users start edit a contract type without locking it. 
*Messaging providing information on who is editing the contract type. 
*System locks get released when contract types are saved.

Feature ID: 1212463 

'''Enhancements to Legacy Upload Tool'''

The following features will be added to the Legacy Upload utility with this release, improving speed and accuracy and reducing file size.

*Records bypass workflow states directly to the desired state. 
*Users can schedule upload in batches within guardrails to improve system resource allocation. 
*Specific range of records from the UI can now be uploaded.
*Infra and Elastic Search health check can be run before executing the scheduled batches.
*On demand batch scheduling based on the user provided schedule. 
*Supporting legacy entity created with large files 100MB+.

Feature ID: 1069763

'''Unique clause and template code for every environment'''

Users can now customize their clause and template codes for different instances. If unique codes are used, it reduces errors when migrating data from one instance to another. It also simplifies searching of clauses and templates.

Feature ID: 938126

'''Template and Clause creation options in Microsoft Word'''

The Create Template and Create Clause options in the Icertis Experience for Word are only displayed to users with access to these features. Earlier an error message was displayed to users without access and resulted in an unsatisfactory experience.

Feature ID: 1187041

'''Show or Hide confirmation messages in Microsoft Word '''

Administrators can now choose to show or hide certain confirmation messages, as per the organization's preference, on the Icertis Experience for Word.

Feature ID: 1187044

=== Technology Updates ===

'''ServiceBus upgraded to Azure.Messaging.ServiceBus'''

“Azure.Messaging.ServiceBus” is now replacing “Microsoft.ServiceBus”.  <br/> <br/> This is a Microsoft recommended upgrade and provides the following improvements:

*Up-to-date, streamlined Azure.
*More accurate messaging without any anomaly or junk data in the message characters.

<br/> Feature ID: 940871

'''Authentication Library and Graph API update'''

Microsoft has announced* deprecation of the Azure Active Directory (Azure AD) Authentication Library (ADAL) and Azure AD Graph API libraries and recommends using Microsoft Authentication Library (MSAL) and Microsoft Graph API.

We have updated Microsoft Graph, Identity and Key Vault packages to include stability and security fixes from Microsoft. The migration from ADAL and Azure AD Graph API to MSAL and Microsoft Graph API will ensure continuing support for the following areas:

*User Provisioning 
*Bulk Action 
*Integration - SFDC, GIF (Generic Integration Framework), MSCRM  
*Reporting 
*Key Vault 

Refer to the following link for Microsoft’s circular: [https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/t5/azure-active-directory-identity/update-your-applications-to-use-microsoft-authentication-library/ba-p/1257363 Update your applications to use Microsoft Authentication Library and Microsoft Graph API - Microsoft Tech Community].

Feature ID: 1276938

=== API Enhancements ===

In this release we focused on providing API 2.0 versions of most of our APIs with a goal to improve the performance and overall usability.

Following APIs are upgraded to API 2.0 versions in this release:

[[File:RN 8.1 7.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 7.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 8.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 8.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 9.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 9.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 10.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 10.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 11.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 11.PNG]]<br/> [[File:RN 8.1 12.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 12.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 13.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 13.PNG]]<br/> <br/> [[File:RN 8.1 14.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 14.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 15.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 15.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 16.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 16.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 17.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 17.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 18.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 18.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 19.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 19.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 20.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 20.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 21.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 21.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 22.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 22.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 23.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 23.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 24.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 24.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 25.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 25.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 26.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 26.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 27.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 27.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 28.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 28.PNG]]

'''API Deprecations'''

Any integrations utilizing the deprecated APIs must adopt alternate APIs. Previously, API endpoints have been periodically deprecated and alternate APIs have been provisioned.

However, no existing API endpoints have been deprecated in the 8.1 Release. To check previously deprecated endpoints, refer to 7.16 Release Notes. More details on the alternate APIs are available in the Swagger documentation.

=== Mobile App Update  ===

'''Improved Security on Mobile Devices with SafetyNet Attestation API'''

With this release, ICI is implementing SafetyNet Attestation API for Android mobile application to restrict users from accessing the application through rooted/vulnerable device, to avoid breaching of the IT and cyber security policy.

'''Note: '''The SafetyNet Attestation API is supported Android version 8.0 onwards.

Feature ID: 1095223

== AI Applications  ==

Usually, the implementation team spends a lot of time analyzing and training the AI model for the discovery of the new attributes. With this release, ICI is extending the number of pre-trained attributes so that the AI apps implementation project can be expedited. ICI previously had added 23 out-of-the-box attributes and introducing 15 additional attributes in this release, making it a total of 38 new attributes as a part pre-trained model. Customers can now start using attributes from pre-trained model with no or very little retraining.

The additional attributes are:

*Acceptance Completion Period
*Breach Cure Period
*Confidentiality Survival Period
*Force Majeure Period
*Interest Percentage on Payment Delay
*Liquidated Damages Cap
*Policy changes notice period
*Records Retention Period
*Renewal notice period
*Signatory Name
*Signatory Title
*Signature Date
*Termination for cause notice period
*Termination for convenience notice period
*Warranty Claim Period

Feature ID: 1187824

=== Enhancing the scope of DiscoverAI app& Negotiate AI differentiation ===

Discover AI helps users to identify attributes and clauses in browser and save them in the system.

With this release, scope of DiscoverAI has been enhanced to include the discovery of attributes and clauses within Microsoft word also using Icertis Experience for Word plugin. 

*The following actions/functionalities will be available under the Discover AI license in Icertis experience for Word: 
*Discovery of attributes and clauses. 
*Confirm, Confirm with Deviation, Ignore, Compare and Replace the clauses based on discovered clauses data. 
*Select the Matched Clause from the library. 

Feature ID: 1284012

== Reports Enhancements ==

=== Data for agreements awaiting signature in reports ===

Out-of-the-box ICI reports will now display details for the business status “Waiting for Signature”, in addition to existing statuses. This update to the reporting logic resolves an existing gap in the reports data.

This enhancement applies to the following reports:

[[File:RN 8.1 29.PNG|520px|RN 8.1 29.PNG]]

Feature ID: 1071182

=== Custom reporting views using JSON  ===

Developers can now create new custom reports views using Stored Procedures (SP) and JSON files. This feature gives flexibility to organizations to easily develop new reports relevant to their business requirements.

An Import SP is now available that takes JSON files as input. The JSON file used for input is where developers can define the new view. New reporting views are automatically created on running the Import SP.

An Export SP is also provided, which can be used to download a JSON file which contains the structure of an existing view in the database, to use as a template to create a new views.

Feature ID: 1208472

=== Dataset and seeded dashboard for Proposal Management application ===

A dedicated Power BI Dataset is now available for the Proposal Management application for out-of-the-box and custom reporting.  

PM App Power BI report will have clickable links to ICI entity details page for Proposal Management Entities such as, Sell Side RFx, RFx Qualification, and Bid Proposal.

Feature ID: 1232650

=== Attribute Information Report Enhancements ===

The following filters and columns are added to the Attribute Information report giving more options to analyse the Attributes used in the system.

*Filters: Contract Type, and Group by Property Columns: Is Mandatory and Tracking Attribute

Feature ID: 1158976

=== Edit SSRS Reports without customization ===

Icertis and partner developers can now edit the SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS) reports eliminating the need to create additional customized reports even for small changes. Users can now make the following edits to SSRS reports:

*Add or remove columns in an existing report.
*Modify column’s position, name, or default values.
*Modify sorting order of the results.
*Apply query level filters.
*Apply security group access as standard reports.
*Create copy of existing report and modify it.
*Use a new framework, which has a JSON-based interface.
*Create new or modify custom reports.

Feature ID: 744814

=== Report-based edit access for Power BI reports ===

Manage access for Power BI reports can now be provided at a report level to ensure that edit access is only given to the necessary users within the organization.<br/> This feature works does not impact “Advanced Analytics” access.<br/> <br/> Feature ID: 1070905

=== Maintainance and storage optimization with a Common Data Model for Clause-based reports ===

PlatformClause - a common data model for clause related information can now be used to create clause-based reports such as Clause Profiling Report, Clause Pending Approval Report and more. This helps optimize storage capacity and reduces the development and maintenance effort siginificantly. <br/> <br/> Feature ID: 1083685

=== SSRS Reports now available with Power BI ===

Power BI reports are faster, more scalable, richer in features, customization-friendly, sport a modern UI and overall a better experience. To leverage its advantages, the following SSRS reports are now made available in Power BI:

*Clause Summary Report
*Tagged Attribute Report
*Agreement Clause Content Report – A widget that displays the clauses with the most deviations is also added in this release. 

Feature IDs: 1214787, 1214720, 1223598<br/>  

== Salesforce Integration  ==

===  Activity Object and Trigger Simplification in Salesforce Adapter ===

The following enhancements are made to the SFDC Manage package Adapter:

*Triggers for Accounts and Opportunity objects have been removed from the Managed package to avoid unnecessary update-related issues. Users can get more flexibility and control over them when they use the auto contract creation feature. Note: This is applicable to both fresh installs as well as updates on existing packages.
*Previously, 6 custom fields were needed on the Salesforce activity object to sync ICI tasks with Salesforce, and now, the dependency on these fields have been reduced with only 2 custom fields required for the sync.
*For customers who didn’t need the ICI task sync feature and were unable to remove the custom fields with the limit of 100 fields on the Activity object, now, these fields have been removed from our managed package to provide more flexibility.

'''Note:''' Guideline documentation and support by ICI implementation/upgrade team will be duly provided, for creation of desired fields during new installs as well as release upgrades, or deletion of fields during upgrade scenarios.

Feature ID: 1066353

=== User Experience for Salesforce Revamped ===

Using ICI within Salesforce is now a more seamless experience as we have made significant improvements to preserve the native Salesforce UI interactions, which users are familiar with, without compromising the ICI functionality.

These are the enhancements that have been introduced:

* Native Salesforce components are now used along with the ICI iframe.
*Sub-tabs moved from ICI to Salesforce native tabs, for example: Agreements, Requests and Agreement Reports.
*Agreement and Request Details pages are now displayed in native Salesforce UI.
*On the Details page certain actions (example - Reset Expiry) and sub-tabs (example – Associations) are now native Salesforce components.

'''Note:''' The implementation team will provide a list of native and i-frame components.

Feature ID: 1186642

== eSign Integration  ==

=== Integration Support for DocuSign using JWT authentication ===

The ICI and DocuSign integration was previously based on authenticating the APIs with “IntegratorKey” and “API Password”.

The product has now been upgraded to support an enhanced authentication using JSON Web Token (JWT), along with the existing basic authentication support. This enhancement has also enabled JWT support for “Multisign” as well as “Single Esign” configurations.

Feature ID: 1000798

=== DocuSign API upgraded from 2.0 to 2.1 ===

DocuSign released an update announcement that OAuth 2.0 would be required to support DocuSign API applications. In keeping with this announcement we have upgraded DocuSign REST APIs from 2.0 to 2.1. With this upgrade, a new JSON parser has been introduced to support DocuSign Connect, a notification mechanism to receive updates when any event is triggered in the eSignature workflow.

Feature ID: 1060689

=== Adapting webhook feature of Adobe Sign ===

Adobe Sign adapter couldn’t communicate precise callback information to ICI Platform, thus causing intermittent errors in ICM workflow after the Agreements were electronically signed. Adobe Sign responded with the same information for every signature, hence it wasn’t possible to distinguish between callbacks from different signature. However, with the introduction of Adobe webhook, this problem can be resolved.

Adobe webhooks can be created on the workflow for each agreement, requesting the type of information in the callback, which further benefits as follows:

*Identifying the signatory requesting a callback
*Identifying for which event or action the callback is requested
*Concisely updating the status in ICM

'''Note:'''  Upgrade Adobe Sign API from 5.0 to 6.0 to use the webhook feature.

Also, Adobe rebranded Echo sign to Adobe Sign, hence non overridden localization strings for validation messages have been modified accordingly.

Feature ID: 1091947

=== Electronic Signature support using ICI BioPharma setting for 21 CFR Part 11 & Annex 11 compliant groups ===

ICI Platform now supports the Life Science industry documents that need to comply with 21 CFR Part 11 (for US FDA) or Annex 11 (for EU) regulatory compliance.

This feature allows integration with DocuSign Part 11 module and Adobe Sign Bio-Pharma setting to get electronically signed approvals for such agreements.

Feature ID: 1220095

=== Changes in IP whitelisting process for eSign adapters ===

ICI Platform supports integration with third party eSign adapters, which communicate using callback information. To receive the callback data from the eSign servers, certain IPs to intended methods are whitelisted. This action is done through the web.config file. However, any change in the IPs requires modifying the web.config file, which resets the IIS, resulting in performance issues.

To address this issue, “Core.IPSecurity” key has been introduced, which stores information related to the IPs as a JSON, and thus eliminates the need to modify the web.config file.

'''Note''': Blocking or allowing IP addresses based on DNS is not supported as a part of this feature.

Feature ID: 1193062

=== Update eSign document with correct status ===

In certain scenarios, the electronic signature status in ICI and eSign provider are inconsistent. An enhancement has been added wherein the respective statuses are verified and the agreement status is updated or corrected accordingly.

Feature ID: 1193061

== Sourcing  ==

The 8.1 Release introduces enhancements to the Icertis Contract Intelligence (ICI) Sourcing Application (SRC8.1.0.404).

=== Support for new RFx type-RFP ===

Icertis Sourcing application now supports Requests for Proposals (RFPs). Organizations can leverage the advantages of a secure and seamless application to organize and maintain their procurement processes digitally using the RFP feature.

RfPs are integrated requests containing information on both questions and bids. Buyers can now design, create, and publish RFPs in the Sourcing application and invite suppliers to respond to them. Once Buyers receive the responses, they can evaluate them and make their procurement decisions.

Key RFP features:

*Integrated mechanism to get responses to questions and bids from suppliers.
*Reusable templates for Questions, Questionnaires, and Bidding templates.
*Questionnaires and questions can be arranged and reordered as required. 
*Attachments, and responses to questions can be downloaded in a package.
*A consolidated excel spreadsheet is available to analyse bids and responses.
*Suppliers can provide responses to questions using Excel as well as Sourcing UI.

Feature ID: 404602

=== Improved Sourcing workflow with Sourcing Request ===

Users within an organization can now create Sourcing Requests for procuring items or services. These requests can be designed to go through an approval flow before they are turned over to procurement teams. The approval cycle can be easily tracked and audited for compliance.

Sourcing Request features:

*Configure a Sourcing Request based on the necessary privileges.
*Request forms can be designed to capture necessary details and attachments.
*Requests can be sent to designated approvers for approval.
*An RFx can be created after the request is approved.
*Requests can be modified until they are approved or a RFX is created based on it.
*Cancel or recall the Sourcing Request.
*Put the Sourcing Request on Hold till approved state provided RFx is not created using this Sourcing Request.

Feature ID: 611297

=== Ordering and additional data types for Questions in Questionnaire ===

We have made the following enhancements to Icertis Sourcing to improve the user experience when working with Questions and Questionnaires:

The order of Questions and questionnaires in RFx can be set and modified as per the preference of users.

The following data types are now supported for questions in RFx:

*Boolean
*String
*Choice
*Multi Choice
*Currency
*DateTime
*Number
*Percentage
*Text Area
*Rich Text Area  
*Email
*File Selection

'''Note''':

*On exporting rich text data type information to Excel or HTML, some formatting features may be lost.
*Uploading a file attachment as response for file type question response using Excel is not supported. Supplier must log on to ICI to upload files.

Feature ID: 896873

== Obligation Management  ==

The 8.1 Release introduces enhancements to the Icertis Contract Intelligence (ICI) Obligation Management Application (OM8.1.0.404).

=== An interface to quickly add obligations discovered by AI ===

Obligations that are identified in contracts using the Discover AI feature can now be easily reviewed on the user interface. User can review the obligations and decide to add one or more to the Obligation Management application for tracking approvals and fulfillment.

The interface to review and create obligations in bulk saves users much time and manual effort.

The following image shows an example of creating Obligations in bulk:
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 30.png|720px|RN 8.1 30.png]]</div>
Notifications for successfully processed or failed obligations can also be configured.

Feature ID: 1090383

=== Auto-approval of Obligations to improve efficiency ===

Many obligations are extracted from executed contracts and they don’t usually need to go through an approval process in the Obligation Management application. To reduce time and effort spent approving a large number of obligations and not block the obligation fulfillment lifecycle on account of pending approvals, an automatic approval process for obligations can now be configured.

Once the auto-approval process is defined based on obligation taxonomy, this is how the feature works:

*If approval is turned off, and no approvers are added to obligations, the obligations are automatically approved.
*If approvers are added to obligations, manually or automatically through a rule, then even if approvals are turned off, the obligations will need to be approved.

Feature ID: 519344

=== Organize and manage obligations by creating groups  ===

An obligations could have one or more sub obligations or tasks, which would need to be completed by different individuals in an organization. Also, some obligations may be related to each other and grouping them could help organize and track the fulfillment. To facilitate such scenarios, obligation groups can now be created in the Obligation Management application.

Users can now categorize different obligations under logical groups and create parent-child relationships between obligations.

Child obligations automatically inherit any changes made to the parent Obligation. For example, if the status of parent Obligation is changed to Approved, all the related child Obligations also get approved.

Feature ID: 649768

=== Duplicate obligations no longer inherited  ===

When an Agreement (parent), with an associated Obligation, is inherited by another Agreement (peer), a duplicate Obligation is created. An enhancement in this release eliminates this limitation.

Feature ID: 1040723

=== UI Improvements for Obligation Management ===

The following improvements are made in the product to improve the search and usability experience when using Obligation Management:

*Dedicated index pages for Obligations and Fulfillments,
*Relevant page titles, breadcrumbs and history page information.

Feature ID: 1236413

== Risk Management ==

The 8.1 Release introduces enhancements to the Icertis Contract Intelligence (ICI) Sourcing Application (RM8.1.0.404).

=== UI Improvements for Risk Management  ===

The following Improvements are made in the product to improve the search and usability experience when using Risk Management: 

*Dedicated index pages for Risk Management and Risk Assessment. 
*Relevant page titles, breadcrumbs and history page information. 
*Saved searches display Risk Assessment as category.  
*The “Create” action button has now been added on the “Risk Assessment” index page.   
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 31.png|720px|RN 8.1 31.png]]</div>
Other enhancements include:

*The “Delete” action has now been moved under the three dots icon on the Risk Assessment “Details” page. On deleting the risk assessment, users will be redirected to the Risk Assessment “Index” page.

Feature ID: 1067718

== Proposal Management  ==

ICI Proposal Management application is certified to work with the 8.1 release (PM8.1.0.404). 

=== Track and analyse performance with a Power BI Dashboard ===

A seeded dashboard that helps supplier organizations track their proposals by status, time, and outcome is now available within the Proposal Management application.The following features and reports are now available with the Proposal Management application:

*A new Power BI data model with Power BI dataset specific to Proposal Management.
*Proposal Management KPIs report
*Capture Management report

'''Note''': Users with access to Sell Side RFx or Bid Proposal can view the Dashboard.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 31.png|720px|RN 8.1 31.png]]</div>
 

=== Enhancements to Seeded Contract Types ===

With this release, the PM App is being enhanced with newly seeded attributes to its seeded contract types.

In this enhancement:

*New attributes have been seeded with the Bid Proposal entity:
*Total Bid Value For Proposal
*Total Value Won Or Lost
*Customer Address
*Customer Geography

These new attributes contribute in the essential computations of the Win Ratio and the Value Capture Ratio.

Feature ID: 1186830

=== Revamped User Experience across the PM App ===

The visual look and feel of the Proposal Management App has been considerably enhanced with the ICI-wide implementation of the new UI (User Interface) and UX (User Experience).

The following summarizes the revamped user experience across the App:

*The new “Proposals” tile menu now features only the viewing tile options for the seeded PM App entities, in addition to a new “Dashboard” tile menu option.
*The create navigation flow has been moved from the “Proposals” tile and a dedicated “Create” button has now been added to each seeded entity index page.
*The seeded entities now have their dedicated index pages, as opposed to the saved search driven listing in previous releases.
*The Details pages of all the seeded entities (Sell Side RFx, Bid Proposal etc.) now have dedicated page titles starting with the entity name, instead of the contract type category. For example, the previous “Agreement / Sell Side RFx 123” has been replaced by “Sell Side RFx / Sell Side RFx 123”.
*The newly added entity name (such as “Sell Side RFx”) on the Details page header is now a clickable link, clicking which opens the entity index page.
*In the audit history of any entity, both Grid View and List View, the header now features the entity category name instead of the contract type, just like the change in entity Details page.
*The display of action buttons on entity Details pages can now be configured to customize their sequence of display, and based on the available window space the remaining action buttons will be available under the three dots icon on the entity “Details” page.

Feature ID: 1235186

== Supplier Relationship Management Application  ==

ICI Proposal Management application is certified to work with the 8.1 release (SRM8.1.0.404).

=== Supplier Evaluation ===

The Supplier Evaluation module introduced in the Supplier Relationship Management suite helps organizations manage supplier performance and evaluate and mitigate risks associated with working with suppliers.

'''How Supplier Evaluation fits within Supplier Relationship Management'''
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 33.png|520px|RN 8.1 33.png]]</div>
The Supplier Evaluation module introduced in the Supplier Relationship Management suite helps organizations manage supplier performance and evaluate and mitigate risks associated with working with suppliers.

'''How Supplier Evaluation fits within Supplier Relationship Management'''

 

Supplier Evaluation module is part of the Supplier Relationship Management application, which is built on Icertis Contract Intelligence.

Once suppliers are onboarded, users can evaluate suppliers on the products or services they offer. The KPI criteria, schedule, and the evaluators can be set up within the module and on completing the assessment the supplier can be classified as high performing, low performing or standard supplier.

A routine supplier evaluation can help organizations set expectations from their preferred suppliers and manage low performing suppliers.  

'''Supplier Evaluation Features'''

Setting up Supplier Evaluation

*'''KPIs''' – Users can create one or more KPIs (evaluation criteria) and evaluate suppliers based on the set parameters. For example, you can create KPIs for auditing, performance reviews, training requirements, and more.
*'''Supplier Data''' – The supplier evaluation creation process is simplified as much of the supplier information is auto-populated based on the supplier’s record.
*'''Evaluation Schedule''' – Users can set up a period for which the supplier will be evaluated.
*'''Product/Service for Evaluation''' – The evaluation can be performed in context of the product or service provided or the agreements.
*'''Reviewing suppliers based on the Criteria''' – The evaluation criteria can be put through an internal review process, and inputs can be sought to finalize the evaluation criteria.
*'''Supplier Outreach''' – Suppliers can provide information and supporting documents needed to perform the evaluation by responding to review requests by buyers.
*'''Responses & Scoring''' – Based on the responses provided by business team or evaluators on the supplier evaluation, scores are automatically computed.
*'''Evaluation Approvals & Control''' – Once the evaluation process is over, then buyer team defines supplier performance classification and suggests the next course of action (in case of low performing supplier). This can also be sent for management approval. The approver team can either approve or reject and send it for rework..
*'''Notifications''' – Notifications can also be configured for periodic evaluation. System notifications are sent to buyers when they are requested to evaluate a supplier.

Feature ID: 463049

=== Managing Supplier Hierarchy ===

'''Manage Related Supplier Organizations'''

The Supplier Relationship Management application now provides a mechanism to connect supplier organizations with their Parent, Holding or Subsidiary organizations. This is to ensure that you have a complete overview of the business you do with one supplier and its related entities. According to business needs, you may want to work with a local supplier or the parent global organization.

You can designate a supplier organization as one of the following types:

*'''Supplier''': Supplier organizations that may or may not have related Parent or Holding companies.
*'''Parent company''': Parent company of one or more Supplier organizations, controls operations of the Supplier Organization
*'''Holding company''': Holding company of one or more subsidiary Supplier organizations, does not have a direct say over the operations of subsidiaries.

Changes made to the supplier hierarchy for supplier registration, qualification or profile are synchronized with the vendor database and supplier master.

'''Unique Supplier Record Management'''

In Icertis Supplier Relationship management, the uniqueness of a supplier record is validated based on a combination of attributes . In this release, one or more of the unique identifiers attributes can be made editable. This is to account for entities that may change the Legal Entity Name in the course of doing business, considering legal entity name is one of the unique identifier attributes.

If the attributes are changed for an organization, the system validates and checks for duplicate records before allowing users to make the change.

'''Validating the Duplicate Registrations'''

Buyers may receive more than one registration from the same supplier submitted through the web page.

This release introduces the capability to match the supplier registration records based on the unique identifier attributes. This helps identifying the duplicate registrations. Buyers can perform limited actions on the duplicate registrations and the supplier qualification is not generated.

'''Note''': Customers upgrading to 8.1 from previous versions of ICI Supplier Relationship Management is supported.

Feature ID: 1271423

== Technical Requirements  ==

The Icertis Contract Intelligence (ICI) application can be accessed from any device with an Internet connection and a supported browser. All features may not be available in all environments.

The software and hardware requirements for the client system as well as the mobile application are listed in the table below:

[[File:RN 8.1 43.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 43.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 44.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 44.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 45.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 45.PNG]]

'''Important Changes in IE11 Support:'''

From March 2021, Microsoft has stopped its technical support to Internet Explorer (IE) and has advised its customers to move to Microsoft Edge.

ICI will no longer support IE11. ICI will not be certified over IE11.

If customers use IE 11 then the below message will be displayed:

“You are using a browser that is not recommended to be used since it no longer supported by its OEM. The ICI support for this browser is limited for 7.16 version and will be discontinued from version 7.17 onwards. You should switch to Microsoft Edge as recommended by the OEM or any other supported browser prescribed by your organizational policy. You may contact your administrator for further information.”

[[File:RN 8.1 46.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 46.PNG]] 

[[File:RN 8.1 47.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 47.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 48.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 48.PNG]]<br/> [[File:RN 8.1 49.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 49.PNG]]<br/> [[File:RN 8.1 50.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 50.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 51.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 51.PNG]]

== Accessibility Conformance  ==

We ran accessibility conformance tests on the Icertis Contract Intelligence platform and Business Apps for Web Content Accessibility Guidelines 2.1 for Level A and Level AA standards. We did not evaluate for Level AAA standards.

While most of the product functionality has at least one method that meets the criterion without any known defects, some functionality of the product may not meet the conformance criteria. The full report is published in the following documents and can be made available on request:

*ICI Platform Accessibility Conformance Report
*ICI AI/ML Accessibility Conformance Report
*ICI Reporting Accessibility Conformance Report
*ICI Obligation Management Accessibility Conformance Report
*ICI Sourcing Accessibility Conformance Report
*ICI Proposal Management Accessibility Conformance Report
*ICI SRM Accessibility Conformance Report
*ICI Risk Management Accessibility Conformance Report

== Known Issues ==

This section includes some issues that we are aware of and plan to resolve at the earliest:

[[File:RN 8.1 52.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 52.PNG]]

 

 

 

 '''Related Topics:''' [[Agreement_Management|Agreement Management]] | [[Associations|Association Management]] | [[Compliances|Compliance Management]] | [[Templates|Template Management]] | [[Clauses|Clause Management]] | [[Configure|Configuration]] | [[Reports|Reports]] | [[Advanced_Analytics|Advanced Analytics]] | [[User_Administration|User Administration]] | [[ICI_Tools|ICI Tools ]]|  [[Icertis_Business_Apps|Icertis Business Apps]] | [[AIML|AIML ]]| [[ICI_Add-ins|ICI Add-ins]] | [[ICI_Mobile_App|ICI Mobile App]] 

Reports

2022-06-09T10:50:47Z

IDT-1:

= Reports Overview =

ICI provides a number of out-of-the-box reports that have been strategically articulated to cater specific business needs. They provide an insight to different entities, states and progress of your Agreements, Clauses and Templates so that you can take necessary actions. They enable you make informed decisions by analyzing processes, cycle times, deviations, risks (expiry, renewal, actions pending, and so on.) and SLA’s at each level of an Agreement. Using the right filters to generate vital Reports provides clarity, allows you to correlate functionalities, and improve response time. Such information is valuable to the organization and has a positive impact on your business. It helps you identify future direction, improve performance, mitigate risk and increase revenue.

In ICI, Reports have been grouped based on their usage into Admin, Legal and Compliance, and Workflow for ease-of-use. You can view only those Reports that you are authorized to. You can either view all Reports together or you have the option to filter the reports based on the grouping, using the drop-down or the tabs. You can access individual Reports by clicking them and providing filters for each of them based on your specific requirement. 

Reports are now enhanced to be displayed as per the language selected in the Locale Settings in the User Preferences. These reports are driven on the basis of user profile Language settings.

You also have the option to export the Reports to Excel, CSV or PDF formats. 

ICI offers the functionality to classify Business Type/ Contracting agreement type at contract type level. With this release, core reports will be limited to Contracting business application type. Users with access to standard and insights reports will only be able to see data related to agreements with Contracting business application type. Thus, the reporting data would not contain any sourcing agreements.<br/>  

== Types of Reports ==

In this section, let us understand ICI Reports in detail.

Reports are mainly divided into 2 groups:

1. '''Default Reports: '''ICI provides a number of out-of-the-box Reports that have been strategically designed to cater to specific business needs. Although these Reports are default, the user will only be able to view the Reports that they are authorized to. Based on their usage, these Reports are displayed on the Agreement Details page or the Report tile.
<div class="note-box">'''Note''': Even if the users are authorized to view/access a specific report, the privileges of the Reports further follow the authorization that the user has in ICI. If the user does not have the privileges to view a particular set of Agreements in ICI, for example, they would not see those in the Report even though they have the view privileges for Reports.</div>
2. '''Custom Reports: '''Customized Reports may be deployed in ICI based on the requirements of the customer by editing default reports or by creating entirely new custom reports or by deploying reports provided by the customer. These reports are customized for a customer based on their requirement.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Custom reports.png|720px|Custom reports.png]]</div>
 
<div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">3. '''Dynamic Reports: '''These reports can be generated by the user through a configurable option (that can be turned On/Off) of providing the Advanced Analytics tile on the Dashboard as an additional entity with access controlled through Security Groups. This Power Business Intelligence (BI) integration with ICI allows the user to generate dynamic reports on the fly, save the reports and access them quickly using the Advanced Analytics tile, control access to generated reports through Security group, and query the database in the form of normal questions and get results. To know more, click on the related topic below.<br/>  </div>
Here is the list and a brief description of Reports in ICI. 

*'''Detailed Report: '''This Report is Agreement specific and provides details of all the Associations of an Agreement entity-wise. It provides detailed view of all related entities to the Agreement such as, Commitments, Rules, History, and so on. It provides a complete view of the Agreement without the user having to navigate to multiple tabs for the same information. It is extremely convenient when the Agreement along with associations are required to be sent for offline reviews and audits. It helps to assess the accuracy of Associations. This helps in performing compliance checks to correct the outliers (where associations are not made).
*'''Attributes Value Report: '''Captures the values of the attributes and all the edits made to this over the lifecycle of the Contract till date. This Report actually replaces the earlier Export Attribute values on the Agreement entity.
*'''Clause Deviations Report:''' This Report is Agreement specific and provides a text comparison of the standard and the deviated Clause and highlights the difference between them for the specific Agreement from which it was accessed. It provides visibility into the Clauses that are deviated, by whom, the date and time, in what state, the approver and the approval date and time. It helps a legal person detect Clauses that get deviated frequently and make appropriate changes in the library to further reduce cycle times during contract negotiations. 
*'''Expiring Agreements:''' Displays a list of executed Agreements that will expire in next 30,60 or 90 days. 
*'''Agreement Deviation:''' Provides details related to Agreements that have registered deviations from the standard Clause language definitions in the library.
*'''Agreement Clause Content Report:''' Provides the Clause content (Clauses used in the Agreement Templates) for selecting a single or multiple Contract Type.
*'''Attribute Information Report:''' This is an existing Report that provides details of the attribute properties or metadata across its usage in different Contract Types. There are filters that help streamline the attribute information for the user – “Group by” the report data by “Attribute” name or “Contract Type”.
*'''Expired Agreements Report:''' This is a new Report that displays all the contracts that expired in the last 30, 60 or 90 days.It helps you to make informed decisions on the renewals or terminations of contracts. The mapping of these Agreements with expiring Agreements helps make important revenue decisions. 
*'''Average Agreement Turn Around Time:''' Provides information on the average number of days required for executing an Agreement or Amendment, from the date of its creation till the date of its execution.
*'''Clause Profiling Report:''' Helps in the mapping of Clauses to the corresponding Templates, with respect to the selected Contract Types. It helps application administrators to view the impact of a particular Clause on all the Templates that have the Clause added in the system. It displays the Clause, its corresponding version, and the Template details in which that Clause has been incorporated. The base entity for the Report is Clause. Even if the Clause does not have an associated Template, it would appear in the Report.  
*'''Clause Summary Report''': The Clause Summary Report helps clause administrators to understand the impact any changes made to a clause would have. This would enable them to assess how any clause has been used across different agreements, amendments, associations and templates. Further, these users would be able to identify which version of a clause was used in a particular entity.
*'''Template Clause Report:''' Helps in the mapping Templates to the corresponding Clauses, with respect to the Contract Types. It helps application administrators to view the impact when a particular Clause or Template is changed in the system. It displays the Template, its corresponding version and the Clauses present in the respective Template. The base entity for this Report is the Template. 
*'''Cycle Time Report:''' Shows the cycles for an Agreement and the change of states from the date of creation to the date of execution as well as the elapsed time. The purpose of this Report is to enable the user to detect the deficiencies in the processes and turnaround time for tasks. It helps in identifying the patterns that lead to longer cycle times and take corrective actions in the process and streamline it better. 
*'''User Profiling Report''': Helps you to find details associated to an individual user such as the role, groups and the associated entities. This enables the user to interpret the impact of the user on the system, impact of de-provisioning a user and so on. This Report helps analyze the critical actions pending for a user that may have a big impact. It also provides a direct link to the records and configuration modification that can help in curbing the impact. This Report can also a prerequisite to the Replace User functionality. 
*'''User Login Report:''' Provides information of all user logins for a selected date range. It provides an insight on the adoption of the tool by providing details for the user as well as which function, unit and region is using the tool.
*'''Signature Type Report:''' Provides information on the percentage of Contracts that have been executed manually compared to electronically. Since this involves the entire ecosystem and is a time-consuming process, this Report  provides visibility into the number of contracts that are signed manually against those signed electronically to facilitate compliance and adoption.
*'''Clauses Pending Approval:''' Provides information on the number of Clauses that are pending approval for an Agreement or Amendment along with the duration and the version.
*'''Agreements Pending Execution:''' Yields data on the number of Agreements or Amendments that await “Internal Signature”, “External Signature”, and/or “Waiting for Signature”, along with the duration and status changed date.
*'''Templates Pending Approval:''' Provides details related to Templates pending approvals, along with the duration and version.
*'''Agreements Pending Approval:''' Yields information on the number of Agreements or Amendments that are in the Waiting for Approval state.
*'''Approved Requests Waiting For Contract Creation''': Provides a consolidated list of Requests for which the contract initiation has not begun.This Report enables the user the user to view all the actions that need to be taken and reduce chances of missing pending Requests to create Contracts. However, if the correct filters are applied for the Contract Type, date of request creation, approvals and request submission, this Report provides a consolidated list of Requests that are pending action. Without this Report, the user would need to apply the right filters in the Search field to get the desired outcome.
*'''CLM Activity Report:''' Provides a quick view for the CTOs, CFOs, etc. on the current high level status of the Agreements, Contract Requests and user activity to gauge the adoption of the ICI platform in their organization and take corrective action to increase adoption of the platform. The report can be filtered on the Frequency either Day Wise (default), Week Wise and Month Wise.  
*'''Masterdata Information Report: '''Displays a summary of Masterdata and helps the user easily identify all the areas that will be affected or need to be modified by any change to the Masterdata Attribute values. The user can update and extract this detailed report on Masterdata and subsequently any reference of it in Rules, Contract Types, Contract Request, Masterdata, Agreements/ Amendments, Associations and User Groups where the given Masterdata Attribute value to make informed decisions. To access this report, users must have Configuration and Security group access. 

ICI provides the ability to define sub-roles for the Approver role. With this, all the capabilities of the Approver are were enabled for users at the sub-role level. This capability has now been extended to reports so that users can have relevant information and make informed decisions. <br/> With this release, the Detailed Report, User Profiling Report and Agreements Pending Approval Report have now been modified to display the Approver sub-roles such as Contract Admin, Legal Approver and others.

 

== [[Types_of_Reports|Categories of Reports]] ==

Reports that are available on different tabs of the Reports tile are further categorized into the following groups: 

*Legal and Compliance
*Admin
*Workflow
*Obligation Management
*Sourcing

Reports that are Agreement specific are available on the Agreement Details page. 
<div class="note-box">'''Note:''' Although these reports are default, you can only view the reports that you are authorized to. </div>
 

 

== Localization of Reports ==

To change the localization settings of a report:

1. '''Select''' Preferences to view your preferences. The My Preferences window opens.

2. '''Click '''Locale Settings to view the options.

3. '''Select '''Language to choose a language that you would like to view the report in.

4. '''Select '''the Time Zone, Date Format and Time Format options for the drop-down list for the selected language.

5. '''Click '''Save to save your options.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Localization 1.png|720px|Localization 1.png]]</div>
6. '''Click '''the Reports tab.

7. '''Select '''the report that you want to view.

8. '''Click '''the chart to view the details of the selected report.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Localization 2.png|720px|Localization 2.png]]  </div>
 The report columns will be displayed based on the selected filters.
<div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Wiki reports localization 4.png|720px|Wiki reports localization 4.png]] </div> <div> </div>
== Improving localization on reports ==
<div> </div> <div>The ICI platform is widely used to manage contracts across the globe. Hence, adapting existing products to new markets through translation and localization management is key for global business growth. In this view, localization support is now being enhanced in reports.</div> <div> </div> <div>Localization has now been enabled for the following attributes:</div>
*Type of Paper (Own/ Third Party)
*Signature Type (Electronic Signature, Manual Signature and Hybrid Signature)
*Signature Sequence (External First, Internal First and Mixed Signature)
*Choice/ multi-choice attributes 
*Status/ Business Status (for example, Agreement status, Amendment status, and so on)
<div> </div> <div>This is applicable to the following Core reports – Agreement Clause Content Report, Agreement Deviation Report, Agreement Pending Execution Report, Attribute Information Report, Average Agreement Turnaround Time Report, Clause Profiling Report, Clauses Pending Approval Report, CLM Activity Report, Expired Agreements Report, Expiring Agreements Report, Masterdata Information Report, Signature Type Report, Template Clause Report, User Login Report and User Profiling Report.</div> <div> </div> <div>For example, the below screenshot displays the Agreements Pending Execution Report with its input fields and values localized from English to German :</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Improving localization 1.png|720px|Improving localization 1.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Improving localization 2.png|720px|Improving localization 2.png]]</div> <div><br/> In another example, the Signature Type Report is displayed as shown below in English and French respectively:</div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Improving localization 3.png|720px|Improving localization 3.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Improving localization 4.png|720px|Improving localization 4.png]]</div> <div> </div>
== Displaying Date and Time as per User Preferences ==
<div>
Previously, all Date related columns and parameters in all ICI reports were displayed in the UTC Time Zone in the mm/dd/yyyy format. ICI allowed users to set the Date and Time format as per their preferred locale settings.

With this release, all reports will display the Date and Time as per the Time Zone set by the user in the user preferences.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Displaying Date 1.png|720px|Displaying Date 1.png]]</div> </div> <div>
However, the following points need to be noted:

*When reports are exported to CSV format, due to the inherent property of the CSVS files, the Date and Time format of the Date columns will be as per the user's local machine format, not as per the User Preferences set in ICI.
*In all reports, where the parameters to generate the reports have dates (for example, Created Start Date andCreated End Date in the Cycle Time Report), the default value in these fields are displayed in the UTC time zone. However, when the user changes values in these fields and generates the reports, the dates will then be displayed as per the user’s local time.
</div> <div>
*If the Date Format selected in the user’s preferences is dd-mmm-yy, the date value in the field gets converted to the month & vice-versa. As a workaround, the date format in this field has been set as mmmm-dd-yyy, so that the default value is displayed as per the user’s expectations. However, the date format when the report is generated is displayed as per the user’s preferences. For example, if the user selects the Date Format as dd-MMM-yy in My Preferences, then the dates displayed in the Cycle Time Report fields Created Start Date and Created End Date are actually set as mmmm-dd-yy.
</div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Displaying Date 2.png|720px|Displaying Date 2.png]]</div>
 

 

== Using the Timezone filter ==

1. '''Click''' the Reports tile on the Dashboard. The Reports page opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Time Zone Filter 1.png|720px|Time Zone Filter 1.png]]</div>
2. '''Click''' a report Dashboard tile, for example User Login Report. The report opens in a new tab.
<div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="note-box">'''Note''': The Time Zone parameter is only available in the following default reports - Agreements Pending Execution Report, Agreements Pending Approval Report, Clauses Pending Approval Report, Templates Pending Approval Report, Agreement Clause Content Report, User Login Report, Signature Type Report, Cycle Time Report, Approved Requests Waiting For Contract Creation Report, Masterdata Information Report, Clause Deviations Report, Clause Summary Report and Detailed Report.</div>
3. '''Enter''' a User Name for which you want to view the report.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Time Zone Filter 2.png|720px|Time Zone Filter 2.png]]</div>
4. '''Click''' View Report. The default time zone of the report is (UTC) Coordinated Universal Time, based on which the Login Date & Time column is displayed. 
<div class="note-box">'''Note''': The default time zone is based on the Time Zone selected under Locale Settings under Preferences.</div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Time Zone filter 4.png|720px|Time Zone filter 4.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
5. '''Click''' the Time Zone drop-down. The available time zones will be displayed.
<div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Time Zone filter 3.png|720px|Time Zone filter 3.png]]</div>
6. '''Select''' the time zone in which you want to view the report, for example (UTC -08:00) Pacific Time (US & Canada).
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Time Zone filter 4.png|720px|Time Zone filter 4.png]]</div>
7. '''Click''' View Report. The Login Date & Time column values will be displayed according to the newly selected time zone.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Time Zone filter 7 A.PNG|720px|Time Zone filter 7 A.PNG]]</div>
The tool-tip for the Report Generated On time-stamp also displays the selected time zone.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Time Zone filter 8.PNG|720px|Time Zone filter 8.PNG]]</div>
8. '''Click''' the Export drop down menu to download the report in Excel, PDF or CSV format.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Time Zone filter 6.png|720px|Time Zone filter 6.png]]</div>
== Adding Reports as KPIs ==
<div>
In addition to the reports that are already available on the Dashboard as KPIs (Agreement Deviation Report, Agreements Pending Approval Report, Agreements Pending Execution Reports, Average Agreement Turn Around Time Report, Clauses Pending Approval Report, Expiring Agreement Report, and Templates Pending Report), users can now also add the following reports:
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.12 Reports 4.PNG|720px|7.12 Reports 4.PNG]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">This can be achieved by providing access through Security Groups.</div>
For example, the Signature Type Report KPI depicts the percentage of electronic signatures in ICI. If the number of electronic signatures is 6 and the number of manual signatures is 83, then the KPI is calculated as 6/83+6 = 6/89 (total number of agreements). Therefore, the percentage of electronic signatures displayed on the KPI tile on the Dashboard is 6 (rounded off to nearest digit).
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Adding reports as KPI 2.png|720px|Adding reports as KPI 2.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border">
Other reports that are available KPIs on the Dashboard include:
</div>
*Agreement Deviation Report
*Agreements Pending Approval Report
*Agreements Pending Execution Report
*Average Agreement Turn Around Time Report
*Clauses Pending Approval Report
*Expiring Agreements Report
*Templates Pending Approval Report

 

== Enabling access to platform analytics report  ==

To enable access to platform analytics reports through the Reports tile:

1. '''Click''' "Admin" > Security Groups > Security Groups. The Security Groups page opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Enabling Access PAR 1.png|720px|Enabling Access PAR 1.png]]</div>
2. '''Click''' the view record icon next to the Security Group for which you want to enable the report access. The Security Group Details page opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Enabling Access PAR 2.png|720px|Enabling Access PAR 2.png]]</div>
3. '''Click''' Edit. The edit view is displayed.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Enabling Access PAR 3.png|720px|Enabling Access PAR 3.png]]</div>
4. '''Click''' on the Report tab.
</div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Enabling Access PAR 4.png|720px|Enabling Access PAR 4.png]]</div> <div> </div> <div>The 6 reports mentioned earlier are available in 3 versions. For example: </div>
*Agreements Pending Approval: This is the existing core report.
*Agreements Pending Approval – Import: In this mode, data can be imported into Power BI. In order to get latest updates, the report needs to be refreshed.
*Agreements Pending Approval – Direct: This displays live data and does not need to be refreshed to display latest updates.
<div class="note-box">'''Note''': Configurators are expected to enable only one version of a report at a time to avoid duplicate reports from being displayed to users.</div> <div> </div> <div> </div>
== Editing a platform analytics report ==

On the Reports page, '''click''' the tile of the report which you want to view, for example Agreement Deviation. 
<div class="image-green-border">The report opens in a new tab.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Editing 1.png|720px|Editing 1.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="note-box">'''Note''': By default, these reports are available in read-only mode. To enable editing for a user, they need to be provided with Manage access to Power BI reports through Edit Security Groups > Privileges > Power BI Reports. A user having this Manage access can edit the platform analytics reports as well.</div>
In edit mode, users can select or change Visualizations and add or remove Fields and customize the report as required.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Editing 2.png|720px|Editing 2.png]]</div>
To save these customizations, click File > Save as. The Save your report popup is displayed.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Editing 3.png|720px|Editing 3.png]]</div>
Enter a name for your report.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Editing 4.png|720px|Editing 4.png]]</div>
'''Click''' Save. The report gets saved and is displayed in the My Reports section on the reports page.

 
<div class="note-box">Note: The My Reports section is only displayed to users who have Power BI reporting privilege set to Manage mode.</div>
Once the report is saved, reopening it displays two options in the File menu:
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Editing 5.png|720px|Editing 5.png]]</div>
*Save: '''Click''' to save any changes made to your report, in this example, the Agreement Deviations Q1.
*Save as: '''Click''' to save as a new report, separate from the previously created one.

On the Reports page, users can also edit the report name or delete a report.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Editing 6.png|720px|Editing 6.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="note-box">'''Note''': These options are available only in the My Reports section.</div>
Customized reports created and saved in the My Reports section can further be shared with other users through Security Groups. These reports are indicated with a shared report icon and will be available to other users under Custom Reports on the Reports page.
<div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

== Viewing Platform Analytics Report ==

This release introduces multiple core reports as part of platform analytics in direct query and import mode such as:

*Agreement Clause Content Report
*Agreement Deviation Report
*Agreements Pending Approval
*Agreements Pending Execution
*Approved Requests Waiting for Contract Creation Report
*Average Agreement Turn Around Time Report
*Clause Profiling Report
*Clauses Pending Approval Report
*Clause Summary Report
*CLM Activity Report
*Cycle Time Report
*Expired Agreements Report
*Expiring Agreements Report 
*Signature Type Report 
*Tagged Attribute Report
*Template Clause Report
*Templates Pending Approval Report
*User Login Report

To view Platform Analytics Reports follow steps as shown in following example.

Example: Tagged Attribute Report

For ICI user with “View” access: 

On “Tagged Attribute Report” page

#'''Click''' on “Reports” tile on Home page, observe “Tagged Attribute Reports” tabs. Click on PowerBI report. 

On report page

#“Clauses” and “Templates” tabs are displayed 
#Report data is refreshed once a day. Last refresh Date and Time is displayed at the top right corner of the report with title “Report Generated On”.  
#“Attribute Name”, “Clause Created By” and “Contract Type” filters are provided 
#“Count of Clauses”, “Data Type” and “Is Global” cards are displayed below the filters 
#A table containing following columns –  
#Clause code, Clause name, Clause version, Clause created by, Clause created on, Version updated on, Is template variable, Is extended attribute, Attribute display name 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Tagged Attribute 2.PNG|720px|Tagged Attribute 2.PNG]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <ol start="2">
<li>'''Select''' appropriate filter criteria to generate the report.</li>
</ol>
<div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1 Tagged Attribute 3.PNG|720px|8.1 Tagged Attribute 3.PNG]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <ol start="3">
<li>'''Click '''on “Templates” tab, to open Templates report. Similar filters and cards are displayed with Last refresh Date and Time along with title “Report Generated On”. Also, “Single Attribute Name” selected on “Clauses” tab remains same on “Templates” tab. </li>
</ol>
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.1 Tagged Attribute 4.PNG|720px|8.1 Tagged Attribute 4.PNG]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">For ICI user with “Manage” access: </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
#Click on “Reports” tile on Home page, click on “Tagged Attribute Reports” with PowerBI tag. 
#Observe that it has all the functionalities same as when user had “View” access but now user can edit and save report with different name. 
<div class="image-green-border"><ul style="margin-left: 40px;">
<li>Observe “Visualization” and “Fields” additional right navigation pane.  </li>
<li>User can add or remove these fields in the report – Attributes, Clause Contract Type, Clauses, Template Contract Type, Templates from “Fields” </li>
<li>User can add visual effects to a report by using “Visualizations” </li>
</ul>

[[File:8.1 Manage access 5.PNG|720px|8.1 Manage access 5.PNG]]
<ol start="3">
<li>User can change view from left corner drop down “View” </li>
</ol>

[[File:8.1 Tagged Attribute View 6.PNG|720px|8.1 Tagged Attribute View 6.PNG]]
<ol start="4">
<li>User can save the report with different name by clicking on “File” > “Save as” </li>
</ol>

[[File:8.1 Tagged Attribute Save 7.PNG|720px|8.1 Tagged Attribute Save 7.PNG]]

A new window is popped where user can write the name of the file he wants to save. Click on “Save” button.  

Agreement Clause Content Report

In this report, a visualization depicting top clauses which caused most agreement deviations is displayed. Clause description, original clause text and deviated agreement clause text is available on drilldown too.

'''For ICI user with “View” access:'''

[[File:ACCR 02.png|720px]]

'''For ICI user with “Manage” access:'''

[[File:ACCR 06.png|720px]]

 
</div>
Agreement Deviation Report

This report provides details related to Agreements that have registered deviations from the standard Clause language definitions in the library.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Agreement Deviation.png|RTENOTITLE]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">
Agreements Pending Approval Report: This report contains the following parameters:

*Pending with: You can apply multiple filters such as users from the available list. This displays the count of agreements created by selected users that are pending for approval per contract type and the count of agreements created in the last 30 or 31 to 60 days (count of agreements by ageing days).

[[File:Agreement Pending Approval 2.png|RTENOTITLE]]

You can view the agreement details by scrolling down on the Agreements Pending Approval page.

[[File:Agreement Pending Approval 1.png|RTENOTITLE]]

You can view more details about the agreements by clicking the specific agreement and then clicking Drill Through. This opens the list of agreements associated with the specific contract type. Follow the same process to know more about the agreements by ageing days.

[[File:Agreement Pending Approval 2.png|RTENOTITLE]]

Follow the same process to filter agreements per organization unit, contract type, ageing days. <br/> You can follow the same process to view the other reports. 

Agreements Pending Execution 

[[File:Agreement Pending Execution.png|RTENOTITLE]]

Approved Requests Waiting for Contract Creation Report

This report provides a consolidated list of Requests for which the contract creation has not begun. It enables the user to view all the actions that need to be taken and reduce chances of missing pending Requests to create Contracts.

[[File:Approved Request waiting for Contract creation.png|RTENOTITLE]]

Average Agreement Turn Around Time Report

This report provides information on the average number of days required for executing an Agreement or Amendment, from the date of its creation till the date of its execution.

[[File:Average Agreement Turnaround Time.png|RTENOTITLE]]

Clause Profiling Report

This report helps in the mapping of Clauses to the corresponding Templates, with respect to the selected Contract Types. It helps application administrators to view the impact of a particular Clause on all the Templates that have the Clause added in the system.

[[File:Clause Profiling Report.png|RTENOTITLE]]

Clauses Pending Approval Report

This report provides information on the number of clauses that are pending approval for an Agreement or Amendment along with the duration and the version.

[[File:Clauses pending Approval.png|RTENOTITLE]]

 

Clause Summary Report

This report provides summerized information based on “Clause Name” and “Clause Version”.

[[File:8.1 Clause Summary Report page.PNG|520px|8.1 Clause Summary Report page.PNG]]

CLM Activity Report

This report provides a quick view for the business leaders on the current high level status of the Agreements, Contract Requests and user activity to gauge the adoption of the ICI platform in their organization and take corrective action to increase adoption of the platform.

[[File:1080px-CLM Activity 10.png|720px|1080px-CLM Activity 10.png]]

Cycle Time Report

This report shows the cycles for an Agreement and the change of states from the date of creation to the date of execution as well as the elapsed time.

[[File:Cycle Time.png|RTENOTITLE]]

Expired Agreements Report 

[[File:Expired Agreements.png|RTENOTITLE]]

Expiring Agreements Report 

[[File:Expiring Agreements.PNG|720px|Expiring Agreements.PNG]]

Signature Type Report 

[[File:Signature Type.png|RTENOTITLE]]

Template Clause Report

This report helps in the mapping templates to the corresponding Clauses, with respect to the Contract Types. It helps administrators to view the impact when a particular Clause or Template is changed in the system.

[[File:Template Clause Report.png|RTENOTITLE]]

Templates Pending Approval Report

This report provides details related to Templates pending approvals, along with the duration and version.

[[File:Template Pending Approval.png|RTENOTITLE]]

User Login Report 

[[File:User Login Report.png|RTENOTITLE]]
</div>

== AI Model Training Performance Report ==

To help administrators to monitor the DiscoverAI’s self-learning progress, a new AI model training performance report has been introduced for each AI model defined in ICI. The report provides a check over the discovery performance for attributes and the need to train AI model with more examples.
<div class="note-box">'''Note''': Access to this report is based on purchase of DiscoverAI app and requisite security permissions.</div>
To access the report: 

1. '''Click''' "Configure" > Masterdata  on the Home page. The Masterdata index page opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:AI1.png|720px|AI1.png]]</div>
2. '''Click''' "View Details" icon corresponding to the AI Model you want to view report for. For example, Payment Terms data. The masterdata aka AI Model Details page opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:AI 2.PNG|720px|AI 2.PNG]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">3. '''Click''' the link in the Model training performance report field under the Advanced section. For example, the View report link. The Report page opens. </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">This report link with the link text are seeded and preconfigured in the AI Configuration Master Contract Type.</div> <div class="image-green-border">The report represents the current AI Model’s (Payment Terms data) week wise accuracy trend in a chart and table form for up to 24 weeks. The graph is plotted as accuracy % against the last 24 weeks in the YYYYWW format.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16-Accessing the Report4.png|720px|7.16-Accessing the Report4.png]]</div>
The report’s table includes below mentioned details as columns with the total for each column: 

*Attributes name 
*Number of times attributes are discovered in the model
*Number of times the attribute value is accepted by a user as they are.
*Number of times a new attribute value is specified by a user
*Accuracy percentage as number of times the attribute value accepted by user as they are/number of times attributes discovered in the model

You can filter the report to view results for specific Attributes either from the Attribute filter provided at the top or by clicking the specific attribute name in the Attributes column in the report table.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 AI Training Report.png|720px|7.16 AI Training Report.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">The chart will represent the AI Model Accuracy graph for selected Attributes in different colors. For example, the report below shows the Payment Terms and Late Payment attributes accuracy trend.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
'''Related Topics:''' [[Agreement_Management|Agreement Management]] | [[Agreement_Details_Page_Reports|Agreement Details Page Reports]] | [[Legal_and_Compliance|Legal and Compliance Reports ]]| [[Admin_Reports|Admin Reports]] | [[Workflow_Reports|Workflow Reports]] | [[Power_BI_Integration_with_ICI|Power BI Integration with ICI]]  | [[Clause_and_Deviation_Insight_Reports|Clause and Deviation Insight Reports]] | [[Obligation_Management_Reports|Obligation Management Reports ]]| [[Sourcing_Reports|Sourcing Reports]] | [[Release_Notes|Release_Notes]] |

Clauses

2022-06-09T10:49:14Z

IDT-1:

 

= <font style="vertical-align: inherit;"><font style="vertical-align: inherit;">Clauses</font></font> =

A Clause is a distinct article or provision in a Contract or Agreement, or other formal or legal written documents. In ICI, you can create new Clauses for various Contract Types, and use these Clauses while creating Templates.

Using the Clauses feature, you can perform the following tasks:

*Search a Clause 
*Create a Clause
*Approve/Reject a Clause
*Edit a Clause
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 72.PNG|820px]]</div>
== Searching a Clause ==

In ICI, you can search an existing Clause for multiple reasons such as:

*To know the details of the Clause.
*To know the status of the Clause.
*To edit an existing Clause.
*You use multiple parameters to search an existing Clause.
*To search Agreements and Amendments based on Clause usage.   

In ICI, you can use various options given below, including the dynamic search feature, to find the desired Clause.

<br/> '''Option 1:'''

1. '''Click''' the ''Clauses'' tile on Home page. The ''Clauses'' page opens.<br/> 2. '''Search''' for a specific clause by using any of the following options:

*Under Categories, '''click '''the ''Select Field'' list, and then select an appropriate item. Search results relevant to the item (that is selected field) are displayed with a number in the bracket. The number denotes the number of clauses that meet the search criteria.
*'''Select''' the checkbox to select a specific item. A list of clauses relevant to the item is displayed. To refine your search further, type the relevant keyword in the ''Custom Keyword ''box, and '''click''' ''Apply''.

'''Option 2:'''

Alternatively, type the keywords in the box provided above the list of clauses. A list of relevant clauses is displayed.

You can further narrow your search by using any of the following methods:

*"..." - Type the search term in double quotation marks. It shows existing clauses that include the exact search term.
**...* - Type the search term in star characters. It shows existing clauses that include the exact search term.
**... - Add a Prefix * to the search term. It shows existing clauses that end with this term.
**...* - Add a Suffix * to the search term. It shows existing clauses that start with this term.

 

=== Searching Agreements and Amendments based on Clause usage ===

ICI allows searching of Agreements and Amendments based on Clause usage and using Advanced Search. This allows users to prioritize the Agreements they plan to work based on Clause usage, thus being able to tackle high-risk Agreements first and mitigating risks. 

You can now search and filter Agreements using the following Clause categories: ''Clause Group'', ''Clause Language'', ''Clause Name'', ''Is Alternate Clause'', ''Is Dependent Clause'', ''Is Deviated'', ''Is Editable'', ''Is Mandatory'', ''Perform Deviation Analysis'', ''Primary Clause'', and ''Clause Code''.
<div class="note-box">'''Note''': ''Clause Description'', ''Clause Text'', ''Linked Primary Clauses'', ''Clause Status'', Linked Primary Template Clause, and search based on Clause text area are not supported in Clause categories.</div>
'''Agreements'''

Let’s search Agreements where Clauses have deviated, and approvals are pending from Deviation Approvers using Clause categories.
<div class="image-green-border">To search Agreement where Clauses have deviated:<br/> 1.  '''Click''' the ''Agreements'' tile on the Home page. The ''Agreements ''page opens. <br/> 2.  '''Enter '''a category or '''select''' one from the ''Categories'' drop-down. For example, ''Document Clauses'': ''Is Deviated''.<br/> <br/> [[File:Clause mgnt 73.PNG|720px]]<br/> <br/> 3.  '''Select''' ''true'' to search Agreements with deviated Clauses. <br/>  <br/> To search Agreements where the ''Status'' is ''Deviation Approval Pending'':<br/> 4.  '''Enter''' a category or '''select''' one from the ''Categories'' drop-down. For example, ''Team Member: Role Name''.<br/> 5.  '''Select '''the checkbox for ''DeviationApprover'' to view the Agreements where approval is pending from ''Deviation Approvers''. All Agreements where the ''Status'' is ''Deviation Approval Pending'' are displayed.<br/>  </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 74.PNG|720px]]<br/>  <br/> 6.  '''Click '''the ''View Record'' icon next to the Agreement you want to select. The Agreement ''Details'' page opens. <br/> 7.  '''Click''' the ''Deviations ''tab to view the Deviation ''Status ''in Clauses for the selected Agreement.<br/>  </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 76.PNG|720px]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
== Addition of action buttons on the Deviations tab ==

The ''ApproveAll, RejectAll'' and ''ClearAll ''buttons have been added on the ''Deviations'' tab of the agreement ''Details'' page to approve, reject or clear the selected deviations respectively.

This makes it easier for the user to take actions on multiple deviations of the agreement in one go, considerably reducing the effort of approving, rejecting or clearing each one individually.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 76.PNG|720px]]</div>
=== Deviated Clauses ===

To view or add deviations for clauses:

1. '''Click''' the view record icon on the ''Agreements'' page. The ''Details'' page opens.

2. '''Click '''the ''Deviations'' tab.

3. '''Click '''the ''Add Deviation'' to manually add deviations to the agreement’s clauses. The ''Add Deviation'' window opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 76.PNG|720px]]</div> <div class="note-box">'''Note: '''To automatically add deviations, you have to download the agreement, modify the clauses and upload the agreement in ICI. To deviate a clause, the ''Deviation Analysis'' attribute should be set to ''Yes'' when creating the clause from the ''Create Clause'' page of ''Clauses''.</div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 77.PNG|520px]]</div>
*'''Click''' the search icon to select and add the deviated clause.
*'''Enter''' the text for the deviated clause.
*'''Enter''' your comments for the deviated clause.
*'''Click''' ''Save''.
<div class="note-box">'''Note''': The Deviations count on the left pane of the Agreement Details page gets incremented as soon as the Deviation is created.''' '''</div>
4. '''Click''' ''Add Deviation Approver ''to manually add approvers for your deviated clauses.

5. '''Click''' the ''Send for Approval'' button.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 76.PNG|720px]]</div>
*'''Click'''  on the three dots to view different options related to the clause
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 8.PNG|RTENOTITLE]]</div>
'''Note''':

*Only deviations that are added manually can be removed. If deviations have been added by downloading the agreement and then uploading the agreement back to ICI, those deviations cannot be removed.
*Deviation approvers can also be added by defining rules from the ''Rules'' page.
*The Primary owner can send the reviewed agreement to the ''Deviation Approver''. As a ''Deviation Approver'', you can approve or reject clauses inside the agreement if a ''Deviation Approver'' role is assigned to you.

6. Clicking the ''Send for Approval'' button in Step 5 enables the ''Approve, Reject, Approve All, Reject All'' and ''Save'' ''Changes'' buttons. The ''Clear All'' button will be enabled when an action is taken on any deviated clause. Only the ''Deviation Approver'' can view these buttons.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 9.png|720px|Clause mgnt 9.png]]</div>
*''Approve'': '''Click''' to approve each individual clause.
*''Reject'': '''Click''' to reject each individual clause.

Clicking the ''Approve'' and ''Reject'' buttons opens the ''Deviation Details'' window, displaying the details of the clause. You can also put in your comments in the ''Comments'' box. You do not have to click ''Save Changes'' to save your comments; they will be saved automatically.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 10.png|720px|Clause mgnt 10.png]]</div>
*To approve or reject deviations in one go, click the ''Approve All'' or ''Reject All'' button.

In the above example, as we have already selected one clause for approval and one clause for rejection, clicking ''Approve All'' or ''Reject All'' will select the remaining 2 clauses (i.e. clauses that are not already selected). You can also add a common comment for the clauses. Comments will not be saved until you click the ''Save Changes'' button.
<div class="note-box">'''Note: '''When you have taken actions for all the deviations, the ''Approve All'' and ''Reject All'' buttons will be disabled.</div>
*''Clear All: ''Clears all selections.
*'''Click''' ''Save Changes ''to save your changes.

The clauses that have been approved will have the status ''Approved, ''whereas the ones that have been rejected or no actions have been taken will have the status ''Requires Approval.''
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 17.png|520px|Clause mgnt 17.png]]<br/>  </div> <div class="image-green-border">'''Amendments'''<br/> To search for Amendments:<br/> 1.  '''Click '''the ''Agreements'' tile on the Home page. The ''Agreements ''page opens. <br/> 2.  '''Enter '''a category or '''select''' one from the ''Categories'' drop-down. For example, ''Is Amendment''.<br/> 3.  '''Select '''the checkbox for ''true'' to filter the list for Amendments. <br/>  </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 11.png|720px|Clause mgnt 11.png]]<br/>   <br/> 4.  '''Enter '''a category or '''select''' one from the ''Categories'' drop-down. For example, ''Document Clauses: Legal''. <br/>  </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 12.png|720px|Clause mgnt 12.png]]<br/>  <br/> 5.  '''Click '''the ''View Record'' icon next to Amendment for which you want to view the Clauses. For example, ''ICISaasAgreementAmendment2''. <br/> 6.  '''Click '''the ''Agreement Clauses'' tab to view all Clauses in the selected Amendment.<br/> 7.  '''Click '''view details eye icon to view the selected Clause details. The ''Clause Details'' window opens displaying the Clause information.<br/>  </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 13.png|620px|Clause mgnt 13.png]]<br/> <br/> '''Using Advanced Search'''<br/> <br/> To search Agreement and Amendment using Advanced Search:<br/> 1.  '''Click '''the ''Advanced'' icon at the top right corner of the Home page. The ''Search'' page opens. <br/>  </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 14.png|520px|Clause mgnt 14.png]]<br/>  </div> <div class="note-box">'''Note''': Agreement Entity is selected by default in the ''Please select Entities to search'' dropdown list. To search other entities, select the respective checkbox.</div>
2.  '''Enter '''the search criteria in the ''Refine Search'' here field to display all Agreements based on the search criteria. For example, ''Sales order''.<br/> 3.  '''Select '''the entity which you want to search let’s select ''Agreement''.<br/> 4.  '''Enter '''a category or '''select''' one from the ''Categories'' drop-down. For example, ''Document Clauses: Is Mandatory''.<br/> 5.  '''Select '''the checkbox ''false'' to view Agreements where this Clause is not mandatory.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 15.png|720px|Clause mgnt 15.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

== Ability to define additional clause group under clause entity ==
<div class="image-green-border">Previously, ICI supported 3 clause groups – “Termination”, “Legal” and “None”.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">With this release, this capability has been further enhanced so that the configurator can configure various clause group names in ICI. These clause groups can be categorized or grouped together as per business requirements for better identification and negotiations during the contract workflow.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">Administrators can now:</div>
*Define and update clause groups.
*Edit, delete, activate or deactivate clause group entities.
*View additionally added clause group values in the clause entity when creating or editing a clause.
*Search agreement records or clauses on the index page on clause group attributes with added values.
<div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">To create an additional clause group:<br/> 1. '''Go to''' ''Configure > Clause Groups > Create''. The ''Create Clause Group'' page opens.</div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 18.png|720px|Clause mgnt 18.png]]<br/>  <br/> 2. '''Type '''a name for the new clause group. For example, ''Data Security''.</div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 19.png|520px|Clause mgnt 19.png]]<br/>  <br/> 3. '''Click '''''Next''. The Verify tab opens.</div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 20.png|520px|Clause mgnt 20.png]]<br/>  <br/> 4. '''Click '''''Create''. The page reloads and the Clause Groups index page opens, and the latest created clause group is displayed in the list.</div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 21.PNG|620px|Clause mgnt 21.PNG]]<br/>  <br/> The new clause group appears in the Clause Group drop-down while creating a clause.</div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 22.png|420px|Clause mgnt 22.png]]<br/>  <br/> 5. '''Click '''the view record icon in the ''Actions ''column for the newly created clause category. The clause group ''Details ''page opens.</div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 23.png|520px|Clause mgnt 23.png]]<br/>  <br/> The following actions can be performed:</div>
*Edit: '''Click''' to edit the clause group name. For example, Data Security can be renamed as Data Security 2021.
*Deactivate: '''Click '''to hide the created clause group from appearing in the Clause Group drop-down. The status of the clause group changes to “Deactivated” and the Activate button is displayed. A deactivated clause can be activated using the Activate button. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 24.PNG|520px|Clause mgnt 24.PNG]]</div>
*Delete: '''Click''' to delete the clause group in Created state. A warning message “Are you sure you want to delete this Clause Group? Note: Please make sure after delete, you unlink this clause group from Rules, Saved Search etc.” is displayed.
**'''Click '''''Yes ''to continue deleting the clause group.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 25.PNG|620px|Clause mgnt 25.PNG]]</div>
*In case of a clause group in Deactivated state,  a validation message is displayed, for example “This Clause Group is linked to one or more Clauses.”
<div class="image-green-border"> [[File:Clause mgnt 26.PNG|420px|Clause mgnt 26.PNG]]<br/> Unlink the clause group from dependent clause(s) and repeat the steps for deletion to complete the process. A success notification will be displayed.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
'''Note: '''

*Deleted clause groups need to be delinked from any existing rules, saved searches and so on. 
*A deactivated clause group will still appear as the clause group for any clauses created while it was active. However, no new clauses can be created using a deactivated clause group.
*Clause groups can be searched using the “Clause Category” filter in Global Search.
*The clause group creation and search functionality is only available to Administrators.

 

 

== Creating a Clause ==

You can create new Clauses for various Contract Types as per business requirements. You can use these Clauses while creating Templates and further in Agreements.

To create a new Clause:

1. '''Click''' the ''Clauses'' tile on ''Home ''page. The ''Clauses ''page opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 62.png|420px|Clause mgnt 62.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border">2. '''Click''' the ''Create'' button. The ''Create Clause ''page opens. </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 63.png|620px|Clause mgnt 63.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">The ''Create Clause'' page consists of the following tabs:</div>
*Details
*Team
*Verify

Let us go through each of the tabs in detail.

==== Details ====

The ''Details ''section consists of metadata for the clause. The extended attributes are available under ''Clause Additional Attributes'' section if configured in your instance.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 64.PNG|520px|Clause mgnt 64.PNG]]</div>
*Contract Type: '''Select''' the Contract Type for which you want to create a Clause. 
*Name: '''Type''' the name of the Clause. 
*Clause Code: It is a system generated code that auto-populates after the Clause is generated. 
*Clause Group: '''Select''' the Clause group in which you want to place the Clause. 
*Clause Description: '''Type''' the description of the Clause. 
*Clause Language: '''Select''' the language of the Clause. 
*Primary Clause: '''Select''' ''Yes'' or ''No'' depending on whether the Clause is primary or not. If you '''select''' ''No'', '''select''' the linked primary Clause (the primary Clause to which the current Clause is linked).
*Linked Primary Clause: '''Select''' the Clause to which the current Clause is linked.
*Is Alternate Clause: '''Select''' ''Yes'' or ''No'' depending on whether the current Clause is an alternative option to another Clause. If you '''select''' ''Yes'', the ''Select Clause'' list opens. Select the appropriate Clause.
*Is Mandatory: '''Select''' ''Yes'' or ''No'' depending on whether the Clause is mandatory for the selected Contract Type.
*Is Editable: '''Select''' ''Yes'' or ''No'' depending on whether you want to make the Clause editable. When you '''select''' ''Yes'' for the ''Is Editable'' field, the ''Deviation Analysis'' field is enabled, as you may want to track the deviation after the Clause is edited.
*Deviation Analysis: '''Select''' ''Yes'' or ''No'' depending on whether you want the system to track the deviations. If you select ''Yes'' in the ''Deviation Analysis'' field, any change in the Clause by the reviewer is displayed as a deviation from the original Clause. If a Clause is changed during the review, the Agreement in which it is used has to go through the deviation approval process.
*Is Dependent Clause: '''Select''' ''Yes'' or ''No'' depending on whether the clause is dependent on another clause. If you select ''Yes'', the ''Select Clause'' list opens. In the ''Select Clause'' list, '''select''' the appropriate Clause. 
*Clause Text: '''Type''' the Clause text that makes the content of the Clause. You can also use the desired attribute from the ''Attributes'' list that opens on the right. You can format the Clause content by adjusting font, font size and so on.
*File: Write the Clause in a word file and upload the word file by '''clicking''' the ''File Upload'' button.
*Version Comments: '''Type''' the comments related to the Clause, if any. Version comments help in tracking the changes made to the clause in every version. 

3. '''Click '''''Next. ''The ''Team ''section opens. 

==== Team ====

To add users in the team: '''Click''' the ''Add Team Member ''icon. The ''Add User'' drawer opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 65.PNG|520px|Clause mgnt 65.PNG]]</div> <ol start="2">
<li>'''Select''' the role of the use from the ''Select Role ''list. </li>
</ol>
<ol start="3">
<li>'''Click '''the desired tile to select a user from the list. </li>
</ol>
<ol start="4">
<li>'''Click '''''Add. ''The user with their role opens in the ''Team ''tab. You can '''click''' the ''Cancel ''icon to remove the user from the list. </li>
</ol>
<ol start="5">
<li>'''Click '''''Next. ''The ''Verify ''tab opens. </li>
</ol>

==== Verify ====

This tab displays all the details of the Clause you want to create. Verify tab displays two buttons.

Choose one of the following:

*'''Click''' ''Previous'' if you want to go back and make changes to the information that you have entered.
*'''Click''' ''Create'' to create the Clause. The Clause opens with the ''Draft'' status. 
*'''Click''' ''Discard ''to discard all changes and delete the clause.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause Mgnt 28.PNG|720px|Clause Mgnt 28.PNG]]<br/>  </div>
'''Note''': Fields marked with * are mandatory. 

4. After creating a clause, choose from the following three options:

*''Edit'': to make changes to the Clause.
*''Send For Approval'': to send a Clause to an assigned approver.
*''Delete'': to delete the Clause.

 

== Approving/Rejecting a Clause ==

=== Sending a Clause for Approval ===

When you create a Clause, the status of the Clause opens as ''Draft''. The Clause must be approved in order to get finalized.

To send a Clause for approval:

1. '''Click''' the ''View Record'' icon next to the clause you want to send for approval. The ''Clause Details ''page opens.

2. The ''Clause Details ''page consists of following buttons. 

*Edit
*Send for Approval
*Delete

3. '''Click''' ''Send For Approval''. The Clause is sent for approval, and the status of the Clause changes to ''Waiting For Approval''.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 29.PNG|520px|Clause mgnt 29.PNG]]<br/> <br/> While approving or rejecting the Clause, an approver can provide the reason for the same.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
=== Approving or Rejecting a Clause ===

Every Clause has a team consisting of a primary owner, a secondary owner, an approver, and so on. Approver has a right to approve or to reject a Clause.

To approve a Clause:

1. On ''My Tasks ''widget on the Home page '''click''' on ''View More.'' The ''User'' ''Tasks ''page opens. 

2. '''Click '''the appropriate link to open the ''Clause Details ''page for approving or rejecting a Clause.

3. '''Click '''one of the following buttons: 

*Edit: '''Click '''to edit the Template
*Approve: '''Click '''to approve the Template
*Reject: '''Click '''to reject the Template. 

4. '''Click''' ''Approve''.

5. '''Type''' the appropriate comments in the ''Add Note ''window and then '''click '''''Add.''

The status of the Clause changes to ''Approved'' which is the final status of a Clause.

 

 

== Editing a Clause ==

With ICI, you can edit a Clause at any state. For example, you can edit a clause that is approved. However, you have to approve the Clause again.<br/> If you edit a Clause in the ''Approved'' state and update the same, the status of the Clause changes to ''Draft''.<br/> Then the clause needs to go through an approval process again.

To edit a Clause:

1. '''Click''' the ''View Record'' icon next to the Clause on the ''Clauses ''page to edit a particular clause. The ''Clause'' ''Details'' page opens.

2. '''Click''' ''Edit. ''The ''Edit Clause'' page opens.
<div class="note-box">'''Note''': You cannot edit the clauses that have the status as ''Waiting for Approval. ''Hence the ''Edit ''button is not available for such clauses.</div>
3. Edit the data in the required fields, and '''click''' ''Next''. The ''Team'' section opens.

4. Complete the required steps under the Team tab and '''click''' ''Next''. The ''Verify'' section opens. The details of the Clause you want to update are displayed.
<div class="image-green-border">5. Choose one of the following:</div>
*'''Click''' ''Previous'' to go back to previous tabs.
*'''Click''' ''Update'' to update the clause. The ''Clause Summary'' page opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 30.PNG|720px|Clause mgnt 30.PNG]]</div> <div class="image-green-border">On the ''Clause Summary'' page, you can see the preview of the Clause on the right side of the page.</div>
6. Choose any of the following options:

*''Edit'' to make changes to the Clause.
*''Send For Approval'' to send the Clause to an assigned approver.
*''Delete'' to delete the Clause.

 

 

== Accessing Control on Clauses ==

The access and visibility of Clauses are restricted through a technical configuration in the following ways: *By restricting access control to the ICI Clause Library based on the Organization level or by adding the user to a Clause Team based on User Groups. This allows the Administrator to selectively provide view access as compared to all users having access to the Clauses tab being able to view and access all clauses in ICI’s Clause Library. So, if a user is not part of Clause Team, only the Clause tile will be displayed but clauses will not be visible to the user even though View privileges have been given in the Security Group.  *By provisioning Event Rules by adding members to the Clause Team thus saving the time of manually adding users to the Team. You can now define conditions on Clause entity attributes such as Clause Created, Clause Updated, Clause Sent For Approval, Clause Approved, etc. *By providing support for the Observer role in the Clause Library and giving read only access using Role Action Mapping for Clause Entity.  *By providing Clause Team-based access filtering at the Template and Agreement level using Word Add-in (.Net and .JS). When editing an Agreement, the clauses are displayed on the Agreement Clauses tab, Parent Agreement Clauses, Library based on the configuration. 
<div class="note-box">'''Note: '''Just like Clauses, Templates can also be access controlled by adding a user to the Team using a technical configuration. However, this capability is only implemented for the ICI UI and .JS version of Word Add-in. The .NET version is currently not supported. </div>
Let's consider an example of Access Control on Clauses using the Organization path screenshot below: As '''<u>User 7</u>''' creates the following primary clauses – ''Clause 01, Clause 02, Clause 03 ''and ''Clause 04''. To do this:
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 66.PNG|420px|Clause mgnt 66.PNG]]</div>
1. '''Click''' the ''Clauses ''tile on the ''Home ''page.<br/> 2. '''Click''' the ''Create Clause'' tile. This opens the ''Create Clause'' page.<br/> 3. '''Enter''' the details for the Clause: *Enter the Name of the Clause. For example, Clause 01. *Enter the remaining details for the Clause.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 31.PNG|620px|Clause mgnt 31.PNG]]</div>
4. '''Click '''''Next''. This opens the Team tab.<br/> 5. '''Add''' a member to the team by clicking the ''Add'' icon.<br/> 6. '''Click''' ''Next''. This opens the Verify tab and verifies the Clause details on the page. <br/> 7. '''Click''' ''Create'' to create Clause 01. This opens the ''Clause Details'' page with a  preview of the Clause document.<br/> 8. '''Click''' the ''Send for Approval ''button to send it for approval. The Clause will be listed on the ''Clauses Index ''page.<br/> 9. Similarly, create Clause 02, Clause 03 and Clause 04 as primary clauses. All users in Auto Products, all users in Auto Quality, and all users in Auto Implementation QA can access all the clauses.<br/> 10. '''Add <u>User 6</u>'''to the Team in one of the following ways: *Add User 6 as an ''Observer ''to the Team and give access to Clause 01 and Clause 03. User can search and view these Clauses, but cannot make any updates to them.  *Add User 6 as a ''Contributor ''to the Team and give access to Clause 01 and Clause 03. User can now search, access and make updates to these Clauses now. *Add User 6 to the Team by provisioning Event Rules. You can now define conditions on Clause entity attributes such as ''Clause Created, Clause Updated, Clause Sent For Approval, Clause Approved,'' etc.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 32.PNG|620px|Clause mgnt 32.PNG]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 33.PNG|620px|Clause mgnt 33.PNG]]</div>
Let’s consider the same example as above, User 6 can also create a Template for the same Contract Type in ICI or using Word Add-in:<br/> 1. '''Create''' a Template using Word Add-in.<br/> 2. '''Click''' the ''Clauses'' tab.<br/> 3. '''Enter''' a search criterion in the ''Library Clauses'' field. The Clauses accessible to the user are listed. <br/> 4. '''Preview''' the Template. Clauses are listed depending on the Rule based conditions. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:SP7 Clauses and Access Control 6.PNG|360px|SP7 Clauses and Access Control 6]]</div>
Creating an Agreement using the Template created in Word Add-in:<br/> 1. '''Create''' an Agreement using this template. User 6 can see the entire Agreement even though access to Clause 02 and Clause 04 is not given. 
<div class="note-box">'''Note:''' Filtering Clauses at Clause level based on the authorization is only applicable when creating Clauses or Clauses. It is not applicable at Agreement level.  </div>
2. '''Click''' the Agreement Clauses tab. All clauses are visible as they are not access controlled at the Agreement level. 
<div class="note-box">'''Note:''' The same applies to Parent Agreements and Deviations as well. </div>
3. '''Click''' ''Show Clause ''to view the clause information.<br/> 4. '''Download''' the Agreement. User can see all the Library Clauses, Agreement Clauses, and Parent Agreement Clauses. <br/> 5. '''Add '''an Alternate Clause to Clause 04. 

User 6 cannot see this clause as Clause 04 is a primary clause, hence the user who does not have access to the primary clause will not be able to see the Alternate Clauses. However, the Alternate Clauses are still visible on the ''Agreement Clauses'' tab.

 

 

 

 

== Configuring Rules for Inclusion/Exclusion of Clauses ==

You can configure Rules to include or exclude Clauses from an Agreement. You can also configure the addition of a Clause Approver to the Team to identify and approve additional requests when a Clause is included or excluded from the Agreement. This allows users to define deviation approval Rules to support Clause inclusion or exclusion from an Agreement that can be tracked throughout the workflow. The following conditions apply to this feature:

*The Clause Approval Rule is only evaluated for ''Edit'' and ''Upload'' actions *For Clauses added systematically, Rule does not trigger the inclusion Rule
*The Clause Approvers can be added based on a Rule; they cannot be added not manually
*The Clause Approval Rule is evaluated by comparing the Agreement with the previous version (the first version does not get evaluated)
*The Clause Approval Rule is evaluated until the Agreement is approved

To include a Clause from an Agreement: <br/> 1. Create an Agreement. For example, MSA.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 34 .png|520px|Clause mgnt 34 .png]]</div>
<br/> 2. If we want to create an inclusion Rule for an External Signatory, '''click '''the ''Add User'' icon to select the External Signatory on the ''Attributes'' page. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 35 .png|520px|Clause mgnt 35 .png]]</div>
<br/> 3. Search User in the Users window and '''click''' the ''Add ''button. For example, CLM Admin.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 36.png|520px|Clause mgnt 36.png]]</div>
<br/> 4. The ''Attributes'' page opens displaying the added user in the External Signatory field. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 37.png|520px|Clause mgnt 37.png]]</div>
5. '''Click''' ''Next''. The S''elect Template'' page opens.<br/> 6. '''Select '''the ''RuleBasedClauses ''template. <br/> 7. '''Click '''''Next''. The ''Create Agreement'' page opens.<br/> 8. '''Click''' ''Create and Publish ''to create the Agreement. The ''Agreement Details'' page opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 38.PNG|520px|Clause mgnt 38.PNG]]</div>
9. Go to the ''Home ''page and '''click''' the ''Configure'' tile. <br/> 10. '''Click''' the ''Rule'' tile to add a Clause Inclusion Rule for an Approver.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 39.PNG|520px|Clause mgnt 39.PNG]]</div>
<br/> 11. '''Click''' the Contract Type. For example, MSA. <br/> 12. '''Select''' the Rule to view the Rule Summary.  
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 40.PNG|620px|Clause mgnt 40.PNG]]</div>
<br/> 13. On the ''Create Rule ''page, select the Contract Type, add the Rule Name (for example, If Clause Name Starts With AcmeRule), Rule Description, and the Rule Type (for example, Clause Assembly). 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 41.PNG|520px|Clause mgnt 41.PNG]]<br/> 14. '''Click''' ''Next'' and add the Rule conditions. <br/> 15. '''Click''' ''Save & Create.'' The ''Rule created successfully ''message is displayed. </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 43.PNG|420px|Clause mgnt 43.PNG]]</div>
18. '''Click''' Ok. The''Rule Index'' page opens. <br/> The Rule has been created such that when a ''Clause Name Starts with AcmeRule'', then the Clause will be included (or excluded based on the creation Rule) and the Clause Approver will be added to the Team at Step Number 10. <br/> 19. Go to the ''Agreements'' page and select the created Agreement (for example, MSA).<br/> 20. The ''Agreement Details'' page opens. '''Click''' the ''Agreement Clauses'' tab. The default Clause from the first version of the Agreement is displayed.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 44.PNG|720px|Clause mgnt 44.PNG]]</div> <div class="note-box">'''Note:''' Clauses from the first version of the Agreement are not included/excluded. </div>
21. Edit the Agreement. If the Clause Assembly Rule is satisfied, then a new Clause is added to the Agreement. '''Click''' ''Next''.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Include Clauses 14.png|720px|Include Clause14]]</div>
<br/> 22. '''Click''' ''Update''. A new Clause is added to the Agreement versions. The Clause Approval Rule is driven and the user is added (at Step Number 10 as defined). A new tab Clause Approver is displayed in the ''Pending'' state.<br/> 23. '''Click''' the ''Clause Approver ''tab. The Clause will be displayed with the ''Approve'' and ''Reject'' buttons.

<br/> You can also include or exclude Clauses using clause metadata or extended attributes (as discussed in the example above) or the Edit or Upload options. You can download the Agreement, and add, remove or modify a new Clause by setting up Rules in that way for Clause Approval.
<div class="note-box">'''Note:''' The inclusion, exclusion or modification Rules must be set up by keeping Approvers at different steps. If they at the same step, it may lead to a discrepancy as to which option must be given preference. For example, if the Clause inclusion is rejected, then the modification is affected. </div>
== Comparing Clauses ==

When an agreement is published, you can compare changes made to clauses between consecutive versions of the agreement. For the first version of the agreement, there are no clauses to compare, hence the ''Previous Text'' box displays no information and the ''Current Text'' box displays the information of the current version of the agreement.

To compare clauses between different versions of an agreement:<br/> <br/> 1. '''Click''' the ''Compare Clause Changes with Previous Document Version'' icon on the agreement ''Details'' page. The ''Compare Changes with Previous Document Version'' window opens. The ''Previous Text'' box does not display any clauses as it is the first version of the agreement. The ''Current Text'' box displays the clauses in the current version of the agreement.

2. '''Click '''''Select Alternate Clause''. The ''List of alternate clauses for SOW Subclause 1'' window displays a list of alternate clauses for ''SOW Subclause 1.''
<div class="note-box">'''Note''': Users can only replace a non-mandatory clause. Thus, there is no ''Select Alternate Clause ''link available for mandatory clauses. Also, the ''Select Alternate Clause ''link is not available for deleted clauses.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">You can select an alternate clause by using ''Select Alternate Clause ''link''. ''</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

 

== Replacing Clause Text from ICI ==

ICI allows replacing the clause text with the alternate clause text from ICI itself. This is accomplished using Compare Clause Changes with Previous Document Version icon available on the agreement Details page. For any particular Primary clause, users can view the list of alternate clauses by clicking the Select Alternate Clause link and select the Alternate clause to swap it with the chosen Primary clause. This Compare Changes with Previous Document Version window gives users the additional flexibility to preview the Previous Text and the Current Text of clauses.

With this release, contract authors will now be able to preview the list of Clause approvers that are triggered when a clause is added, removed or replaced, and a new version of the agreement is created. The modifications can also be viewed on the ''Content Control Differences'' window, thus helping users to make informed decisions before actually creating a new version of agreement.    <br/> <br/> To replace clauses:<br/> <br/> 1. '''Click''' the Compare Clause Changes with Previous Document Version icon on the three dots menu of the Agreement Details page. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 45.PNG|720px|Clause mgnt 45.PNG]]<br/>  <br/> <br/> The ''Compare Changes with Previous Document Version'' window displays the clause difference between ''Current Text'' and ''Previous Text''. <br/> 2. '''Click''' ''Select Alternate Clause''. The ''List of alternate clauses for SOW Subclause 1'' window displays a list of alternate clauses for ''SOW Subclause 1''.</div>
A message is displayed to indicate the Approvers which would be added if the clause is replaced. Separate messages are also displayed for those clauses, for which Approvers will be added if those particular clauses are selected. For example, ''If this clause is selected, Second Approver, Third Approver will be added as Approvers to the team''. Here, contract authors can preview the set of approvers that would get added to the team, while replacing the clause with an alternate clause (before the document assembly takes place). 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 46.PNG|620px|Clause mgnt 46.PNG]]</div> <div class="note-box">'''Note''': Users can only replace a non-mandatory clause. Thus, there is no ''Select Alternate Clause'' link available for mandatory clauses. The ''Select Alternate Clause'' link is not available for deleted clauses. Additionally, the ''Select Alternate Clause'' link will only be visible for those clauses which have an alternate clause available.</div>
Similarly, a message is displayed for clauses where some Approvers will be removed, and others will be added. For example, ''Replacing this clause will remove ICM Admin as an approver from the team.''
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 47.PNG|720px|Clause mgnt 47.PNG]]</div> <div class="image-green-border">3. '''Select''' the clause to be replaced from the list of available alternate clauses. For example, ''Attorney Fees Clause''.<br/>  <br/> [[File:Clause mgnt 48.PNG|720px|Clause mgnt 48.PNG]] <br/> 4. '''Click''' ''Select clause''. <br/> 5. The''Please Confirm'' window opens if there is Dependent Clause available for the selected clause. <br/> 6. '''Click''' ''Yes'' if you want to add the dependent clause as well.<br/> 7. The ''SOW subclause 1'' is replaced by ''SOW sub clause2'' in the ''Compare Changes with Previous Document Version'' window.</div> <div class="note-box">'''Note''': Users have the option to remove the Alternate Clause by clicking the X icon.</div>
8. '''Click''' ''Save Changes''. The clause text is replaced by Alternate clause.   <br/> 9. The ''Versions'' tab displays the changes made in the Clause text.

10. '''Click''' ''Show All Details'' to view the ''Content Control Differences''. Details on any Approver(s) added due to swapping of clauses are displayed in the ''Change'' column.
<div class="note-box">Note: The ''Content Control Differences'' popup window is based on configuration and is displayed if it has been enabled for a workflow action, for example ''Send for Review''.</div>
11. The ''SOW subclause 1'' is replaced by ''SOW sub clause2'' and its dependent clause (''SOW dependent clause'').

 

== Support for extended clause metadata ==

Previously, ICI had limited capability to capture additional attributes as part of a clause creation.<br/> With this release, an entity to extend attributes is introduced to add more attributes to clauses which will be useful in capturing more granular level details related to the clause.<br/> Users can now:

*Create masterdata contract types with additional clause attributes.
*View extended clauses attributes in the clause creation wizard.
*Configure clause assembly rules using extended clause attributes.
*Enter the values for extended clause attributes using Add-ins.

 

=== Creating the masterdata for additional clause attributes ===

Users can create a masterdata contract type and define additional attributes to capture more details for a clause. These attributes will then be available as extended attributes while creating a clause.
<div class="note-box">Note: Extended attributes for clauses are enabled through technical configuration. </div>
To create masterdata contract type:

#'''Click '''''Configure'' > ''Contract Type ''>  ''Create >'' ''Masterdata ''on the ''Home ''page. 
#'''Click '''''Next''. The ''Create Contract Type'' page opens.
#'''Enter '''a name in ''Contract Type Name'' field. For example, ''Extended Clause Entity.''
#'''Define '''additional attributes on the ''Attributes ''tab. 
#'''Enter '''details on the ''Display Preference ''and ''Team ''tabs.
#'''Verify '''the details and '''click '''''Create''. The masterdata is created.
#'''Click '''''Send for Approval'' to send the contract type for approval. 
<div class="note-box">Note: Extended attributes support all existing attribute functionalities such as lookup, cascade, conditional, mandatory attributes, localization and so on. </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 49.PNG|720px|Clause mgnt 49.PNG]]</div>
 

 

=== Creating Clause with Extended Attributes ===

The extended attributes for clause are available while creating a clause if configured in your instance. <br/> To create a clause with extended attributes:

#'''Click '''''Clauses ''> ''Create ''on the ''Home ''page. The ''Create Clause ''page opens.
#'''Enter '''a clause ''Name.'' For example, ''Payment Terms.''
#'''Enter '''the remaining details for clause metadata and clause additional attributes.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 68.PNG|520px|Clause mgnt 68.PNG]]</div>
Attributes from masterdata ''Extended Clause Entity'' are available on the ''Clause Additional Attributes'' section on the ''Details ''tab.
<ol start="4">
<li>'''Click '''''Next''. The ''Team ''tab opens.</li>
<li>'''Enter '''the details on the ''Team ''tab.</li>
<li>'''Click '''''Next''. The ''Verify ''tab opens.</li>
<li>'''Verify '''the details and '''click '''''Create''. The clause is created with extension attributes such as ''Chemical Name, Governing Law''</li>
</ol>

After clause is created, users can ''Edit, Send for Approval'' and ''Delete ''the clause.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 70.png|720px|Clause mgnt 70.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="note-box">Note: Clause extended attributes are applicable for existing / legacy Clauses.</div>
 

 

 

=== Searching Clause with Extended Attributes ===

Users can search and retrieve existing clauses with extended attributes as search parameters from facet search on the ''Clause ''index page, ''Advanced Search, Global Search ''and ''Saved Search. ''Extended attributes are available in search facets drop-downs along with regular attributes with ''Extension Attribute: ''prefix. 

To search clauses:

#'''Click '''''Clauses tile ''on the ''Home ''page. The ''Clauses'' index page opens with all existing clauses.
#'''Type '''extended attribute in the ''Refine Search here… ''search box. The list of relevant clauses opens.
#'''Select '''extended attribute as search parameter in the ''Categories ''drop-down. For example, extended attribute ''Clause is Active ''and values ''true, false'' ''Categories''. All matching clauses are displayed.
#'''Filter '''your search further by selecting and typing specific extended attribute value in the ''Custom Keyword'' field and '''click '''''Apply''. For example, ''Custom Keyword'' as ''true''. Only clauses in active state are displayed.  
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 71.PNG|620px|Clause mgnt 71.PNG]]</div>
Users can search clauses by extended attributes using the ''Advanced Search'' and ''Saved Search.''<br/> On ''Advanced Search'' page, select ''Clauses ''in ''Entity ''drop-down and type extended attribute in the ''Refine Search here…'' search box. Refer to ''Using Advanced Search'' for details on using search filters, operators, and options.

Users can save the search criteria with extended attributes as search parameters and use as global or local ''Saved Search''. Refer to''Saved Searches ''for details on saving a search. Refer to ''Using Advanced Search'' for details on retrieving a ''Saved Search.''<br/>  

 

=== Configuring Clause Assembly Rule with Extended Attributes ===

You can configure clause assembly rule and include or exclude clauses with extended clause metadata in a same way as with clause’s regular metadata.

To create a clause assembly rule:

#'''Click '''''Configure ''> ''Rule ''> ''Create'' on the ''Home ''page. The ''Create Rules ''page opens.
#'''Select '''the ''Contract Type ''for which you want to create a rule on the ''Setup ''tab. For example, ''MandatoryClauseCT.''
#'''Enter '''a name in the ''Rule Name ''field. For example, ''Extension Clause Assembly Rule.''
#'''Select'''''<i>Clause Assembly</i> in the ''Rule Type''.  ''
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 52.PNG|520px|Clause mgnt 52.PNG]]</div> <ol start="5">
<li>'''Click '''''Next''. The ''Build ''tab opens.</li>
<li>'''Click '''''Add Rule'' under ''Builder ''tab. The ''Add Rule ''section opens.</li>
<li>'''Enter '''the ''Conditions''. For example, for contract type ''MandatoryClauseCT'''','''''<b>''Type of Paper Contains Own.''</b></li>
<li>'''Select '''''Clause by Condition'' in the drop-down on the ''Actions ''section.</li>
<li>'''Select ''' Clause Text '''''drop-down. The extension attributes are available along with clauses metadata.</li>
<li>'''Select '''the operator in ''Conditions'' next drop-down. For example, ''Contains''.</li>
<li>'''Select '''the extended attribute’s value in ''Conditions ''next drop-down. For example, ''Acetone''.</li>
<li>'''Select''' ''No ''in ''Stop Processing More Rules'' field. The further evaluation of rules within a ruleset continues.</li>
</ol>
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause Mgnt 53.PNG|720px|Clause Mgnt 53.PNG]]</div> <ol start="13">
<li>'''Click '''''Validate''. The page to validate the rule by entering attributes values of the selected''Contract Type'' opens.</li>
<li>'''Click '''''Create''. The ''Rule created successfully'' message appears. The rule is displayed in the list of ''Rules ''of the selected contract type.</li>
</ol>

 

 

=== Accessing Clause Extended Metadata from Agreements ===

users can view these clause extension attributes on the agreement entity for easy reference while working with agreements by clicking Agreement Clauses or Clause Approver tabs in the left navigation pane on the agreement Details page.

Users can:

*Select and save extension attributes to display in the grid view, via the “Default Search” column functionality.
*View additional clause attributes on the “Agreement Clause” and “Clause Approver” tabs.
*View the hyperlink “Show Clause Information”, which displays all clause extension attributes along with clause attributes, in the same window.

<br/> To view clause extension attributes:

1. '''Click '''''Agreement ''on the ''Home'' page. The agreements Index page opens.<br/> 2. '''Click '''the ''View Record'' icon corresponding to the agreement you want to open. The agreement ''Details'' page opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause Mgnt 54.png|720px|Clause Mgnt 54.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">3. '''Click''' ''Agreement Clauses'' tab in the left navigation pane. All agreement clauses open in grid displaying clause metadata and clause extension attributes.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause Mgnt 55.PNG|720px|Clause Mgnt 55.PNG]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">Users can select the clause extension attributes to be displayed as columns in grid for all users using the ''Default Search Column'' functionality from the Extended Clause Masterdata entity. </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 56.PNG|520px|Clause mgnt 56.PNG]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">Users can also configure the clause extension attributes they want to display and set the display order for the current page.</div> <div class="image-green-border"><br/> 4. '''Click '''''Select Columns ''action icon. The ''Select Attributes'' window opens displaying all the extension attributes defined in the Extended Clause Masterdata Entity.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 58.png|620px|Clause mgnt 58.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">5. '''Rearrange '''or remove the extension attributes in the ''Selected'' ''Attributes'' pane using action arrows. For example, remove ''Vendor_Address ''and ''Vendor_Name''.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 59.PNG|520px|Clause mgnt 59.PNG]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">6. '''Click''' ''Apply''. The attributes will be displayed as per the sequence set in the grid.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 60.png|720px|Clause mgnt 60.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="note-box">Note: Additional Extension attributes selected from the Select Column action Icon will not be saved, and the grid will display only default extension attributes in columns when the page is refreshed.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">7. '''Click '''''Show Clause Information'' link corresponding to the clause you want to view details of in the ''Clause Information'' column. For example, ''Jurisdiction_AI ''. The ''Clause Details ''window opens. The clause extension attributes are displayed under ''Clause Additional Attributes'' section.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Clause mgnt 61.PNG|620px|Clause mgnt 61.PNG]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">8. '''Click '''''Clause Approver'' tab in the left navigation pane. All agreement clauses opens in grid displaying clauses extension attributes along with metadata.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">9. '''Click '''''Clause code'' link corresponding to the clause you want to view details of in the ''Clause Code ''column. The ''Clause Details'' window opens displaying clause extension attributes under the ''Clause Additional Attributes'' section.</div>
'''Related Topics:''' [[Agreement_Management|Agreement Management]] | [[Agreements|Agreements]] | [[Rule|Rule]] | [[Templates|Template Management]] | [[Release_Notes|Release_Notes]] |

Associations

2022-06-09T10:46:23Z

IDT-1:

= Associations =

Associated documents are additional legal documents or supplementary materials added to an Agreement.

Associated documents can be:

*Created using a Template
*Uploaded into ICI
*Prepared from the Associated Document Contract Type model

From the "Associations" tile or navigation menu you can:

*Search an Associated document
*Create an Associated document
*View an Associated document 
*Edit an Associated document
*Approve an Associated document

== Searching an Associated Document ==

Use the Search feature to get relevant search results. You can use various methods to narrow down your search and locate the specific Associated Document you are looking for.

To search Associated Documents:

1. '''Click''' the "Associations" tile on the Home page.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Assocations Tile.png|450px|Assocations Tile.png]]</div>
The "Associations" page opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Assocations Details Page.png|726px|Assocations Details Page.png]]</div>
2. '''Search '''for a specific Associated Document by using any of the following options:

You can find specific associated documents you are looking for using one of these 2 methods:

*Global Search and Advance Search on the top of the page
* "Refine View" pane on the left of 

*Under Search:
**'''Click''' the Select Field list, and then select the appropriate item from the list. The relevant results are populated. For example, if you select Status (to filter Associations according to the various status of associated documents), list of various states of Associated Documents is displayed. You can then select appropriate status such as Approved, draft.
**The number in the bracket denotes the number of available items which contain the search term. You can select multiple options at the same time.
**To narrow your search, '''type''' free text in the Custom Keyword box, and then '''click''' "Apply".
*Alternatively, '''type''' keywords in the "Refine Search here" box. A list of relevant Associated Documents opens.
*You can further narrow your search by using any of the following methods:
**"..." - '''Type''' the search term in double quotation marks. It shows existing Associated Documents that include the exact search term.
***...* - '''Type''' the search term in star characters. It shows existing Associated Documents that include the exact search term.
***... - Prefix * to the search term. It shows existing Associated Documents that end with this term.
**...* - Suffix * to the search term. It shows existing Associated Documents that start with this term.

== Creating an Associated Document ==

In ICI, you can create the Associated documents separately. 

To create an Associated document:

1. '''Click '''the "Associations" tile on the "Home"page (as explained in step 1 of above section). 

2. 'Click''' "Create" '''button on the '''"Associations'''' page. The "Create Association" page opens. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Create Association Details Tab.png|600px|Create Association Details Tab.png]]</div>
3. '''Click '''"Parent Agreement" icon. The Lookup Search window opens.

4. '''Select''' the parent agreement that you want the document to be associated with.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Associations Select Parent Agreement.png|726px|Associations Select Parent Agreement.png]]</div>
 
<div class="note-box">'''Note:''' You can select only Parent Agreement.</div>
5. '''Click''' "Select". This takes you back to the Create Associated Document page with the selected document displayed in the Parent Contract field.

6. '''Select '''the Category.

7. '''Select '''the Contract Type Name.
<div class="note-box">'''Note''': The''' '''Contract Type Description field facilitates users to select the desired Contract Type.</div>
8. '''Click''' Next. The "Metadata" tab. '''Click '''the Go to Parent Agreement link to access the relevant Parent Agreement.

9. In the Metadata tab, '''enter''' the appropriate information for the attributes.

10. '''Select''' the File Path field to upload the Associated document. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Create Association MetaData SelectPath.png|700px|Create Association MetaData SelectPath.png]]</div>
11. '''Click''' "Create". The Associated Document gets created and the Agreement Details page opens. You can see the Associations here. ICI allows you to assemble both text and images in the Association file in the main Agreement document.
<div class="note-box">'''Note''': The Association count on the left pane of the Agreement Details page gets incremented as soon as the Association is created.</div> <div class="image-green-border">   [[File:Create Associations Summary Page.png|726px|Create Associations Summary Page.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
=== Using parent’s Organization Unit path when creating associated document ===

During creation, the organization unit path of the parent document will be displayed by default as the org path for the associated document, thus improving the usability. 
<div class="image-green-border">For example, if the organization unit path of the logged in user is /Icertis, but the path of the parent agreement is /Icertis/autoproducts, then the associated document now displays the parent entity’s path  that is /Icertis/autoproducts. Hence, both parent and child documents have the same organization unit path at the time of creation as well as updation.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Assocations Parent OrgUnit1.png|726px|Assocations Parent OrgUnit1.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Assocations Child OrgUnit1.png|726px|Assocations Child OrgUnit1.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">This is applicable to the following associations:</div>
*Import of Association (Line item)
*Auto Attachment Association
*Obligation/Fulfillment (Association of Association)
<div class="image-green-border">The existing event rules apply for the association creation and changes made to org path via event rules are captured in the History.</div>
== Creating associations on create/edit wizard of agreement ==

The ability to create association instances as part of agreement creation or update wizard is being introduced in this release. A separate page is displayed, when creating or updating the agreement or amendment, for the user to create, view or delete inline associations. The user also has an option to select the columns and their order in the association grid. 
<div class="image-green-border">This new page also supports page navigation. Support is also provided to copy attribute rules, association events and agreement assembly, in case associations are tagged in the agreement template. </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">
=== Configuring Inline Associations ===

As a prerequisite to enable Inline Associations for an agreement, the agreement’s contract type must be configured. To configure the agreement contract type for inline associations:

1. '''Go to '''the Association tab of the agreement contract type, for example Automation Non Editable Agreement.

[[File:8.0-Associations7.PNG|720px|8.0-Associations7.PNG]]<br/>  <br/> 2. '''Click '''the plus icon next to Association. The Add Association content will be displayed. 
<div class="note-box">'''Note''': The association (associated document contract type) should NOT have template enabled; the approver workflow flag needs to be set to False and constraint should be None or Prerequisite (not Postrequisite). If these criteria are not satisfied, the Inline Associations flag will automatically be disabled.</div>
3. '''Set '''the appropriate flags. In order to enable Inline Associations, the Inline Association flag must be set to Yes.
<div class="note-box">'''Note''': If the Inline Associations flag is enabled then the Defined By Rule flag gets disabled by default. Alternatively, if the Defined By Rule flag is set to Yes, the Inline Associations functionality will be disabled.</div>
4. As an option you can configure a Rule on this contract type with Copy Attribute Value condition for select attributes, for example for the Contract Value.

=== Using Inline Associations ===

1. '''Go to "'''Agreements"> "Create" on the "Agreements" page. The Create Agreement page opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-Associations8.PNG|720px|8.0-Associations8.PNG]]<br/>  <br/> 2. '''Select '''the Contract Type Name which has the Inline Associations flag enabled. For example, Automation Non Editable Agreement.</div>
3. '''Click '''Next. The Initial Attributes page opens.
<div class="image-green-border">4. '''Enter '''details such as Name, Test Case Id, Contract Value, and so on.</div>
5. '''Click '''Next. The Auto-saving agreement and loading inline associations message is displayed and the page reloads displaying the Inline Association page.
<div class="image-green-border">6. '''Click '''the "Add"button. The Create Association popup window opens.</div>
7. '''Enter '''the appropriate attribute values. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-Associations9.PNG|720px|8.0-Associations9.PNG]]</div>
8. '''Click '''"Create". The page reloads and the Association count is updated to 1.  Alternatively you can '''click''' "Save And Create New" to create one association and to refresh the page for another association to be created. The “Save and Create New” action is only applicable for adding new associations and will not be available for updating or copying existing association.
<div class="image-green-border">9. '''Click '''the "More"icon in the "Actions" column. The actions available are: </div>
*Edit: Select to open the Edit Association page in the same tab.
*View Record: Select to open the Associated Document details page in a new tab.
*Copy: Select to create a copy of the association.
*Disassociate: Select to disassociate the Association.
*View Document: Select to view an uploaded document, if any.
*View Smart Links: Select to view smart links if available.
<div class="note-box">'''Note''': The actions displayed are based on user authorization.</div>
 

 

== Associations Details ==

The Associations can be viewed from:

*The Agreement Details page "Associations" tab.
*The "Associations" tile or menu on the navigation pane.

Refer Agreement Details page "Associations" section for the first option.

To view Association Details with the second option:

1. '''Click '''"Associations" on the main navigation menu on the top. "Associations" index page opens listing all available associations.

2. '''Click '''the eye [[File:Eye-icon.PNG|20px|Eye-icon.PNG]]icon in the far right on the Association you want to view. The "Associations" Details page appears. 

The page has a left navigation pane, a Summary, Split View/ Preview, all relevant action buttons similar to the "Agreement Details Page".

Refer to the "Agreement Details Page" page for more details.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-Associaitons-Details-Page1.png|720px|8.0-Associaitons-Details-Page1.png]]</div>
 

== Assembly of Associated documents based on a defined order  ==

ICI enables users to define the format for assembly of associations tagged as a Table or file in the main Agreement using Saved Search. This is accomplished by tagging Saved Searches of associated documents in an agreement.

=== <br/> Defining the order of Associated documents using Save Search ===
<div class="image-green-border"><br/> To define the order of associations using Saved Search:<br/> 1. '''Enter''' the search text in the  "Enter search text here" box and then '''click '''the Search icon . The "Search" window opens.</div> <div class="image-green-border"><br/> [[File:8.0-Associations10.PNG|720px|8.0-Associations10.PNG]] </div> <div class="image-green-border"><br/> 2. '''Select''' "Obligation" from the "Please select Entitiesto Search:  drop-down list. </div> <div class="image-green-border"> <br/> 3. '''Click '''the search icon to search all Obligation. All Obligations are displayed.</div> <div class="image-green-border">4. '''Click''' "Select Columns" to add columns as per requirement for example, Team Member: User Name. The Select Columns window opens.  </div> <div class="image-green-border">5. '''Click''' "Apply".<br/> 6. '''Enter''' a category or select one from the Categories drop-down. For example, "Created By". <br/> 7. '''Select''' the checkbox next to the users for which you want to view the Obligation. For example, Configuration Admin.  All Agreements created by the Configuration Admin are displayed. <br/> 8. '''Click''' the Save Search icon. The Save Search window opens.</div> <div class="image-green-border"><br/> [[File:8.0-Associations11.PNG|720px|8.0-Associations11.PNG]] </div> <div class="image-green-border"><br/> 9. '''Enter''' a name in the "Save search as" field. For example, Total number of Obligations.</div> <div class="image-green-border"><br/> [[File:8.0-Associations12.PNG|720px|8.0-Associations12.PNG]] </div> <div class="image-green-border"><br/> 10. '''Toggle''' Yes for the Global Search field.<br/> 11. '''Toggle''' Yes for the Dashboard Tile field.<br/> 12. '''Enter''' a name in the Dashboard Tile Name field. For example, Total number of Obligations.<br/> 13. '''Click''' Save. The Information window opens indicating that search is saved.</div> <div class="image-green-border">14. '''Click''' Ok to save the search.</div>
 

=== Tagging of Associated Documents in the Agreement Template with Saved Search ===
<div class="image-green-border">1. '''Log on''' to Icertis Experience for Word to create an agreement template.<br/> 2. '''Click''' Create to create a Template. <br/> 3. '''Select''' the contract type. For example, MSA_OM. The MSA_OM has Obligation as Associated Contract Type. <br/> 4. '''Enter''' a name for the template. For example, MSA_template.<br/> 5. '''Click''' Save. The template is saved.<br/> 6. '''Click''' the Library tab.<br/> 7. '''Click''' the Associations button.<br/> 8. '''Click''' the more actions icon. A window opens with options such as Add as file, Add as file with page break, Add as table, Add as table with page break and Add with Saved Search. <br/> 9. '''Click''' Add with Saved Search. The Select Saved Search and tag window opens.<br/> 10. '''Select''' Total number of Obligations from the drop-down list.<br/> 11. '''Click''' Add as table to add associations as a table.<br/> 12. The Obligation added to document window opens.<br/> 13. '''Click''' Save. The template is saved. <br/> 14. In the Agreement details page of ICI, let us now add some Obligations. For example, Trojan, Trojan 2 and Trojan 3.  <br/> 15. Go to the Saved Searches (Total number of Obligations) and sort the Obligations of based on the descending order of End date column.<br/> 16. '''Click '''the Save Search icon to save the revised Saved Searches. <br/> 17. '''Click''' Assemble Contract on the Agreement Details page to assemble the associated document as per the revised Saved Searches.</div> <div class="image-green-border"><br/> 18. '''Click''' "Preview Document" next to the agreement that you want to view. </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-PreviewAgreement.PNG|720px|8.0-PreviewAgreement.PNG]]<br/>  <br/> Associated documents are sorted based on the Saved Searches.  <br/>  </div> <div class="note-box">'''Note''': The Revised order of associations is visible by clicking the following buttons on the agreement Details page: Upload Document, Assemble Contract and Send For Approval. </div>
 

== Understanding Multi-Party Agreements ==

Additional platform support for Associations have been added. These enhancements support full platform functionality for Association metadata that was previously available only for Agreement metadata. The additional enhancements fall into following main areas:

*Ability to use Association Attributes in Rules
*Ability to tag Association Attributes in Agreement and Clause Templates
*Ability to use faceted search for Association Attributes from the main Search page
*Ability to compare Association tagged as a table across versions

One of the primary functional drivers for these new capabilities is to enable full functionality for Multi-party Agreements.

=== Making the Association type itself available while selecting Attributes ===

Building on the functionality around one-to-many relationships in Associations, ICI provides the ability to reference Association counts in Rule criteria. Since Rules can now be written for individual Attributes of an Association, it enables Admins to write Rules based on the count of Associations that have been added of a specific type. All attributes for Associations are available for the given Rule conditions and every Association has a specific sequence number so that the metadata of that sequence is tagged in the Template. You can search selected values of an Agreement or an Associated Document. For a multi-division Agreement, ICI supports writing Rules based on individual instances of the multi-value attributes.

When Rules are written based on the Attributes of the Association, the rules support tagging of the Metadata that belongs to the association. The associations may either be parent-child or peer. After the content control tag is entered, the value of the associated instances’ metadata is placed in the content control as shown in the example below.

 

=== Introducing a Content Control tag for Association Metadata ===

You can create a saved search to get the Association attribute and assemble it in the Agreement. You can sort any of the available columns. The name of the saved search is used to tag that association’s Metadata into the Template. This feature works only on Publish Agreement and Edit Agreement.

These changes to the attribute are done by editing the content control in Word manually. The example below shows the content control tag.

'''Note:''' This is not available in ICI Word Add-in.

'''Example:'''

==== Editing a content control tag ====

1.To tag the association’s metadata to the clause, edit the control tag as follows:

ICMAssociation|AssociationSavedSearchName{0}.ICMClientContactPerson

where,

*The selected Contact Person from the Contract Party association’s sequence is 1.
*The index is a zero based index. 0 means 1<sup>st</sup> instance, 1 means 2<sup>nd</sup> instance, and so on.

The sample content control will look as follows:

Click here to enter text.

==== Adding a content control tag ====

1. '''Check''' if the Developer ribbon is available in the Word menu. To enable it, go to:

        File -> Options -> Customize Ribbon -> Enable Developer

2. '''Select''' Plain Text Content Control -> Properties and add the attribute’s display name in the Title.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Adding a Content Control Tag.png|Create an Associated Document (multi-party agreement) - Adding a Content Control Tag]]</div>
3. Add ICMAssociation|AssociationSavedSearchName{index}.{Attribute’s Technical Name}

where,

*ICMAssociation: This is static and does not change.
*AssociationSavedSeachName: As explained above.
*Index: This is a zero based index. 0 means 1<sup>st</sup> instance, 1 means 2<sup>nd</sup> instance, and so on.
*Attribute’s Technical Name: The technical name of the attribute of Association, such as, ICMCountryName, ICMPartyName, and so on.

 

=== Comparing Association tagged as a table across Agreement versions ===

The functionality of alerting users on redlining of changes in Association tagged as a table is visible through the Versions tab of the Agreement document. Let’s see an example where the user edits a table tagged as Association and then uploads a revised Agreement to ICI and how ICI alerts the user regarding the changes made in the table tagged as an Association.

To edit an existing Agreement where a table is tagged as an Association:   

1.  '''Click''' the "Agreements" tile on the "Home" page.  The "Agreements" page opens.<br/> 2.  '''Click '''the View Record icon next to the Agreement in which you want to edit the Associated Document table. The Agreement Details page opens. For example, Main Sales Order 2.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-Associations13.PNG|720px|8.0-Associations13.PNG]]<br/>  <br/> 3.  '''Click''' Download to download the Agreement. The Agreement gets downloaded in Microsoft Word document (.Docx) format.<br/> 4.  '''Edit '''the Associated Document table. For example, let’s remove existing numbers 83, 67, and 75 from the cells of the Display Label column of Line Item: Table1. </div>
 [[File:4-Table-Ass.PNG|720px|RTENOTITLE]]<br/> [[File:4-Table-2-Ass.PNG|720px|RTENOTITLE]]

5.  '''Click '''Save.<br/> 6.  '''Click '''Upload Document in ICI. The Upload Document window opens.<br/> 7.  '''Click''' Select File to select the revised Template.  <br/> 8.  '''Click''' Upload File to upload the revised file. The "Please Confirm" window opens with a message Changes in Association Table(s).
<div class="image-green-border">9.  '''Click '''the Show Changes link to view the changes made in the Association Tables. The Association Tables window opens highlighting the removed values (83,67 and 75)  in the Display Labelcolumn. </div> <div class="image-green-border"><br/>  <br/> '''Legends:''''<br/> <br/> ''[[File:9-Ass-2.PNG|720px|RTENOTITLE]]''</div> <div class="image-green-border">''''' '''''</div> <div class="note-box">Note: Deviation tracking and reverse sync of the changed table data to the respective Association instances is not supported. Icertis Experience for Word supports this capability unlike ICI .Net Add-in but provides limited information. Table comparison is only shown when cell values get changed not when empty cells get added or removed.</div> <div class="image-green-border"><br/> 10.  '''Click''' Cancel to return to the Please Confirm window. <br/> 11.  '''Click''' Yes to upload the revised Associated Document.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">12.  '''Click''' the Versions tab to view the different Agreement documents with revised Associated tables.<br/> ''''' <br/> [[File:8.0-Associations14.PNG|720px|8.0-Associations14.PNG]]'''''<br/> <br/> 13.''''' '''''<b>Click</b> the Show All Details link to view the changes in the Association Table(s). </div> <div class="image-green-border">''''' '''''</div> <div class="note-box">''Note''': '''''A user can also able to view the changes in the Versions tab on performing actions like Assemble Contract or Send For Approval on the Agreement Details page.  </div> <div class="image-green-border">''''' '''''</div> <div class="image-green-border">When modifications are made using the Icertis Experience for Word, a user can view the changes in the Associated table of the published Agreement.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="note-box">Note''': '''Users can view limited information in Icertis Experience for Word like changes made in an Association table unlike the detailed changes available in ICI web. </div>
 

=== To view Associated table changes through Icertis Experience for Word ===

When modifications are made using the Icertis Experience for Word, a user can view the changes in the Associated table of the published Agreement.
<div class="note-box">'''Note''': Users can view limited information in Icertis Experience for Word like changes made in an Association table unlike the detailed changes available in ICI web.</div>
 

== Highlighting changes in Associations tagged as a file ==

ICI alerts the user and presents a summary of any text that is added or modified in association(s) tagged as file(s).  <br/> <br/> The following actions take place as soon as a new agreement version is uploaded:

*The version being uploaded is compared with the latest version available in ICI 
*A window is displayed alerting the changes made in associations
<div class="note-box">'''Note''': The user can also view the changes in the association by clicking the View all modifications button for a published agreement using Icertis Experience for Word</div>
 

=== Highlighting changes in Associations using Icertis Experience for Word ===

To view changes in Associations tagged as a file:<br/> 1. '''Click''' Download in ICI. The agreement document is downloaded.<br/> 2. '''Click''' Enable Editing to edit the agreement document.<br/> 3. '''Log on''' to Icertis Experience for Word. <br/> 4. '''Edit''' the agreement document. For example, let us edit Annexure2, which is tagged as an association as a file.<br/> 5. '''Click '''Publish. The Publish Agreement window opens. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.11 document validation 1 7.16 update.png|720px|7.11 document validation 1 7.16 update.png]]<br/>  <br/> 6. '''Enter '''a note. </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.11 document validation 2 7.16 update.png|720px|7.11 document validation 2 7.16 update.png]]<br/>  <br/> 7. '''Click''' Save. A validation message window opens indicating the warnings or errors so that you can take appropriate actions to proceed.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.11 document validation 3 7.16 update.png|720px|7.11 document validation 3 7.16 update.png]]<br/>  <br/> 8. '''Click '''View all modifications. The ICI Web page opens displaying the modifications made in the association files. For example, Annexure2 association files. </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="note-box">As per release 7.10, “View All Modifications” was being shown in popup window, but from 7.11 it will be opened in default browser set by respective users on their machine.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> <br/> 9. '''Click '''Download Comparison to view the comparison between the previous agreement version and the current version. This document highlights the modifications made.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.11 document validation 5.png|720px|7.11 document validation 5.png]] </div> <div class="image-green-border"><br/> 10. '''Go '''to Icertis Experience for Word.<br/> 11. '''Click''' Yes to continue uploading the document.<br/> </div>
=== Highlighting changes in Associations using ICI ===

1. '''Click '''Download in ICI. The agreement document is downloaded.<br/> 2. '''Click''' Enable Editing to edit the agreement document.<br/> 3. '''Log on''' to Icertis Experience for Word. <br/> 4. '''Edit''' the agreement document. For example, let us edit Annexure2, which is tagged as an association as a file.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.11 document validation 6 7.16 update.png|720px|7.11 document validation 6 7.16 update.png]]<br/>  <br/> 5. '''Save''' the agreement document.<br/> 6. '''Click '''Upload Document. The Upload Document window opens.<br/> 7. '''Click''' Select File. For example, ICISaasAgreement.Docx.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-Associations15.PNG|720px|8.0-Associations15.PNG]]<br/>  <br/> 8. '''Click '''Upload File. The Please Confirm window opens indicating the changes in the Association File(s).</div> <div class="image-green-border"> <br/> 9. '''Click '''Download Comparison to view the comparison between the latest available version of the agreement and the version being uploaded. This document highlights the modifications made.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.11 document validation 5.png|720px|7.11 document validation 5.png]] </div> <div class="image-green-border"><br/> 10. '''Click '''Yes to continue uploading the document. </div> <div class="image-green-border"> <br/> 11. '''Click '''Show All Details on the Versions tab. </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-Associations16.PNG|720px|8.0-Associations16.PNG]]<br/>  <br/> The Details window opens indicating that the Association file has been modified.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-Associations17.PNG|720px|8.0-Associations17.PNG]]</div>
== Localization support for attribute values in tagged associations ==

The localization support has been provided for association entities assembled as a file, table or saved search in a single as well as bilingual template. The localization covers attribute data types such as string masterdata lookup,  choice/multi-choice, Date and DateTime Format, Percentage, Number, Boolean and Currency format, as well as attribute groups and extension attributes on ICI UI.

This support will be available with the version upgrade without any further configuration. Here are some points to keep in mind regarding the localization for attribute values of tagged associations:

*For agreements with associations tagged as table or saved search as table, the attribute values will be displayed in local languages automatically when the document is assembled.
*For existing agreements, the attribute values will be localized when the document assembly is carried out explicitly.
*For executed or terminated agreements, the localization is not supported for attribute values of tagged associations.

When  the localization is not defined, the attribute values for association entities will be displayed in a language depending on specific business criteria. To apply the localization in ICI, Administrators should maintain the translation values against respective resource keys using the Translation Editor tool. Refer to the Localization support across ICI for more details on the business scenarios.

 

== Approving an Associated Document ==

When the Associated Document is created, the approval rule triggers, and the document is sent to the approvers that are set by the approver rule. If you are an approver, you can approve or reject the associated document.

To approve an Associated Document:

1. '''Click '''the Tasks tile on the Home page. The User Tasks page opens.

2. '''Click''' the Association name''' '''link that you want to approve. The Associated Document Details page opens.

3. To Approve the document, '''click''' Approve. To reject the document, '''click''' Reject. A notification is sent to the Primary and Secondary Owner of the document every time an approver approves or rejects a document.

4. If you click:

*Approve: The Add Note window opens. '''Type''' your comments and then '''click''' Add. The associated document gets approved.
*Reject: The Add Note window opens. '''Type''' your comments, '''select''' the appropriate reason code, and then '''click''' Add. The Associated Document gets rejected and goes into the Draft state.
<div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">The Approval Rule is triggered when the Associated document is created and the document is sent to the approvers set by the approval rule. The Primary Owner can recall the Association that is in Waiting for Approval state to stop the approval workflow and add a note to specify the reason, by clicking the Recall button.</div>
You can enable, disable, reassign, or remove approvers using the respective buttons from the Team tab of the Association after it is created. This can be done for the Associations that are in Approved or Waiting for Approval states.

If you are an approver of the Associations for Agreements and Amendments, you can request more information for an Association that is in Waiting for Approval state using the Need More Info button. You can also remove yourself as an Approver using the Remove Mebutton for an Association that is Waiting for Approval.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-Associations18.PNG|720px|8.0-Associations18.PNG]]</div>
 

== Uploading and downloading large files with the File Path attribute ==

ICI now provides support for larger files. 

Users can now:

*Large file support is added in masterdata and association only.
*Upload files up to 4GB under the file selection attribute. 
*Upload files with all supported file extensions allowed in the file selection attribute.
*Download All/Download Package up to 6 GB.
*Only Azure and Windows store are supported.

ICI supports virus scanning of large files if the virus scan feature is enabled.
<div class="note-box">'''Note: '''This is not applicable for contract requests, agreements, or associations with large files in the DocuSign/Adobe Sign association selection pop-up, document assembly, bulk actions, legacy upload, integrations (Salesforce, Workday, etc.), and APIs.</div>
 

=== To upload a large file: ===

1. '''Click''' "Configure" > "Contract Types" > "Categories".

2. '''Select''' Type of Contract from the drop-down.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-Associations19.PNG|720px|8.0-Associations19.PNG]]</div>
3. '''Select''' the contract type where you want to enable this functionality.

4. On the Attributes tab of the Edit Contract Type page, '''select '''any File Selection data type attribute such as File Path in the Selected Attributes column.

5. '''Enter '''a Display Name for the attribute. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-Associations20.PNG|720px|8.0-Associations20.PNG]]</div>
6. '''Toggle''' the Enable Large File Upload to Yes. This flag provides support for large files in File Selection and File Path attributes.

'''Note:'''

*Depending on the data type, the Enable Large File Upload attribute will be enabled.
*Once this flag is enabled, it cannot be disabled.
*The attribute is always disabled for contract requests and agreements as they are not supported.

7. '''Click '''Save to save your changes and Publish.

8. '''Click''' Association Management > Create Association.

9. On the Meta Data tab, '''click''' Select File in the File Path field.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Large File 3.png|720px|Large File 3]]</div>
10. '''Select '''the file that you want to upload.

*If the file size does not exceed the configured limit (4GB), then the file will be uploaded and displayed on the page.
*If the file size exceeds the configured limit, a message will be displayed that the maximum allowed size had exceeded.
<div class="image-green-border">11. '''Select '''the file that you want to upload in the associated document (Annexure Document) field. </div>
'''Note:'''

*For file attributes, you have to explicitly upload the file by clicking the Upload File button, unlike the file path attribute. You can also view the progress of the upload. When the file is uploaded, the progress bar turns green.
*Uploading a file may take some time depending on the network bandwidth, connection speed, file size, etc.

 

=== To download a large file: ===

1. When the association is created, '''click '''the Versions tab on the association Details page.
<div class="image-green-border">2. '''Click '''the Download icon to download the large file that has been uploaded. </div>
3. '''Click''' Preview if you want to preview the file. The Preview not supported for document type message will be displayed.
<div class="image-green-border">'''Note:''' For file path attributes, the Preview can be generated. However, for large files, restrictions have been added to avoid performance impact. However, the files can be viewed on the Versions tab and the audit history.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

 

=== To download all (large) files: ===

1. '''Click '''the Download All button. The "Please Confirm" window opens. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-Associations22.PNG|400px|8.0-Associations22.PNG]]</div>
2. '''Click '''"Yes".

3. On the Download window, select the files that you want to download in a zip format.

*If the file size does not exceed the configured limit (6GB), then the files will be downloaded in a zip format.
*If the file size exceeds the configured limit, a message will be displayed that the total file size exceeds the download limit.
<div class="image-green-border">'''Note:''' Creating the zip file may take some time. A message will be displayed when the download starts.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="note-box">Note: The “Download All” button is an action dependent button, and the visibility will be filtered additionally by table below.</div>
[[File:8.1 Download All.PNG|720px|8.1 Download All.PNG]]

 

 

== Supporting rich documents preview using MS Office for Web ==

ICI is extending its rich preview experience to MS word (.doc and .docx) files which was earlier available for MS excel and PowerPoint files using Microsoft Office for Web. The rich preview is available for agreements, Amendments, Associated documents, Contract Request and Masterdata. 

Using MS Office for Web viewers can preview agreements and associated documents in split view and the preview will open in drawer view for Custom file path attribute, Masterdata CT, Contract request CT, Agreements details CT and list page “Preview Document”. However, the existing supported file formats such as images and PDFs will continue to use the current technical solution to generate file previews.
<div class="image-green-border">Also, a “Download” button has been introduced for file formats not supported for preview example .xml and .zip. Configurators can enable or disable the MS Office for Web based preview feature through the technical configuration.</div>
 

=== Online editing of associated documents ===

1. In ICI Web, navigate to the agreement for which you want to edit the associated documents online.

2. In the left navigation pane, click on the Associated Documents tab. The agreement associations are displayed.

3. Click on the association you want to edit. For example, Annexure 1. The Association's Details page opens.

4. Click “Open in Office for the Web”. The page reloads and the associated document is displayed. Refer above section for more details
<div class="image-green-border">5. Make the necessary changes. While the online editing session is in progress for the associated document, the workflow status is displayed as “Draft – In Editing”.</div>
*The maximum file size supported is: 
**DOCX: 100 MB
**XLSX: 5 MB
**PPT: 300 MB 
*Check-in time supported by Microsoft:
**DOCX: 30 seconds
**PPT: 60 seconds
**XLSX: 120 seconds

== Extending inline association support for contract request and introducing file drop functionality in inline association ==

ICI enables users to create association instances as part of agreement creation or update wizard. When creating or updating an agreement or amendment, users can create, view, or delete inline associations. 

This inline associations functionality has been extended to contract request create/update wizard as well. The users can create, view or delete associations while creating or updating the contract requests.

On a separate note, a file drop zone similar to the one in agreements, has been made available on the contract request details page for the configured associated document. Support has also been added for dynamic associated document rule evaluation for partially created and saved contract requests. 

This file drop functionality available on the associations grid of the agreement details page has been extended to inline associations grid in agreement as well as contract request creation wizard. The inline association functionality now supports dynamic associations for agreements, amendments and contract requests. 

1. '''Enable '''the Inline Association flag while associating the association contract type with the parent contract request contract type and publish it. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-Associations23.PNG|720px|8.0-Associations23.PNG]]</div>
2. '''Click '''“ Request” >"Create" on the "Requests" page. The Create Contract Request page opens. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-Associations24.PNG|720px|8.0-Associations24.PNG]]</div>
3. '''Select '''the contract request contract type for which Inline Associations are configured. 

4. '''Click '''Next. The Attributes page opens.

5. Update the attribute values.

6. '''Click '''Next. The contract request gets auto saved and the Inline Associations page is displayed.
<div class="image-green-border">The configured associations are displayed as the different tabs on the Inline Associations page.</div>
Users have the option to drag-and-drop the association files into the “Drop files here…” area provided. In this case, an association gets created with the same name as the file name.
<div class="note-box">'''Note''':<br/> If the “Allow Multiple Association” flag is set to “No” for an association, then the file drop will be hidden and the Add button will be disabled as soon as one association gets created.<br/> This option is available only for the Associated Documents which are created using the specific Associated Document Contract Type that has the “Show File Drop Zone” field set as Yes.</div>
7. '''Click '''Add. The Create Association popup is displayed. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-Associations25.PNG|720px|8.0-Associations25.PNG]]</div>
8. '''Enter '''the association details.

9. '''Click '''Create. The association gets created. Alternatively, click Save and Create New to save the association and to reset the create wizard to default values in the popup window, to create another association.

10. '''Click '''the three-dots icon in the "Actions" column to perform Edit, View Record, Disassociate, View Document and View Smart Links actions on the association.

11. Once the required associations are created, '''click '''Next to continue with the Contract Request creation wizard. The remaining workflow continues as before.
<div class="image-green-border">The created associations are displayed in the left navigation pane, under the Associations tab.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-Associations26.PNG|720px|8.0-Associations26.PNG]]</div>
The existing ICI functionalities for associate and inherit, inheritance, auto attachment, event rule evaluation and so on will get executed at partial save (manual/auto) and create/update user actions and will continue to work with inline associations as is. 

If an agreement / contract request that has not yet been saved, it will be auto saved when the user lands on the inline association page. This will enable the user to see list of evaluated associations on the inline association page. 

For an agreement/contract request that has been previously saved, the user will have to explicitly update (and save) the agreement/contract request to see the new changes on the inline page. 

The Dynamic Association Rule evaluation is dependent on technical configuration. 

 

== Document Comparison ==

The Document Comparison feature for agreements has a revamped user experience and navigation. 

Here are the details of the revamped Document Comparison: 

*The Document Comparison feature can be navigated from the Agreement Details page or any of the Agreement left pane tab pages, based on role-action mapping. 
*To do a Document Comparison: 

1. '''Click''' on the “Compare Documents” button. Alternatively, in case of page resized button availability, '''click''' on the three dots menu on the top right of the Agreement page toolbar. 

2.'''Click''' “Compare Documents” from the options displayed. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Docu Compare 1.png|220px|Docu Compare 1.png]]</div>
*The comparison tool opens by splitting the page, with a default 60:40 ratio, with the title “Compare Document Versions”. 
**40% page-share split is the default “Compare Document Versions” part. 
**The screen split margin can be dragged and adjusted as desired by the user, with the minimum mandatory limit being 30% of the page for the document comparison pane, and the maximum limit being 70%
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Docu Compare 2.png|620px|Docu Compare 2.png]]</div>
*Within the comparison view pane, The respective version descriptions of the “Original” version and the “Revised” version are displayed on top, with the “Original” version on the left and the “Revised” version on the right.
*The compare descriptions include: 
*Version number, with a dropdown arrow to choose any other version. 
*The “Created by” username.
*Created date. 
*Just under the descriptions, there are two buttons. 
*“Compare” – Clicking this runs the version comparison. 
*“Download Comparison” – Clicking this initiates the download of the comparison document. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Docu Compare 3.png|320px|Docu Compare 3.png]]</div> <div class="note-box">'''Note:''' When a user clicks on “Compare Documents” from the three dots menu, the default view displays the comparison between the two latest versions of the agreement, without having to choose from the version dropdowns. </div>
*The document comparison preview pane is displayed below the aforementioned buttons. This is where comparative edits, omits and any changes are displayed. 
*There is a header toolbar on top of the comparison preview pane. 

[[File:Docu Compare 4.png|520px|Docu Compare 4.png]]

*The header toolbar of the comparison preview pane includes, from left to right: 
*Page number of total page numbers. 
*Search tool displayed with a magnifying glass icon. 
*Zooming out option with a “-“. 
*Zooming in option with a “+”.
*Three dots menu, clicking which displays some action options. 
*Pin/Unpin option. 
*The comparison view can be closed by clicking the close 'X' icon, by clicking 'Compare Documents' button again, or clicking the split view button.

[[File:Docu Compare 5.png|320px|Docu Compare 5.png]]
<div class="note-box">'''Note:''' The look and feel of the document viewer and respective buttons and options may differ based on the browser.</div>
 

'''Related Topics''': [[Agreement_Management|Agreement Management]] | [[Agreements|Agreements]] | [[Contract_Type|Contract Type]] | [[Saved_Searches|Saved Searches]] | | [[Adding_Supporting_Documents_to_an_Agreement|Adding Associations]] | [[ICI_Obligation_Management|Obligation Management]] </div>

Release Notes

2022-06-09T10:42:14Z

IDT-1:

= ICI Release Notes - Release 8.1 =

== Release 8.1 New Features ==

These release notes provide an overview of the enhancements to ICI, the ICI experience for integrations, and so on.

•      Refer to the [[#_Technical_Requirements_8.1|'''Technical Requirements''']] for the release in this document.

•      Refer to the [https://ici-us-wiki01.icertis.com/ICIHelp8.1/index.php?title=ICI_Help '''Wiki'''] documentation (also found in your ICI help section) for details on all ICI features and functionalities.

The 8.1 Release introduces the following enhancements to the Icertis Contract Intelligence (ICI) platform:

== Icertis Contract Intelligence  ==

=== Agreement & Platform  ===

'''A new collaboration experience with Microsoft Teams'''

ICI now leverages the powerful capabilities of Microsoft Teams to help internal teams collaborate on contract creation workflow and expediting the contracting lifecycle. The Teams integrations will help customers to use a single communication system and discussions can be held in context of the agreement.

The feature includes:

*Contract owner can initiate a collaboration on MS teams from agreement details page and also invite agreement team members to participate in the discussion.
*The latest version of the agreement document is also made available on the teams channel while initiating the collaboration. Participants can review, redline the agreement document in MS teams and publish the edited document back to ICI as a new version.
*The documents associated with main agreement in ICI can also referenced in MS teams channel

Feature ID: 1188391

'''Negotiate and Update Agreements with the new Outlook Add-in'''

The new Outlook Add-in connects users’ emails with Icertis Contract Intelligence and provides improved collaboration capabilities and ensures information sent on emails is tracked for audit and governance on ICI. In addition, the new add-in provides a better interaction design, in line with the modern ACE user experience released in version 8.0.

The Add-in for Microsoft Outlook Desktop is supported on Windows and Mac OS. Once installed, an '''Icertis Experience for Outlook''' pane is accessible from Outlook. The pane provides access to ICI agreement data, along with success and error messaging for interactions. It can be pinned on the interface for easy access.

With the Outlook Add-in improvements, users can now do the following:

*Add attached documents in emails as associations or a new agreement version in ICI.
*Preview Agreement and Association documents from the Outlook Add-in.
*Drag-and-drop single or multiple emails as associations.
*Replace existing associated document with a new email or email attachment.
*Access agreements and associated documents from the Outlook plugin and email them attachments to reviewers or approvers any stakeholders.
*New incoming messages for email threads marked as associated documents are automatically added as new associated documents. 

Feature IDs: 1137119, 1137121

'''Quick & Easy Agreement Creation'''

Agreement Contract Types now come with a Quick Creation option. For all agreements using this option, users can fill all the necessary information on a single page and publish the contract or send it for approval immediately.

Feature ID: 1183356

'''More Quick Action Options'''

The Quick Actions widget “What would you like to do” has been enhanced to provide multiple actions/links with one quick action line item. For example, “Create MSA” quick action now provides multiple links catering to “Own” and “Third Party” paper selections, as displayed in the image below.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 1.png|520px|RN 8.1 1.png]]</div>
Feature ID: 1183310

'''External Emails Split to Ensure Compliance '''

Contracts sent for review or approval by email to other parties, legal consultants and users not within ICI are now split in two parts. A URL and passcode can be shared with the users and the review can be done completely online. No need of downloading and attaching documents and tracking versions offline. The process is quick, secure and easy to audit.<br/> Two emails are sent, One email is sent containing the agreement URL and the other with the passcode to access the URL. This method could be used for requesting reviews, reviews and approval.<br/> <br/> Users can also resend the notification to external users whose reviews are pending, with the help of the “Resend Passcode Notification” button.<br/> <br/> To enable this feature, the implementation team needs to configure it explicitly. <br/> <br/> Feature ID: 1216716 

'''Deviation management for text and tables outside content control'''

If changes are made to the plain text in agreements or tables in associations of an agreement document (text which is not a clause or attribute), a deviation can now be triggered to help Legal teams exercise greater content control. The changes are highlighted and the deviations will flow through an approval process.<br/> <br/> Feature ID: 1183384 

'''Support for Microsoft Powerpoint documents'''

ICI now supports Microsoft Powerpoint file formats (files with .ppt and .pptx extension) as third-party paper agreement file formats. In addition to PDF and DOCX file formats, users can now create and negotiate contracts using PPT and PPTX files.

Feature ID: 1183367

'''Online Editing Of Own Paper'''

In this release, ICI is enhancing its existing online editing feature  by supporting online editing of own paper documents. using Microsoft WOPI.We have improved the experience for editing agreements with Microsoft Online applications In this release.

The following improvements can be observed:

*Documents with editable content control can be edited and and values are is synced seamlessly.
*The track changes option will now track all the changes made by the users in reviewing mode, creating a redlined version of the document.
*The empty content control will be displayed as blank instead of “obj”.
*The content controls within tables can now be edited with associations tagged as tables and saved searches.Content controls within tables will now be editable. 

Feature ID: 1287270 

'''Support for Inheritance of Bulk Associations '''

In addition to attributes and associations, now bulk associations contract types (BACT) and their extension attributes can now be inherited from parent to child agreements. 

The agreements with BACT associations will get inherited asynchronously along with all extension attributes of all the associations. The bulk associations will also work as they do in parent agreements.

Feature ID: 1278205 

'''Enhancement to Download all Agreement & Associated Documents in one click'''  

With this release, we have expanded on the Download all capability which allowed users can to download the agreement and itsall associated documents in one click saving much time and effort. 

This functionality was earlier available when the signature type for the agreement was set to manual, it is now available for electronic and hybrid signature types as well.

Additionally, the “Download All” button will now be visible to users based on the role action mapping in superseded state as well. 

Feature ID: 980342 

'''Platform changes to enhance UX for Business Applications'''

To improve findability and relevance of information pertaining to a particular business application, some configuration changes are now available in the platform. These changes significantly improve the search and usability experience when working with Agreements, Associations or any Business Application.

The following configurations are now supported:

*Business Applications have dedicated index pages, where users can search for the information pertaining to the specific business application.
*Agreements and Associations index pages do not show information from Business Applications.
*On the Advanced Search page, users have a choice to search for information from Agreements or specific business applications.
*Left navigation of a business application entity page can be configured to show the relevant links.
*Results for global search are categorized by the business application name if they are not Agreements or Associations.
*When creating a Contract Type, seeded attributes only relevant to the Business Application Type and Category can be seededwill be selected.

Feature ID: 1183274 

=== Self-Service ===

'''Introduction of a Technical Admin user to access the System Configuration on Self Service Portal'''

With the risk of inaccuracies in technical configurations, given their critical importance, such configurations have been, till now, hosted outside the confines of ICI, where ICI admin users, who have azure subscriptions to an instance, authored the process.

Therefore, the capability of admin users within ICI were being limited and the scope of technical configurations had to be expanded.

Now, a solution has been devised with this feature, as enunciated in the following:

*Technical Administrators can now be configured/added for performing required technical configurations in the System Configuration Portal, using the new “Technical Roles” field while adding, provisioning or editing a user.

'''Note:''' The user has to be Internal in order to be authorized with “Technical Roles”, and selecting an external user will automatically discount the Technical Roles feature.

*The portal has been upgraded for Technical Admin users, with enhancements to the Landing page, header, menu options, along with a static welcome message.
*Appropriate messaging and communication will be provided for any negative scenarios, wherein the Technical Admin User faces any challenge accessing or configuring.
*When a new ICI admin user logs in, they should be able to setup other internal users as technical admin users of the System Configuration portal. 

'''Note:''' Only the ICI Admin user should be able to setup other internal provisioned users as the Technical Admin user.

*The ICI Admin can either create a new Security group, as required, or use an existing security group. 
*The authorization of technical admin users will depend on Security Groups Privilege to the “Self Service” privilege entity, and on roles assigned to specific users.
*The “Self Service” privilege can be configured in the backend and it will be visible to users under the Security Group Privilege tab.
*The “Manage” access option can be selected to grant access to the System Configuration Portal for technical admin users.

'''Note:''' The user who gets Technical Admin privileges can be any internal provisioned user on that instance (even a non admin user).

Feature ID: 1210894

'''Building the Config Key Update utility as part of the System Configuration on Self Service Portal'''

Today, in ICI – There are close to 800 configuration keys in the system. These keys are managed via the ICM Tools which is hosted outside of ICI. With this initiative, we have started the migration these Keys incrementally to be part of the System Configuration – Self Service Portal. 

The scope for this release is to migrate 10 keys into the utility. The access to this utility is driven by the Technical Admin role as explained in the previous section. 

Once the user successfully enters the ‘System Configuration – Self Service’ portal with the correct security groups and technical admin role, they will be able to see the ‘Config Key Updates’ entry point at the top of the screen
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 2.png|720px|RN 8.1 2.png]]</div>
On clicking the Config Key Updates menu, the user will be able to see the utility where the defined 10 keys will be loaded on the screen, along with their existing values.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 3.png|720px|RN 8.1 3.png]]</div>
 

The user will be able to view each key loaded into a card. The card will contain the name of the key along with it’s value. 

The user will be able to see a dedication section to the right of the page for viewing help information

The user will be able to click on the ‘3-dot’ option on each card to edit the value of the key
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 4.png|720px|RN 8.1 4.png]]</div>
 

On clicking the Edit option, the key information will be loaded in the right drawer panel. Here the user can edit the key value and Save using the button at the bottom of the drawer

 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 5.png|720px|RN 8.1 5.png]]</div>
 

The user can edit one or more keys using the ‘3-dot’ option on each card. Once the user has finished editing all the keys, they need to click on the ‘PUSH CHANGES TO ICI’ button at the top of the grid. This will internally update the keys with the edited values in ICI for the changes to take effect

 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 6.png|720px|RN 8.1 6.png]]</div>
Feature ID: 1180864

=== Administration & Configuration  ===

'''Quick Configuration with ICI Import Solution'''

The ICI Import Solution is an automated solution for configuring ICI entities. It simplifies the initial configuration process and reduces the time and complexities involved in the process.

Using the Import Solution tool, ICI users can now:

*Import configurations from a source ICI instance to a target ICI Instance with no pre-existing configuration data.
*Import configurations between different versions of ICI.

'''Note:''' Support will be provided for up to 2 releases preceding the target ICI version.

*Register and publish preconfigured import solutions.
*Import the following information:
*Contract Types
*Templates
*Clauses
*Rules
*Notifications
*Masterdata Instances
*Seeded Masterdata entity instances
*Users & User Groups
*Security Groups

Feature ID: 1262996 

'''Contract Types can now be locked for editing '''

Contract types can now be edited by only one user at a time. This functionality helps prevent data inconsistencies or concurrency errors.

Product enhancements include:

*A Lock/Unlock button on the contract type page. 
*Auto system lock when users start edit a contract type without locking it. 
*Messaging providing information on who is editing the contract type. 
*System locks get released when contract types are saved.

Feature ID: 1212463 

'''Enhancements to Legacy Upload Tool'''

The following features will be added to the Legacy Upload utility with this release, improving speed and accuracy and reducing file size.

*Records bypass workflow states directly to the desired state. 
*Users can schedule upload in batches within guardrails to improve system resource allocation. 
*Specific range of records from the UI can now be uploaded.
*Infra and Elastic Search health check can be run before executing the scheduled batches.
*On demand batch scheduling based on the user provided schedule. 
*Supporting legacy entity created with large files 100MB+.

Feature ID: 1069763

'''Unique clause and template code for every environment'''

Users can now customize their clause and template codes for different instances. If unique codes are used, it reduces errors when migrating data from one instance to another. It also simplifies searching of clauses and templates.

Feature ID: 938126

'''Template and Clause creation options in Microsoft Word'''

The Create Template and Create Clause options in the Icertis Experience for Word are only displayed to users with access to these features. Earlier an error message was displayed to users without access and resulted in an unsatisfactory experience.

Feature ID: 1187041

'''Show or Hide confirmation messages in Microsoft Word '''

Administrators can now choose to show or hide certain confirmation messages, as per the organization's preference, on the Icertis Experience for Word.

Feature ID: 1187044

=== Technology Updates ===

'''ServiceBus upgraded to Azure.Messaging.ServiceBus'''

“Azure.Messaging.ServiceBus” is now replacing “Microsoft.ServiceBus”.  <br/> <br/> This is a Microsoft recommended upgrade and provides the following improvements:

*Up-to-date, streamlined Azure.
*More accurate messaging without any anomaly or junk data in the message characters.

<br/> Feature ID: 940871

'''Authentication Library and Graph API update'''

Microsoft has announced* deprecation of the Azure Active Directory (Azure AD) Authentication Library (ADAL) and Azure AD Graph API libraries and recommends using Microsoft Authentication Library (MSAL) and Microsoft Graph API.

We have updated Microsoft Graph, Identity and Key Vault packages to include stability and security fixes from Microsoft. The migration from ADAL and Azure AD Graph API to MSAL and Microsoft Graph API will ensure continuing support for the following areas:

*User Provisioning 
*Bulk Action 
*Integration - SFDC, GIF (Generic Integration Framework), MSCRM  
*Reporting 
*Key Vault 

Refer to the following link for Microsoft’s circular: [https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/t5/azure-active-directory-identity/update-your-applications-to-use-microsoft-authentication-library/ba-p/1257363 Update your applications to use Microsoft Authentication Library and Microsoft Graph API - Microsoft Tech Community].

Feature ID: 1276938

=== API Enhancements ===

In this release we focused on providing API 2.0 versions of most of our APIs with a goal to improve the performance and overall usability.

Following APIs are upgraded to API 2.0 versions in this release:

[[File:RN 8.1 7.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 7.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 8.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 8.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 9.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 9.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 10.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 10.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 11.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 11.PNG]]<br/> [[File:RN 8.1 12.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 12.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 13.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 13.PNG]]<br/> <br/> [[File:RN 8.1 14.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 14.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 15.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 15.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 16.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 16.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 17.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 17.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 18.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 18.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 19.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 19.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 20.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 20.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 21.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 21.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 22.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 22.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 23.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 23.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 24.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 24.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 25.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 25.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 26.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 26.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 27.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 27.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 28.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 28.PNG]]

'''API Deprecations'''

Any integrations utilizing the deprecated APIs must adopt alternate APIs. Previously, API endpoints have been periodically deprecated and alternate APIs have been provisioned.

However, no existing API endpoints have been deprecated in the 8.1 Release. To check previously deprecated endpoints, refer to 7.16 Release Notes. More details on the alternate APIs are available in the Swagger documentation.

=== Mobile App Update  ===

'''Improved Security on Mobile Devices with SafetyNet Attestation API'''

With this release, ICI is implementing SafetyNet Attestation API for Android mobile application to restrict users from accessing the application through rooted/vulnerable device, to avoid breaching of the IT and cyber security policy.

'''Note: '''The SafetyNet Attestation API is supported Android version 8.0 onwards.

Feature ID: 1095223

== AI Applications  ==

Usually, the implementation team spends a lot of time analyzing and training the AI model for the discovery of the new attributes. With this release, ICI is extending the number of pre-trained attributes so that the AI apps implementation project can be expedited. ICI previously had added 23 out-of-the-box attributes and introducing 15 additional attributes in this release, making it a total of 38 new attributes as a part pre-trained model. Customers can now start using attributes from pre-trained model with no or very little retraining.

The additional attributes are:

*Acceptance Completion Period
*Breach Cure Period
*Confidentiality Survival Period
*Force Majeure Period
*Interest Percentage on Payment Delay
*Liquidated Damages Cap
*Policy changes notice period
*Records Retention Period
*Renewal notice period
*Signatory Name
*Signatory Title
*Signature Date
*Termination for cause notice period
*Termination for convenience notice period
*Warranty Claim Period

Feature ID: 1187824

=== Enhancing the scope of DiscoverAI app& Negotiate AI differentiation ===

Discover AI helps users to identify attributes and clauses in browser and save them in the system.

With this release, scope of DiscoverAI has been enhanced to include the discovery of attributes and clauses within Microsoft word also using Icertis Experience for Word plugin. 

*The following actions/functionalities will be available under the Discover AI license in Icertis experience for Word: 
*Discovery of attributes and clauses. 
*Confirm, Confirm with Deviation, Ignore, Compare and Replace the clauses based on discovered clauses data. 
*Select the Matched Clause from the library. 

Feature ID: 1284012

== Reports Enhancements ==

=== Data for agreements awaiting signature in reports ===

Out-of-the-box ICI reports will now display details for the business status “Waiting for Signature”, in addition to existing statuses. This update to the reporting logic resolves an existing gap in the reports data.

This enhancement applies to the following reports:

[[File:RN 8.1 29.PNG|520px|RN 8.1 29.PNG]]

Feature ID: 1071182

=== Custom reporting views using JSON  ===

Developers can now create new custom reports views using Stored Procedures (SP) and JSON files. This feature gives flexibility to organizations to easily develop new reports relevant to their business requirements.

An Import SP is now available that takes JSON files as input. The JSON file used for input is where developers can define the new view. New reporting views are automatically created on running the Import SP.

An Export SP is also provided, which can be used to download a JSON file which contains the structure of an existing view in the database, to use as a template to create a new views.

Feature ID: 1208472

=== Dataset and seeded dashboard for Proposal Management application ===

A dedicated Power BI Dataset is now available for the Proposal Management application for out-of-the-box and custom reporting.  

PM App Power BI report will have clickable links to ICI entity details page for Proposal Management Entities such as, Sell Side RFx, RFx Qualification, and Bid Proposal.

Feature ID: 1232650

=== Attribute Information Report Enhancements ===

The following filters and columns are added to the Attribute Information report giving more options to analyse the Attributes used in the system.

*Filters: Contract Type, and Group by Property Columns: Is Mandatory and Tracking Attribute

Feature ID: 1158976

=== Edit SSRS Reports without customization ===

Icertis and partner developers can now edit the SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS) reports eliminating the need to create additional customized reports even for small changes. Users can now make the following edits to SSRS reports:

*Add or remove columns in an existing report.
*Modify column’s position, name, or default values.
*Modify sorting order of the results.
*Apply query level filters.
*Apply security group access as standard reports.
*Create copy of existing report and modify it.
*Use a new framework, which has a JSON-based interface.
*Create new or modify custom reports.

Feature ID: 744814

=== Report-based edit access for Power BI reports ===

Manage access for Power BI reports can now be provided at a report level to ensure that edit access is only given to the necessary users within the organization.<br/> This feature works does not impact “Advanced Analytics” access.<br/> <br/> Feature ID: 1070905

=== Maintainance and storage optimization with a Common Data Model for Clause-based reports ===

PlatformClause - a common data model for clause related information can now be used to create clause-based reports such as Clause Profiling Report, Clause Pending Approval Report and more. This helps optimize storage capacity and reduces the development and maintenance effort siginificantly. <br/> <br/> Feature ID: 1083685

=== SSRS Reports now available with Power BI ===

Power BI reports are faster, more scalable, richer in features, customization-friendly, sport a modern UI and overall a better experience. To leverage its advantages, the following SSRS reports are now made available in Power BI:

*Clause Summary Report
*Tagged Attribute Report
*Agreement Clause Content Report – A widget that displays the clauses with the most deviations is also added in this release. 

Feature IDs: 1214787, 1214720, 1223598<br/>  

== Salesforce Integration  ==

===  Activity Object and Trigger Simplification in Salesforce Adapter ===

The following enhancements are made to the SFDC Manage package Adapter:

*Triggers for Accounts and Opportunity objects have been removed from the Managed package to avoid unnecessary update-related issues. Users can get more flexibility and control over them when they use the auto contract creation feature. Note: This is applicable to both fresh installs as well as updates on existing packages.
*Previously, 6 custom fields were needed on the Salesforce activity object to sync ICI tasks with Salesforce, and now, the dependency on these fields have been reduced with only 2 custom fields required for the sync.
*For customers who didn’t need the ICI task sync feature and were unable to remove the custom fields with the limit of 100 fields on the Activity object, now, these fields have been removed from our managed package to provide more flexibility.

'''Note:''' Guideline documentation and support by ICI implementation/upgrade team will be duly provided, for creation of desired fields during new installs as well as release upgrades, or deletion of fields during upgrade scenarios.

Feature ID: 1066353

=== User Experience for Salesforce Revamped ===

Using ICI within Salesforce is now a more seamless experience as we have made significant improvements to preserve the native Salesforce UI interactions, which users are familiar with, without compromising the ICI functionality.

These are the enhancements that have been introduced:

* Native Salesforce components are now used along with the ICI iframe.
*Sub-tabs moved from ICI to Salesforce native tabs, for example: Agreements, Requests and Agreement Reports.
*Agreement and Request Details pages are now displayed in native Salesforce UI.
*On the Details page certain actions (example - Reset Expiry) and sub-tabs (example – Associations) are now native Salesforce components.

'''Note:''' The implementation team will provide a list of native and i-frame components.

Feature ID: 1186642

== eSign Integration  ==

=== Integration Support for DocuSign using JWT authentication ===

The ICI and DocuSign integration was previously based on authenticating the APIs with “IntegratorKey” and “API Password”.

The product has now been upgraded to support an enhanced authentication using JSON Web Token (JWT), along with the existing basic authentication support. This enhancement has also enabled JWT support for “Multisign” as well as “Single Esign” configurations.

Feature ID: 1000798

=== DocuSign API upgraded from 2.0 to 2.1 ===

DocuSign released an update announcement that OAuth 2.0 would be required to support DocuSign API applications. In keeping with this announcement we have upgraded DocuSign REST APIs from 2.0 to 2.1. With this upgrade, a new JSON parser has been introduced to support DocuSign Connect, a notification mechanism to receive updates when any event is triggered in the eSignature workflow.

Feature ID: 1060689

=== Adapting webhook feature of Adobe Sign ===

Adobe Sign adapter couldn’t communicate precise callback information to ICI Platform, thus causing intermittent errors in ICM workflow after the Agreements were electronically signed. Adobe Sign responded with the same information for every signature, hence it wasn’t possible to distinguish between callbacks from different signature. However, with the introduction of Adobe webhook, this problem can be resolved.

Adobe webhooks can be created on the workflow for each agreement, requesting the type of information in the callback, which further benefits as follows:

*Identifying the signatory requesting a callback
*Identifying for which event or action the callback is requested
*Concisely updating the status in ICM

'''Note:'''  Upgrade Adobe Sign API from 5.0 to 6.0 to use the webhook feature.

Also, Adobe rebranded Echo sign to Adobe Sign, hence non overridden localization strings for validation messages have been modified accordingly.

Feature ID: 1091947

=== Electronic Signature support using ICI BioPharma setting for 21 CFR Part 11 & Annex 11 compliant groups ===

ICI Platform now supports the Life Science industry documents that need to comply with 21 CFR Part 11 (for US FDA) or Annex 11 (for EU) regulatory compliance.

This feature allows integration with DocuSign Part 11 module and Adobe Sign Bio-Pharma setting to get electronically signed approvals for such agreements.

Feature ID: 1220095

=== Changes in IP whitelisting process for eSign adapters ===

ICI Platform supports integration with third party eSign adapters, which communicate using callback information. To receive the callback data from the eSign servers, certain IPs to intended methods are whitelisted. This action is done through the web.config file. However, any change in the IPs requires modifying the web.config file, which resets the IIS, resulting in performance issues.

To address this issue, “Core.IPSecurity” key has been introduced, which stores information related to the IPs as a JSON, and thus eliminates the need to modify the web.config file.

'''Note''': Blocking or allowing IP addresses based on DNS is not supported as a part of this feature.

Feature ID: 1193062

=== Update eSign document with correct status ===

In certain scenarios, the electronic signature status in ICI and eSign provider are inconsistent. An enhancement has been added wherein the respective statuses are verified and the agreement status is updated or corrected accordingly.

Feature ID: 1193061

== Sourcing  ==

The 8.1 Release introduces enhancements to the Icertis Contract Intelligence (ICI) Sourcing Application (SRC8.1.0.404).

=== Support for new RFx type-RFP ===

Icertis Sourcing application now supports Requests for Proposals (RFPs). Organizations can leverage the advantages of a secure and seamless application to organize and maintain their procurement processes digitally using the RFP feature.

RfPs are integrated requests containing information on both questions and bids. Buyers can now design, create, and publish RFPs in the Sourcing application and invite suppliers to respond to them. Once Buyers receive the responses, they can evaluate them and make their procurement decisions.

Key RFP features:

*Integrated mechanism to get responses to questions and bids from suppliers.
*Reusable templates for Questions, Questionnaires, and Bidding templates.
*Questionnaires and questions can be arranged and reordered as required. 
*Attachments, and responses to questions can be downloaded in a package.
*A consolidated excel spreadsheet is available to analyse bids and responses.
*Suppliers can provide responses to questions using Excel as well as Sourcing UI.

Feature ID: 404602

=== Improved Sourcing workflow with Sourcing Request ===

Users within an organization can now create Sourcing Requests for procuring items or services. These requests can be designed to go through an approval flow before they are turned over to procurement teams. The approval cycle can be easily tracked and audited for compliance.

Sourcing Request features:

*Configure a Sourcing Request based on the necessary privileges.
*Request forms can be designed to capture necessary details and attachments.
*Requests can be sent to designated approvers for approval.
*An RFx can be created after the request is approved.
*Requests can be modified until they are approved or a RFX is created based on it.
*Cancel or recall the Sourcing Request.
*Put the Sourcing Request on Hold till approved state provided RFx is not created using this Sourcing Request.

Feature ID: 611297

=== Ordering and additional data types for Questions in Questionnaire ===

We have made the following enhancements to Icertis Sourcing to improve the user experience when working with Questions and Questionnaires:

The order of Questions and questionnaires in RFx can be set and modified as per the preference of users.

The following data types are now supported for questions in RFx:

*Boolean
*String
*Choice
*Multi Choice
*Currency
*DateTime
*Number
*Percentage
*Text Area
*Rich Text Area  
*Email
*File Selection

'''Note''':

*On exporting rich text data type information to Excel or HTML, some formatting features may be lost.
*Uploading a file attachment as response for file type question response using Excel is not supported. Supplier must log on to ICI to upload files.

Feature ID: 896873

== Obligation Management  ==

The 8.1 Release introduces enhancements to the Icertis Contract Intelligence (ICI) Obligation Management Application (OM8.1.0.404).

=== An interface to quickly add obligations discovered by AI ===

Obligations that are identified in contracts using the Discover AI feature can now be easily reviewed on the user interface. User can review the obligations and decide to add one or more to the Obligation Management application for tracking approvals and fulfillment.

The interface to review and create obligations in bulk saves users much time and manual effort.

The following image shows an example of creating Obligations in bulk:
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 30.png|720px|RN 8.1 30.png]]</div>
Notifications for successfully processed or failed obligations can also be configured.

Feature ID: 1090383

=== Auto-approval of Obligations to improve efficiency ===

Many obligations are extracted from executed contracts and they don’t usually need to go through an approval process in the Obligation Management application. To reduce time and effort spent approving a large number of obligations and not block the obligation fulfillment lifecycle on account of pending approvals, an automatic approval process for obligations can now be configured.

Once the auto-approval process is defined based on obligation taxonomy, this is how the feature works:

*If approval is turned off, and no approvers are added to obligations, the obligations are automatically approved.
*If approvers are added to obligations, manually or automatically through a rule, then even if approvals are turned off, the obligations will need to be approved.

Feature ID: 519344

=== Organize and manage obligations by creating groups  ===

An obligations could have one or more sub obligations or tasks, which would need to be completed by different individuals in an organization. Also, some obligations may be related to each other and grouping them could help organize and track the fulfillment. To facilitate such scenarios, obligation groups can now be created in the Obligation Management application.

Users can now categorize different obligations under logical groups and create parent-child relationships between obligations.

Child obligations automatically inherit any changes made to the parent Obligation. For example, if the status of parent Obligation is changed to Approved, all the related child Obligations also get approved.

Feature ID: 649768

=== Duplicate obligations no longer inherited  ===

When an Agreement (parent), with an associated Obligation, is inherited by another Agreement (peer), a duplicate Obligation is created. An enhancement in this release eliminates this limitation.

Feature ID: 1040723

=== UI Improvements for Obligation Management ===

The following improvements are made in the product to improve the search and usability experience when using Obligation Management:

*Dedicated index pages for Obligations and Fulfillments,
*Relevant page titles, breadcrumbs and history page information.

Feature ID: 1236413

== Risk Management ==

The 8.1 Release introduces enhancements to the Icertis Contract Intelligence (ICI) Sourcing Application (RM8.1.0.404).

=== UI Improvements for Risk Management  ===

The following Improvements are made in the product to improve the search and usability experience when using Risk Management: 

*Dedicated index pages for Risk Management and Risk Assessment. 
*Relevant page titles, breadcrumbs and history page information. 
*Saved searches display Risk Assessment as category.  
*The “Create” action button has now been added on the “Risk Assessment” index page.   
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 31.png|720px|RN 8.1 31.png]]</div>
Other enhancements include:

*The “Delete” action has now been moved under the three dots icon on the Risk Assessment “Details” page. On deleting the risk assessment, users will be redirected to the Risk Assessment “Index” page.

Feature ID: 1067718

== Proposal Management  ==

ICI Proposal Management application is certified to work with the 8.1 release (PM8.1.0.404). 

=== Track and analyse performance with a Power BI Dashboard ===

A seeded dashboard that helps supplier organizations track their proposals by status, time, and outcome is now available within the Proposal Management application.The following features and reports are now available with the Proposal Management application:

*A new Power BI data model with Power BI dataset specific to Proposal Management.
*Proposal Management KPIs report
*Capture Management report

'''Note''': Users with access to Sell Side RFx or Bid Proposal can view the Dashboard.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 31.png|720px|RN 8.1 31.png]]</div>
 

=== Enhancements to Seeded Contract Types ===

With this release, the PM App is being enhanced with newly seeded attributes to its seeded contract types.

In this enhancement:

*New attributes have been seeded with the Bid Proposal entity:
*Total Bid Value For Proposal
*Total Value Won Or Lost
*Customer Address
*Customer Geography

These new attributes contribute in the essential computations of the Win Ratio and the Value Capture Ratio.

Feature ID: 1186830

=== Revamped User Experience across the PM App ===

The visual look and feel of the Proposal Management App has been considerably enhanced with the ICI-wide implementation of the new UI (User Interface) and UX (User Experience).

The following summarizes the revamped user experience across the App:

*The new “Proposals” tile menu now features only the viewing tile options for the seeded PM App entities, in addition to a new “Dashboard” tile menu option.
*The create navigation flow has been moved from the “Proposals” tile and a dedicated “Create” button has now been added to each seeded entity index page.
*The seeded entities now have their dedicated index pages, as opposed to the saved search driven listing in previous releases.
*The Details pages of all the seeded entities (Sell Side RFx, Bid Proposal etc.) now have dedicated page titles starting with the entity name, instead of the contract type category. For example, the previous “Agreement / Sell Side RFx 123” has been replaced by “Sell Side RFx / Sell Side RFx 123”.
*The newly added entity name (such as “Sell Side RFx”) on the Details page header is now a clickable link, clicking which opens the entity index page.
*In the audit history of any entity, both Grid View and List View, the header now features the entity category name instead of the contract type, just like the change in entity Details page.
*The display of action buttons on entity Details pages can now be configured to customize their sequence of display, and based on the available window space the remaining action buttons will be available under the three dots icon on the entity “Details” page.

Feature ID: 1235186

== Supplier Relationship Management Application  ==

ICI Proposal Management application is certified to work with the 8.1 release (SRM8.1.0.404).

=== Supplier Evaluation ===

The Supplier Evaluation module introduced in the Supplier Relationship Management suite helps organizations manage supplier performance and evaluate and mitigate risks associated with working with suppliers.

'''How Supplier Evaluation fits within Supplier Relationship Management'''
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 33.png|520px|RN 8.1 33.png]]</div>
The Supplier Evaluation module introduced in the Supplier Relationship Management suite helps organizations manage supplier performance and evaluate and mitigate risks associated with working with suppliers.

'''How Supplier Evaluation fits within Supplier Relationship Management'''

 

Supplier Evaluation module is part of the Supplier Relationship Management application, which is built on Icertis Contract Intelligence.

Once suppliers are onboarded, users can evaluate suppliers on the products or services they offer. The KPI criteria, schedule, and the evaluators can be set up within the module and on completing the assessment the supplier can be classified as high performing, low performing or standard supplier.

A routine supplier evaluation can help organizations set expectations from their preferred suppliers and manage low performing suppliers.  

'''Supplier Evaluation Features'''

Setting up Supplier Evaluation

*'''KPIs''' – Users can create one or more KPIs (evaluation criteria) and evaluate suppliers based on the set parameters. For example, you can create KPIs for auditing, performance reviews, training requirements, and more.
*'''Supplier Data''' – The supplier evaluation creation process is simplified as much of the supplier information is auto-populated based on the supplier’s record.
*'''Evaluation Schedule''' – Users can set up a period for which the supplier will be evaluated.
*'''Product/Service for Evaluation''' – The evaluation can be performed in context of the product or service provided or the agreements.
*'''Reviewing suppliers based on the Criteria''' – The evaluation criteria can be put through an internal review process, and inputs can be sought to finalize the evaluation criteria.
*'''Supplier Outreach''' – Suppliers can provide information and supporting documents needed to perform the evaluation by responding to review requests by buyers.
*'''Responses & Scoring''' – Based on the responses provided by business team or evaluators on the supplier evaluation, scores are automatically computed.
*'''Evaluation Approvals & Control''' – Once the evaluation process is over, then buyer team defines supplier performance classification and suggests the next course of action (in case of low performing supplier). This can also be sent for management approval. The approver team can either approve or reject and send it for rework..
*'''Notifications''' – Notifications can also be configured for periodic evaluation. System notifications are sent to buyers when they are requested to evaluate a supplier.

Feature ID: 463049

=== Managing Supplier Hierarchy ===

'''Manage Related Supplier Organizations'''

The Supplier Relationship Management application now provides a mechanism to connect supplier organizations with their Parent, Holding or Subsidiary organizations. This is to ensure that you have a complete overview of the business you do with one supplier and its related entities. According to business needs, you may want to work with a local supplier or the parent global organization.

You can designate a supplier organization as one of the following types:

*'''Supplier''': Supplier organizations that may or may not have related Parent or Holding companies.
*'''Parent company''': Parent company of one or more Supplier organizations, controls operations of the Supplier Organization
*'''Holding company''': Holding company of one or more subsidiary Supplier organizations, does not have a direct say over the operations of subsidiaries.

Changes made to the supplier hierarchy for supplier registration, qualification or profile are synchronized with the vendor database and supplier master.

'''Unique Supplier Record Management'''

In Icertis Supplier Relationship management, the uniqueness of a supplier record is validated based on a combination of attributes . In this release, one or more of the unique identifiers attributes can be made editable. This is to account for entities that may change the Legal Entity Name in the course of doing business, considering legal entity name is one of the unique identifier attributes.

If the attributes are changed for an organization, the system validates and checks for duplicate records before allowing users to make the change.

'''Validating the Duplicate Registrations'''

Buyers may receive more than one registration from the same supplier submitted through the web page.

This release introduces the capability to match the supplier registration records based on the unique identifier attributes. This helps identifying the duplicate registrations. Buyers can perform limited actions on the duplicate registrations and the supplier qualification is not generated.

'''Note''': Customers upgrading to 8.1 from previous versions of ICI Supplier Relationship Management is supported.

Feature ID: 1271423

== Introducing ICI Matter Management App  ==

The Icertis Contract Intelligence (ICI) platform now introduces a Matter Management Application to streamline and optimize the lifecycle of legal operations. The ICI Matter Management Application helps you to establish e2e enterprise-wide matter management process.

The ICI Matter Management application helps to support complex document centric workloads (template-based authoring, online editing, e-signatures).

With this release, you will get the pre-configured support for these entities to get started: Litigation Management, Legal Correspondence, Arbitration, Corporate Administration. ICI has become single unique platform to manage Contracting and non-contracting matters.

*'''Who''' – For corporate legal functions and “Legal Ops”
*'''What''' – Secured and standard processes for creating and processing matter requests.
*Flexible, searchable document Management, easy working with external law firms
*'''Why''' – Improves productivity and efficiency of legal operations
*CLM data can be used in on-going matters.
*'''How '''– Leverages the ICI platform. With the use of a set of objects & workflows you can manage the entire matter lifecycle

 

=== Capabilities   ===

'''Streamlined Intake'''

'''[[File:RN 8.1 34.PNG|left|RN 8.1 34.PNG]]'''

*Standardized intake forms for business teams to raise matter requests
*Collaborative request management of requests from general / legal Counsel
*Rule based assignment of request to members of legal team

 

 

'''Plan and Complete Matters'''

'''[[File:RN 8.1 35.PNG|left|RN 8.1 35.PNG]]'''

* Efficiently plan for matters with the use of matter calendar, MS Outlook.
* Initiate matter transactions from matter manager
*Based on matter type, creation & use of appropriate templates, associations to form matter structure.
*Collaborate with external law firms
*Create custom matter types  

'''CLM Handshake'''

[[File:RN 8.1 36.PNG|left|RN 8.1 36.PNG]]

*When working on matter, you can Inherit attributes from related contracts
* After completing matter, you can enforce contracting outcomes such as ‘ Settlement Contracts’, ‘Amending contracts’

 

 

 

'''Managing Outcomes'''

'''[[File:RN 8.1 37.PNG|left|RN 8.1 37.PNG]]'''

*Amend the contracts based on matter outcome
*Track all legal correspondence
*Monitor and enforce outcomes

 

 

'''Legal Dashboards'''

'''[[File:RN 8.1 38.PNG|left|RN 8.1 38.PNG]]'''

*You get the dashboards to track progress & track status of Legal matter requests, legal matter
*Track Legal KPI (Key Performance Indicators) such as matter turnaround time, claims & liabilities.
*Use reports to improve efficiency, response time and can take better informed decisions
*Matter Calendar to get centralized view of key tasks across all matters

 

=== Lifecycle ===

The diagram below talks about the lifecycle of a typical matter record. The major 3 aspects include standardized intakes, plan, and complete the matters and managing the outcomes.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 39.png|RTENOTITLE]]</div>
 

=== Key Application Features  ===

'''Standardized intake:'''

*Raise requests on behalf of other users
*Define Matter Type that can be country specific and Industry specific
*Request for a completion date
*Easy drag & drop support to add additional matter documents along with requests 
*Customized workflow for legal matter requests
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 40.png|720px|RN 8.1 40.png]]</div>
 

'''Plan & Complete Matters'''

*Assign the legal matter to legal Ops
*View legal request details
*Assign the matter to the team as Matter Manager, Matter team, Matter Approver
*Outsource the matters to external law firms
*Perform risk assessment and assign the high risk matters to external law firms   
*Structure the work on matter by tracking key working products for “Inputs”, “Working Docs”, “Outcome bucket”
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 41.png|720px|RN 8.1 41.png]]</div>
'''Outcome Management'''

When you work on any matter, you can set the outcome of that matter to be CLM type of document. Based on the type of Matter, certain outcomes are seeded. 

You can monitor, track the matter outcomes, before the Legal Matter goes in Completed Status.

*You can create and amend the contracts to enforce matter outcomes
*Track and manage financial obligations to enforce matter outcomes
*Refer to Audit History for all matter documents
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 42.png|720px|RN 8.1 42.png]]</div>
The key benefits of using the ICI Matter Management app are:

*Standardized matter intake and control information collection across the enterprise
*Can collaborate with external law firms.
*Custom matters can be quickly created using standard knowledge snippets and business rules.
*Triage requests and get accurate information from business
*Amendment of contracts based on matter outcome
*Integration with legal research, document management and ERP (Enterprise Resource Planning) System. 

 

== Technical Requirements  ==

The Icertis Contract Intelligence (ICI) application can be accessed from any device with an Internet connection and a supported browser. All features may not be available in all environments.

The software and hardware requirements for the client system as well as the mobile application are listed in the table below:

[[File:RN 8.1 43.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 43.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 44.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 44.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 45.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 45.PNG]]

'''Important Changes in IE11 Support:'''

From March 2021, Microsoft has stopped its technical support to Internet Explorer (IE) and has advised its customers to move to Microsoft Edge.

ICI will no longer support IE11. ICI will not be certified over IE11.

If customers use IE 11 then the below message will be displayed:

“You are using a browser that is not recommended to be used since it no longer supported by its OEM. The ICI support for this browser is limited for 7.16 version and will be discontinued from version 7.17 onwards. You should switch to Microsoft Edge as recommended by the OEM or any other supported browser prescribed by your organizational policy. You may contact your administrator for further information.”

[[File:RN 8.1 46.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 46.PNG]] 

[[File:RN 8.1 47.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 47.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 48.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 48.PNG]]<br/> [[File:RN 8.1 49.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 49.PNG]]<br/> [[File:RN 8.1 50.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 50.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 51.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 51.PNG]]

== Accessibility Conformance  ==

We ran accessibility conformance tests on the Icertis Contract Intelligence platform and Business Apps for Web Content Accessibility Guidelines 2.1 for Level A and Level AA standards. We did not evaluate for Level AAA standards.

While most of the product functionality has at least one method that meets the criterion without any known defects, some functionality of the product may not meet the conformance criteria. The full report is published in the following documents and can be made available on request:

*ICI Platform Accessibility Conformance Report
*ICI AI/ML Accessibility Conformance Report
*ICI Reporting Accessibility Conformance Report
*ICI Obligation Management Accessibility Conformance Report
*ICI Sourcing Accessibility Conformance Report
*ICI Proposal Management Accessibility Conformance Report
*ICI SRM Accessibility Conformance Report
*ICI Risk Management Accessibility Conformance Report

== Known Issues ==

This section includes some issues that we are aware of and plan to resolve at the earliest:

[[File:RN 8.1 52.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 52.PNG]]

 

 

 

 '''Related Topics:''' [[Agreement_Management|Agreement Management]] | [[Associations|Association Management]] | [[Compliances|Compliance Management]] | [[Templates|Template Management]] | [[Clauses|Clause Management]] | [[Configure|Configuration]] | [[Reports|Reports]] | [[Advanced_Analytics|Advanced Analytics]] | [[User_Administration|User Administration]] | [[ICI_Tools|ICI Tools ]]|  [[Icertis_Business_Apps|Icertis Business Apps]] | [[AIML|AIML ]]| [[ICI_Add-ins|ICI Add-ins]] | [[ICI_Mobile_App|ICI Mobile App]] 

File:RN 8.1 1.png

2022-06-09T10:41:33Z

IDT-1:

Release Notes

2022-06-09T10:39:44Z

IDT-1:

= ICI Release Notes - Release 8.1 =

== Release 8.1 New Features ==

These release notes provide an overview of the enhancements to ICI, the ICI experience for integrations, and so on.

•      Refer to the [[#_Technical_Requirements_8.1|'''Technical Requirements''']] for the release in this document.

•      Refer to the [https://ici-us-wiki01.icertis.com/ICIHelp8.1/index.php?title=ICI_Help '''Wiki'''] documentation (also found in your ICI help section) for details on all ICI features and functionalities.

The 8.1 Release introduces the following enhancements to the Icertis Contract Intelligence (ICI) platform:

== Icertis Contract Intelligence  ==

=== Agreement & Platform  ===

'''A new collaboration experience with Microsoft Teams'''

ICI now leverages the powerful capabilities of Microsoft Teams to help internal teams collaborate on contract creation workflow and expediting the contracting lifecycle. The Teams integrations will help customers to use a single communication system and discussions can be held in context of the agreement.

The feature includes:

*Contract owner can initiate a collaboration on MS teams from agreement details page and also invite agreement team members to participate in the discussion.
*The latest version of the agreement document is also made available on the teams channel while initiating the collaboration. Participants can review, redline the agreement document in MS teams and publish the edited document back to ICI as a new version.
*The documents associated with main agreement in ICI can also referenced in MS teams channel

Feature ID: 1188391

'''Negotiate and Update Agreements with the new Outlook Add-in'''

The new Outlook Add-in connects users’ emails with Icertis Contract Intelligence and provides improved collaboration capabilities and ensures information sent on emails is tracked for audit and governance on ICI. In addition, the new add-in provides a better interaction design, in line with the modern ACE user experience released in version 8.0.

The Add-in for Microsoft Outlook Desktop is supported on Windows and Mac OS. Once installed, an '''Icertis Experience for Outlook''' pane is accessible from Outlook. The pane provides access to ICI agreement data, along with success and error messaging for interactions. It can be pinned on the interface for easy access.

With the Outlook Add-in improvements, users can now do the following:

*Add attached documents in emails as associations or a new agreement version in ICI.
*Preview Agreement and Association documents from the Outlook Add-in.
*Drag-and-drop single or multiple emails as associations.
*Replace existing associated document with a new email or email attachment.
*Access agreements and associated documents from the Outlook plugin and email them attachments to reviewers or approvers any stakeholders.
*New incoming messages for email threads marked as associated documents are automatically added as new associated documents. 

Feature IDs: 1137119, 1137121

'''Quick & Easy Agreement Creation'''

Agreement Contract Types now come with a Quick Creation option. For all agreements using this option, users can fill all the necessary information on a single page and publish the contract or send it for approval immediately.

Feature ID: 1183356

'''More Quick Action Options'''

The Quick Actions widget “What would you like to do” has been enhanced to provide multiple actions/links with one quick action line item. For example, “Create MSA” quick action now provides multiple links catering to “Own” and “Third Party” paper selections, as displayed in the image below.

[[File:RN 8.1 1.png|520px|RN 8.1 1.png]]

Feature ID: 1183310

'''External Emails Split to Ensure Compliance '''

Contracts sent for review or approval by email to other parties, legal consultants and users not within ICI are now split in two parts. A URL and passcode can be shared with the users and the review can be done completely online. No need of downloading and attaching documents and tracking versions offline. The process is quick, secure and easy to audit.<br/> Two emails are sent, One email is sent containing the agreement URL and the other with the passcode to access the URL. This method could be used for requesting reviews, reviews and approval.<br/> <br/> Users can also resend the notification to external users whose reviews are pending, with the help of the “Resend Passcode Notification” button.<br/> <br/> To enable this feature, the implementation team needs to configure it explicitly. <br/> <br/> Feature ID: 1216716 

'''Deviation management for text and tables outside content control'''

If changes are made to the plain text in agreements or tables in associations of an agreement document (text which is not a clause or attribute), a deviation can now be triggered to help Legal teams exercise greater content control. The changes are highlighted and the deviations will flow through an approval process.<br/> <br/> Feature ID: 1183384 

'''Support for Microsoft Powerpoint documents'''

ICI now supports Microsoft Powerpoint file formats (files with .ppt and .pptx extension) as third-party paper agreement file formats. In addition to PDF and DOCX file formats, users can now create and negotiate contracts using PPT and PPTX files.

Feature ID: 1183367

'''Online Editing Of Own Paper'''

In this release, ICI is enhancing its existing online editing feature  by supporting online editing of own paper documents. using Microsoft WOPI.We have improved the experience for editing agreements with Microsoft Online applications In this release.

The following improvements can be observed:

*Documents with editable content control can be edited and and values are is synced seamlessly.
*The track changes option will now track all the changes made by the users in reviewing mode, creating a redlined version of the document.
*The empty content control will be displayed as blank instead of “obj”.
*The content controls within tables can now be edited with associations tagged as tables and saved searches.Content controls within tables will now be editable. 

Feature ID: 1287270 

'''Support for Inheritance of Bulk Associations '''

In addition to attributes and associations, now bulk associations contract types (BACT) and their extension attributes can now be inherited from parent to child agreements. 

The agreements with BACT associations will get inherited asynchronously along with all extension attributes of all the associations. The bulk associations will also work as they do in parent agreements.

Feature ID: 1278205 

'''Enhancement to Download all Agreement & Associated Documents in one click'''  

With this release, we have expanded on the Download all capability which allowed users can to download the agreement and itsall associated documents in one click saving much time and effort. 

This functionality was earlier available when the signature type for the agreement was set to manual, it is now available for electronic and hybrid signature types as well.

Additionally, the “Download All” button will now be visible to users based on the role action mapping in superseded state as well. 

Feature ID: 980342 

'''Platform changes to enhance UX for Business Applications'''

To improve findability and relevance of information pertaining to a particular business application, some configuration changes are now available in the platform. These changes significantly improve the search and usability experience when working with Agreements, Associations or any Business Application.

The following configurations are now supported:

*Business Applications have dedicated index pages, where users can search for the information pertaining to the specific business application.
*Agreements and Associations index pages do not show information from Business Applications.
*On the Advanced Search page, users have a choice to search for information from Agreements or specific business applications.
*Left navigation of a business application entity page can be configured to show the relevant links.
*Results for global search are categorized by the business application name if they are not Agreements or Associations.
*When creating a Contract Type, seeded attributes only relevant to the Business Application Type and Category can be seededwill be selected.

Feature ID: 1183274 

=== Self-Service ===

'''Introduction of a Technical Admin user to access the System Configuration on Self Service Portal'''

With the risk of inaccuracies in technical configurations, given their critical importance, such configurations have been, till now, hosted outside the confines of ICI, where ICI admin users, who have azure subscriptions to an instance, authored the process.

Therefore, the capability of admin users within ICI were being limited and the scope of technical configurations had to be expanded.

Now, a solution has been devised with this feature, as enunciated in the following:

*Technical Administrators can now be configured/added for performing required technical configurations in the System Configuration Portal, using the new “Technical Roles” field while adding, provisioning or editing a user.

'''Note:''' The user has to be Internal in order to be authorized with “Technical Roles”, and selecting an external user will automatically discount the Technical Roles feature.

*The portal has been upgraded for Technical Admin users, with enhancements to the Landing page, header, menu options, along with a static welcome message.
*Appropriate messaging and communication will be provided for any negative scenarios, wherein the Technical Admin User faces any challenge accessing or configuring.
*When a new ICI admin user logs in, they should be able to setup other internal users as technical admin users of the System Configuration portal. 

'''Note:''' Only the ICI Admin user should be able to setup other internal provisioned users as the Technical Admin user.

*The ICI Admin can either create a new Security group, as required, or use an existing security group. 
*The authorization of technical admin users will depend on Security Groups Privilege to the “Self Service” privilege entity, and on roles assigned to specific users.
*The “Self Service” privilege can be configured in the backend and it will be visible to users under the Security Group Privilege tab.
*The “Manage” access option can be selected to grant access to the System Configuration Portal for technical admin users.

'''Note:''' The user who gets Technical Admin privileges can be any internal provisioned user on that instance (even a non admin user).

Feature ID: 1210894

'''Building the Config Key Update utility as part of the System Configuration on Self Service Portal'''

Today, in ICI – There are close to 800 configuration keys in the system. These keys are managed via the ICM Tools which is hosted outside of ICI. With this initiative, we have started the migration these Keys incrementally to be part of the System Configuration – Self Service Portal. 

The scope for this release is to migrate 10 keys into the utility. The access to this utility is driven by the Technical Admin role as explained in the previous section. 

Once the user successfully enters the ‘System Configuration – Self Service’ portal with the correct security groups and technical admin role, they will be able to see the ‘Config Key Updates’ entry point at the top of the screen
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 2.png|720px|RN 8.1 2.png]]</div>
On clicking the Config Key Updates menu, the user will be able to see the utility where the defined 10 keys will be loaded on the screen, along with their existing values.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 3.png|720px|RN 8.1 3.png]]</div>
 

The user will be able to view each key loaded into a card. The card will contain the name of the key along with it’s value. 

The user will be able to see a dedication section to the right of the page for viewing help information

The user will be able to click on the ‘3-dot’ option on each card to edit the value of the key
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 4.png|720px|RN 8.1 4.png]]</div>
 

On clicking the Edit option, the key information will be loaded in the right drawer panel. Here the user can edit the key value and Save using the button at the bottom of the drawer

 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 5.png|720px|RN 8.1 5.png]]</div>
 

The user can edit one or more keys using the ‘3-dot’ option on each card. Once the user has finished editing all the keys, they need to click on the ‘PUSH CHANGES TO ICI’ button at the top of the grid. This will internally update the keys with the edited values in ICI for the changes to take effect

 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 6.png|720px|RN 8.1 6.png]]</div>
Feature ID: 1180864

=== Administration & Configuration  ===

'''Quick Configuration with ICI Import Solution'''

The ICI Import Solution is an automated solution for configuring ICI entities. It simplifies the initial configuration process and reduces the time and complexities involved in the process.

Using the Import Solution tool, ICI users can now:

*Import configurations from a source ICI instance to a target ICI Instance with no pre-existing configuration data.
*Import configurations between different versions of ICI.

'''Note:''' Support will be provided for up to 2 releases preceding the target ICI version.

*Register and publish preconfigured import solutions.
*Import the following information:
*Contract Types
*Templates
*Clauses
*Rules
*Notifications
*Masterdata Instances
*Seeded Masterdata entity instances
*Users & User Groups
*Security Groups

Feature ID: 1262996 

'''Contract Types can now be locked for editing '''

Contract types can now be edited by only one user at a time. This functionality helps prevent data inconsistencies or concurrency errors.

Product enhancements include:

*A Lock/Unlock button on the contract type page. 
*Auto system lock when users start edit a contract type without locking it. 
*Messaging providing information on who is editing the contract type. 
*System locks get released when contract types are saved.

Feature ID: 1212463 

'''Enhancements to Legacy Upload Tool'''

The following features will be added to the Legacy Upload utility with this release, improving speed and accuracy and reducing file size.

*Records bypass workflow states directly to the desired state. 
*Users can schedule upload in batches within guardrails to improve system resource allocation. 
*Specific range of records from the UI can now be uploaded.
*Infra and Elastic Search health check can be run before executing the scheduled batches.
*On demand batch scheduling based on the user provided schedule. 
*Supporting legacy entity created with large files 100MB+.

Feature ID: 1069763

'''Unique clause and template code for every environment'''

Users can now customize their clause and template codes for different instances. If unique codes are used, it reduces errors when migrating data from one instance to another. It also simplifies searching of clauses and templates.

Feature ID: 938126

'''Template and Clause creation options in Microsoft Word'''

The Create Template and Create Clause options in the Icertis Experience for Word are only displayed to users with access to these features. Earlier an error message was displayed to users without access and resulted in an unsatisfactory experience.

Feature ID: 1187041

'''Show or Hide confirmation messages in Microsoft Word '''

Administrators can now choose to show or hide certain confirmation messages, as per the organization's preference, on the Icertis Experience for Word.

Feature ID: 1187044

=== Technology Updates ===

'''ServiceBus upgraded to Azure.Messaging.ServiceBus'''

“Azure.Messaging.ServiceBus” is now replacing “Microsoft.ServiceBus”.  <br/> <br/> This is a Microsoft recommended upgrade and provides the following improvements:

*Up-to-date, streamlined Azure.
*More accurate messaging without any anomaly or junk data in the message characters.

<br/> Feature ID: 940871

'''Authentication Library and Graph API update'''

Microsoft has announced* deprecation of the Azure Active Directory (Azure AD) Authentication Library (ADAL) and Azure AD Graph API libraries and recommends using Microsoft Authentication Library (MSAL) and Microsoft Graph API.

We have updated Microsoft Graph, Identity and Key Vault packages to include stability and security fixes from Microsoft. The migration from ADAL and Azure AD Graph API to MSAL and Microsoft Graph API will ensure continuing support for the following areas:

*User Provisioning 
*Bulk Action 
*Integration - SFDC, GIF (Generic Integration Framework), MSCRM  
*Reporting 
*Key Vault 

Refer to the following link for Microsoft’s circular: [https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/t5/azure-active-directory-identity/update-your-applications-to-use-microsoft-authentication-library/ba-p/1257363 Update your applications to use Microsoft Authentication Library and Microsoft Graph API - Microsoft Tech Community].

Feature ID: 1276938

=== API Enhancements ===

In this release we focused on providing API 2.0 versions of most of our APIs with a goal to improve the performance and overall usability.

Following APIs are upgraded to API 2.0 versions in this release:

[[File:RN 8.1 7.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 7.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 8.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 8.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 9.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 9.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 10.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 10.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 11.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 11.PNG]]<br/> [[File:RN 8.1 12.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 12.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 13.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 13.PNG]]<br/> <br/> [[File:RN 8.1 14.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 14.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 15.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 15.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 16.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 16.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 17.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 17.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 18.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 18.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 19.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 19.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 20.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 20.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 21.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 21.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 22.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 22.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 23.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 23.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 24.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 24.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 25.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 25.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 26.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 26.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 27.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 27.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 28.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 28.PNG]]

'''API Deprecations'''

Any integrations utilizing the deprecated APIs must adopt alternate APIs. Previously, API endpoints have been periodically deprecated and alternate APIs have been provisioned.

However, no existing API endpoints have been deprecated in the 8.1 Release. To check previously deprecated endpoints, refer to 7.16 Release Notes. More details on the alternate APIs are available in the Swagger documentation.

=== Mobile App Update  ===

'''Improved Security on Mobile Devices with SafetyNet Attestation API'''

With this release, ICI is implementing SafetyNet Attestation API for Android mobile application to restrict users from accessing the application through rooted/vulnerable device, to avoid breaching of the IT and cyber security policy.

'''Note: '''The SafetyNet Attestation API is supported Android version 8.0 onwards.

Feature ID: 1095223

== AI Applications  ==

Usually, the implementation team spends a lot of time analyzing and training the AI model for the discovery of the new attributes. With this release, ICI is extending the number of pre-trained attributes so that the AI apps implementation project can be expedited. ICI previously had added 23 out-of-the-box attributes and introducing 15 additional attributes in this release, making it a total of 38 new attributes as a part pre-trained model. Customers can now start using attributes from pre-trained model with no or very little retraining.

The additional attributes are:

*Acceptance Completion Period
*Breach Cure Period
*Confidentiality Survival Period
*Force Majeure Period
*Interest Percentage on Payment Delay
*Liquidated Damages Cap
*Policy changes notice period
*Records Retention Period
*Renewal notice period
*Signatory Name
*Signatory Title
*Signature Date
*Termination for cause notice period
*Termination for convenience notice period
*Warranty Claim Period

Feature ID: 1187824

=== Enhancing the scope of DiscoverAI app& Negotiate AI differentiation ===

Discover AI helps users to identify attributes and clauses in browser and save them in the system.

With this release, scope of DiscoverAI has been enhanced to include the discovery of attributes and clauses within Microsoft word also using Icertis Experience for Word plugin. 

*The following actions/functionalities will be available under the Discover AI license in Icertis experience for Word: 
*Discovery of attributes and clauses. 
*Confirm, Confirm with Deviation, Ignore, Compare and Replace the clauses based on discovered clauses data. 
*Select the Matched Clause from the library. 

Feature ID: 1284012

== Reports Enhancements ==

=== Data for agreements awaiting signature in reports ===

Out-of-the-box ICI reports will now display details for the business status “Waiting for Signature”, in addition to existing statuses. This update to the reporting logic resolves an existing gap in the reports data.

This enhancement applies to the following reports:

[[File:RN 8.1 29.PNG|520px|RN 8.1 29.PNG]]

Feature ID: 1071182

=== Custom reporting views using JSON  ===

Developers can now create new custom reports views using Stored Procedures (SP) and JSON files. This feature gives flexibility to organizations to easily develop new reports relevant to their business requirements.

An Import SP is now available that takes JSON files as input. The JSON file used for input is where developers can define the new view. New reporting views are automatically created on running the Import SP.

An Export SP is also provided, which can be used to download a JSON file which contains the structure of an existing view in the database, to use as a template to create a new views.

Feature ID: 1208472

=== Dataset and seeded dashboard for Proposal Management application ===

A dedicated Power BI Dataset is now available for the Proposal Management application for out-of-the-box and custom reporting.  

PM App Power BI report will have clickable links to ICI entity details page for Proposal Management Entities such as, Sell Side RFx, RFx Qualification, and Bid Proposal.

Feature ID: 1232650

=== Attribute Information Report Enhancements ===

The following filters and columns are added to the Attribute Information report giving more options to analyse the Attributes used in the system.

*Filters: Contract Type, and Group by Property Columns: Is Mandatory and Tracking Attribute

Feature ID: 1158976

=== Edit SSRS Reports without customization ===

Icertis and partner developers can now edit the SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS) reports eliminating the need to create additional customized reports even for small changes. Users can now make the following edits to SSRS reports:

*Add or remove columns in an existing report.
*Modify column’s position, name, or default values.
*Modify sorting order of the results.
*Apply query level filters.
*Apply security group access as standard reports.
*Create copy of existing report and modify it.
*Use a new framework, which has a JSON-based interface.
*Create new or modify custom reports.

Feature ID: 744814

=== Report-based edit access for Power BI reports ===

Manage access for Power BI reports can now be provided at a report level to ensure that edit access is only given to the necessary users within the organization.<br/> This feature works does not impact “Advanced Analytics” access.<br/> <br/> Feature ID: 1070905

=== Maintainance and storage optimization with a Common Data Model for Clause-based reports ===

PlatformClause - a common data model for clause related information can now be used to create clause-based reports such as Clause Profiling Report, Clause Pending Approval Report and more. This helps optimize storage capacity and reduces the development and maintenance effort siginificantly. <br/> <br/> Feature ID: 1083685

=== SSRS Reports now available with Power BI ===

Power BI reports are faster, more scalable, richer in features, customization-friendly, sport a modern UI and overall a better experience. To leverage its advantages, the following SSRS reports are now made available in Power BI:

*Clause Summary Report
*Tagged Attribute Report
*Agreement Clause Content Report – A widget that displays the clauses with the most deviations is also added in this release. 

Feature IDs: 1214787, 1214720, 1223598<br/>  

== Salesforce Integration  ==

===  Activity Object and Trigger Simplification in Salesforce Adapter ===

The following enhancements are made to the SFDC Manage package Adapter:

*Triggers for Accounts and Opportunity objects have been removed from the Managed package to avoid unnecessary update-related issues. Users can get more flexibility and control over them when they use the auto contract creation feature. Note: This is applicable to both fresh installs as well as updates on existing packages.
*Previously, 6 custom fields were needed on the Salesforce activity object to sync ICI tasks with Salesforce, and now, the dependency on these fields have been reduced with only 2 custom fields required for the sync.
*For customers who didn’t need the ICI task sync feature and were unable to remove the custom fields with the limit of 100 fields on the Activity object, now, these fields have been removed from our managed package to provide more flexibility.

'''Note:''' Guideline documentation and support by ICI implementation/upgrade team will be duly provided, for creation of desired fields during new installs as well as release upgrades, or deletion of fields during upgrade scenarios.

Feature ID: 1066353

=== User Experience for Salesforce Revamped ===

Using ICI within Salesforce is now a more seamless experience as we have made significant improvements to preserve the native Salesforce UI interactions, which users are familiar with, without compromising the ICI functionality.

These are the enhancements that have been introduced:

* Native Salesforce components are now used along with the ICI iframe.
*Sub-tabs moved from ICI to Salesforce native tabs, for example: Agreements, Requests and Agreement Reports.
*Agreement and Request Details pages are now displayed in native Salesforce UI.
*On the Details page certain actions (example - Reset Expiry) and sub-tabs (example – Associations) are now native Salesforce components.

'''Note:''' The implementation team will provide a list of native and i-frame components.

Feature ID: 1186642

== eSign Integration  ==

=== Integration Support for DocuSign using JWT authentication ===

The ICI and DocuSign integration was previously based on authenticating the APIs with “IntegratorKey” and “API Password”.

The product has now been upgraded to support an enhanced authentication using JSON Web Token (JWT), along with the existing basic authentication support. This enhancement has also enabled JWT support for “Multisign” as well as “Single Esign” configurations.

Feature ID: 1000798

=== DocuSign API upgraded from 2.0 to 2.1 ===

DocuSign released an update announcement that OAuth 2.0 would be required to support DocuSign API applications. In keeping with this announcement we have upgraded DocuSign REST APIs from 2.0 to 2.1. With this upgrade, a new JSON parser has been introduced to support DocuSign Connect, a notification mechanism to receive updates when any event is triggered in the eSignature workflow.

Feature ID: 1060689

=== Adapting webhook feature of Adobe Sign ===

Adobe Sign adapter couldn’t communicate precise callback information to ICI Platform, thus causing intermittent errors in ICM workflow after the Agreements were electronically signed. Adobe Sign responded with the same information for every signature, hence it wasn’t possible to distinguish between callbacks from different signature. However, with the introduction of Adobe webhook, this problem can be resolved.

Adobe webhooks can be created on the workflow for each agreement, requesting the type of information in the callback, which further benefits as follows:

*Identifying the signatory requesting a callback
*Identifying for which event or action the callback is requested
*Concisely updating the status in ICM

'''Note:'''  Upgrade Adobe Sign API from 5.0 to 6.0 to use the webhook feature.

Also, Adobe rebranded Echo sign to Adobe Sign, hence non overridden localization strings for validation messages have been modified accordingly.

Feature ID: 1091947

=== Electronic Signature support using ICI BioPharma setting for 21 CFR Part 11 & Annex 11 compliant groups ===

ICI Platform now supports the Life Science industry documents that need to comply with 21 CFR Part 11 (for US FDA) or Annex 11 (for EU) regulatory compliance.

This feature allows integration with DocuSign Part 11 module and Adobe Sign Bio-Pharma setting to get electronically signed approvals for such agreements.

Feature ID: 1220095

=== Changes in IP whitelisting process for eSign adapters ===

ICI Platform supports integration with third party eSign adapters, which communicate using callback information. To receive the callback data from the eSign servers, certain IPs to intended methods are whitelisted. This action is done through the web.config file. However, any change in the IPs requires modifying the web.config file, which resets the IIS, resulting in performance issues.

To address this issue, “Core.IPSecurity” key has been introduced, which stores information related to the IPs as a JSON, and thus eliminates the need to modify the web.config file.

'''Note''': Blocking or allowing IP addresses based on DNS is not supported as a part of this feature.

Feature ID: 1193062

=== Update eSign document with correct status ===

In certain scenarios, the electronic signature status in ICI and eSign provider are inconsistent. An enhancement has been added wherein the respective statuses are verified and the agreement status is updated or corrected accordingly.

Feature ID: 1193061

== Sourcing  ==

The 8.1 Release introduces enhancements to the Icertis Contract Intelligence (ICI) Sourcing Application (SRC8.1.0.404).

=== Support for new RFx type-RFP ===

Icertis Sourcing application now supports Requests for Proposals (RFPs). Organizations can leverage the advantages of a secure and seamless application to organize and maintain their procurement processes digitally using the RFP feature.

RfPs are integrated requests containing information on both questions and bids. Buyers can now design, create, and publish RFPs in the Sourcing application and invite suppliers to respond to them. Once Buyers receive the responses, they can evaluate them and make their procurement decisions.

Key RFP features:

*Integrated mechanism to get responses to questions and bids from suppliers.
*Reusable templates for Questions, Questionnaires, and Bidding templates.
*Questionnaires and questions can be arranged and reordered as required. 
*Attachments, and responses to questions can be downloaded in a package.
*A consolidated excel spreadsheet is available to analyse bids and responses.
*Suppliers can provide responses to questions using Excel as well as Sourcing UI.

Feature ID: 404602

=== Improved Sourcing workflow with Sourcing Request ===

Users within an organization can now create Sourcing Requests for procuring items or services. These requests can be designed to go through an approval flow before they are turned over to procurement teams. The approval cycle can be easily tracked and audited for compliance.

Sourcing Request features:

*Configure a Sourcing Request based on the necessary privileges.
*Request forms can be designed to capture necessary details and attachments.
*Requests can be sent to designated approvers for approval.
*An RFx can be created after the request is approved.
*Requests can be modified until they are approved or a RFX is created based on it.
*Cancel or recall the Sourcing Request.
*Put the Sourcing Request on Hold till approved state provided RFx is not created using this Sourcing Request.

Feature ID: 611297

=== Ordering and additional data types for Questions in Questionnaire ===

We have made the following enhancements to Icertis Sourcing to improve the user experience when working with Questions and Questionnaires:

The order of Questions and questionnaires in RFx can be set and modified as per the preference of users.

The following data types are now supported for questions in RFx:

*Boolean
*String
*Choice
*Multi Choice
*Currency
*DateTime
*Number
*Percentage
*Text Area
*Rich Text Area  
*Email
*File Selection

'''Note''':

*On exporting rich text data type information to Excel or HTML, some formatting features may be lost.
*Uploading a file attachment as response for file type question response using Excel is not supported. Supplier must log on to ICI to upload files.

Feature ID: 896873

== Obligation Management  ==

The 8.1 Release introduces enhancements to the Icertis Contract Intelligence (ICI) Obligation Management Application (OM8.1.0.404).

=== An interface to quickly add obligations discovered by AI ===

Obligations that are identified in contracts using the Discover AI feature can now be easily reviewed on the user interface. User can review the obligations and decide to add one or more to the Obligation Management application for tracking approvals and fulfillment.

The interface to review and create obligations in bulk saves users much time and manual effort.

The following image shows an example of creating Obligations in bulk:
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 30.png|720px|RN 8.1 30.png]]</div>
Notifications for successfully processed or failed obligations can also be configured.

Feature ID: 1090383

=== Auto-approval of Obligations to improve efficiency ===

Many obligations are extracted from executed contracts and they don’t usually need to go through an approval process in the Obligation Management application. To reduce time and effort spent approving a large number of obligations and not block the obligation fulfillment lifecycle on account of pending approvals, an automatic approval process for obligations can now be configured.

Once the auto-approval process is defined based on obligation taxonomy, this is how the feature works:

*If approval is turned off, and no approvers are added to obligations, the obligations are automatically approved.
*If approvers are added to obligations, manually or automatically through a rule, then even if approvals are turned off, the obligations will need to be approved.

Feature ID: 519344

=== Organize and manage obligations by creating groups  ===

An obligations could have one or more sub obligations or tasks, which would need to be completed by different individuals in an organization. Also, some obligations may be related to each other and grouping them could help organize and track the fulfillment. To facilitate such scenarios, obligation groups can now be created in the Obligation Management application.

Users can now categorize different obligations under logical groups and create parent-child relationships between obligations.

Child obligations automatically inherit any changes made to the parent Obligation. For example, if the status of parent Obligation is changed to Approved, all the related child Obligations also get approved.

Feature ID: 649768

=== Duplicate obligations no longer inherited  ===

When an Agreement (parent), with an associated Obligation, is inherited by another Agreement (peer), a duplicate Obligation is created. An enhancement in this release eliminates this limitation.

Feature ID: 1040723

=== UI Improvements for Obligation Management ===

The following improvements are made in the product to improve the search and usability experience when using Obligation Management:

*Dedicated index pages for Obligations and Fulfillments,
*Relevant page titles, breadcrumbs and history page information.

Feature ID: 1236413

== Risk Management ==

The 8.1 Release introduces enhancements to the Icertis Contract Intelligence (ICI) Sourcing Application (RM8.1.0.404).

=== UI Improvements for Risk Management  ===

The following Improvements are made in the product to improve the search and usability experience when using Risk Management: 

*Dedicated index pages for Risk Management and Risk Assessment. 
*Relevant page titles, breadcrumbs and history page information. 
*Saved searches display Risk Assessment as category.  
*The “Create” action button has now been added on the “Risk Assessment” index page.   
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 31.png|720px|RN 8.1 31.png]]</div>
Other enhancements include:

*The “Delete” action has now been moved under the three dots icon on the Risk Assessment “Details” page. On deleting the risk assessment, users will be redirected to the Risk Assessment “Index” page.

Feature ID: 1067718

== Proposal Management  ==

ICI Proposal Management application is certified to work with the 8.1 release (PM8.1.0.404). 

=== Track and analyse performance with a Power BI Dashboard ===

A seeded dashboard that helps supplier organizations track their proposals by status, time, and outcome is now available within the Proposal Management application.The following features and reports are now available with the Proposal Management application:

*A new Power BI data model with Power BI dataset specific to Proposal Management.
*Proposal Management KPIs report
*Capture Management report

'''Note''': Users with access to Sell Side RFx or Bid Proposal can view the Dashboard.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 31.png|720px|RN 8.1 31.png]]</div>
 

=== Enhancements to Seeded Contract Types ===

With this release, the PM App is being enhanced with newly seeded attributes to its seeded contract types.

In this enhancement:

*New attributes have been seeded with the Bid Proposal entity:
*Total Bid Value For Proposal
*Total Value Won Or Lost
*Customer Address
*Customer Geography

These new attributes contribute in the essential computations of the Win Ratio and the Value Capture Ratio.

Feature ID: 1186830

=== Revamped User Experience across the PM App ===

The visual look and feel of the Proposal Management App has been considerably enhanced with the ICI-wide implementation of the new UI (User Interface) and UX (User Experience).

The following summarizes the revamped user experience across the App:

*The new “Proposals” tile menu now features only the viewing tile options for the seeded PM App entities, in addition to a new “Dashboard” tile menu option.
*The create navigation flow has been moved from the “Proposals” tile and a dedicated “Create” button has now been added to each seeded entity index page.
*The seeded entities now have their dedicated index pages, as opposed to the saved search driven listing in previous releases.
*The Details pages of all the seeded entities (Sell Side RFx, Bid Proposal etc.) now have dedicated page titles starting with the entity name, instead of the contract type category. For example, the previous “Agreement / Sell Side RFx 123” has been replaced by “Sell Side RFx / Sell Side RFx 123”.
*The newly added entity name (such as “Sell Side RFx”) on the Details page header is now a clickable link, clicking which opens the entity index page.
*In the audit history of any entity, both Grid View and List View, the header now features the entity category name instead of the contract type, just like the change in entity Details page.
*The display of action buttons on entity Details pages can now be configured to customize their sequence of display, and based on the available window space the remaining action buttons will be available under the three dots icon on the entity “Details” page.

Feature ID: 1235186

== Supplier Relationship Management Application  ==

ICI Proposal Management application is certified to work with the 8.1 release (SRM8.1.0.404).

=== Supplier Evaluation ===

The Supplier Evaluation module introduced in the Supplier Relationship Management suite helps organizations manage supplier performance and evaluate and mitigate risks associated with working with suppliers.

'''How Supplier Evaluation fits within Supplier Relationship Management'''
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 33.png|520px|RN 8.1 33.png]]</div>
The Supplier Evaluation module introduced in the Supplier Relationship Management suite helps organizations manage supplier performance and evaluate and mitigate risks associated with working with suppliers.

'''How Supplier Evaluation fits within Supplier Relationship Management'''

 

Supplier Evaluation module is part of the Supplier Relationship Management application, which is built on Icertis Contract Intelligence.

Once suppliers are onboarded, users can evaluate suppliers on the products or services they offer. The KPI criteria, schedule, and the evaluators can be set up within the module and on completing the assessment the supplier can be classified as high performing, low performing or standard supplier.

A routine supplier evaluation can help organizations set expectations from their preferred suppliers and manage low performing suppliers.  

'''Supplier Evaluation Features'''

Setting up Supplier Evaluation

*'''KPIs''' – Users can create one or more KPIs (evaluation criteria) and evaluate suppliers based on the set parameters. For example, you can create KPIs for auditing, performance reviews, training requirements, and more.
*'''Supplier Data''' – The supplier evaluation creation process is simplified as much of the supplier information is auto-populated based on the supplier’s record.
*'''Evaluation Schedule''' – Users can set up a period for which the supplier will be evaluated.
*'''Product/Service for Evaluation''' – The evaluation can be performed in context of the product or service provided or the agreements.
*'''Reviewing suppliers based on the Criteria''' – The evaluation criteria can be put through an internal review process, and inputs can be sought to finalize the evaluation criteria.
*'''Supplier Outreach''' – Suppliers can provide information and supporting documents needed to perform the evaluation by responding to review requests by buyers.
*'''Responses & Scoring''' – Based on the responses provided by business team or evaluators on the supplier evaluation, scores are automatically computed.
*'''Evaluation Approvals & Control''' – Once the evaluation process is over, then buyer team defines supplier performance classification and suggests the next course of action (in case of low performing supplier). This can also be sent for management approval. The approver team can either approve or reject and send it for rework..
*'''Notifications''' – Notifications can also be configured for periodic evaluation. System notifications are sent to buyers when they are requested to evaluate a supplier.

Feature ID: 463049

=== Managing Supplier Hierarchy ===

'''Manage Related Supplier Organizations'''

The Supplier Relationship Management application now provides a mechanism to connect supplier organizations with their Parent, Holding or Subsidiary organizations. This is to ensure that you have a complete overview of the business you do with one supplier and its related entities. According to business needs, you may want to work with a local supplier or the parent global organization.

You can designate a supplier organization as one of the following types:

*'''Supplier''': Supplier organizations that may or may not have related Parent or Holding companies.
*'''Parent company''': Parent company of one or more Supplier organizations, controls operations of the Supplier Organization
*'''Holding company''': Holding company of one or more subsidiary Supplier organizations, does not have a direct say over the operations of subsidiaries.

Changes made to the supplier hierarchy for supplier registration, qualification or profile are synchronized with the vendor database and supplier master.

'''Unique Supplier Record Management'''

In Icertis Supplier Relationship management, the uniqueness of a supplier record is validated based on a combination of attributes . In this release, one or more of the unique identifiers attributes can be made editable. This is to account for entities that may change the Legal Entity Name in the course of doing business, considering legal entity name is one of the unique identifier attributes.

If the attributes are changed for an organization, the system validates and checks for duplicate records before allowing users to make the change.

'''Validating the Duplicate Registrations'''

Buyers may receive more than one registration from the same supplier submitted through the web page.

This release introduces the capability to match the supplier registration records based on the unique identifier attributes. This helps identifying the duplicate registrations. Buyers can perform limited actions on the duplicate registrations and the supplier qualification is not generated.

'''Note''': Customers upgrading to 8.1 from previous versions of ICI Supplier Relationship Management is supported.

Feature ID: 1271423

== Introducing ICI Matter Management App  ==

The Icertis Contract Intelligence (ICI) platform now introduces a Matter Management Application to streamline and optimize the lifecycle of legal operations. The ICI Matter Management Application helps you to establish e2e enterprise-wide matter management process.

The ICI Matter Management application helps to support complex document centric workloads (template-based authoring, online editing, e-signatures).

With this release, you will get the pre-configured support for these entities to get started: Litigation Management, Legal Correspondence, Arbitration, Corporate Administration. ICI has become single unique platform to manage Contracting and non-contracting matters.

*'''Who''' – For corporate legal functions and “Legal Ops”
*'''What''' – Secured and standard processes for creating and processing matter requests.
*Flexible, searchable document Management, easy working with external law firms
*'''Why''' – Improves productivity and efficiency of legal operations
*CLM data can be used in on-going matters.
*'''How '''– Leverages the ICI platform. With the use of a set of objects & workflows you can manage the entire matter lifecycle

 

=== Capabilities   ===

'''Streamlined Intake'''

'''[[File:RN 8.1 34.PNG|left|RN 8.1 34.PNG]]'''

*Standardized intake forms for business teams to raise matter requests
*Collaborative request management of requests from general / legal Counsel
*Rule based assignment of request to members of legal team

 

 

'''Plan and Complete Matters'''

'''[[File:RN 8.1 35.PNG|left|RN 8.1 35.PNG]]'''

* Efficiently plan for matters with the use of matter calendar, MS Outlook.
* Initiate matter transactions from matter manager
*Based on matter type, creation & use of appropriate templates, associations to form matter structure.
*Collaborate with external law firms
*Create custom matter types  

'''CLM Handshake'''

[[File:RN 8.1 36.PNG|left|RN 8.1 36.PNG]]

*When working on matter, you can Inherit attributes from related contracts
* After completing matter, you can enforce contracting outcomes such as ‘ Settlement Contracts’, ‘Amending contracts’

 

 

 

'''Managing Outcomes'''

'''[[File:RN 8.1 37.PNG|left|RN 8.1 37.PNG]]'''

*Amend the contracts based on matter outcome
*Track all legal correspondence
*Monitor and enforce outcomes

 

 

'''Legal Dashboards'''

'''[[File:RN 8.1 38.PNG|left|RN 8.1 38.PNG]]'''

*You get the dashboards to track progress & track status of Legal matter requests, legal matter
*Track Legal KPI (Key Performance Indicators) such as matter turnaround time, claims & liabilities.
*Use reports to improve efficiency, response time and can take better informed decisions
*Matter Calendar to get centralized view of key tasks across all matters

 

=== Lifecycle ===

The diagram below talks about the lifecycle of a typical matter record. The major 3 aspects include standardized intakes, plan, and complete the matters and managing the outcomes.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 39.png|RTENOTITLE]]</div>
 

=== Key Application Features  ===

'''Standardized intake:'''

*Raise requests on behalf of other users
*Define Matter Type that can be country specific and Industry specific
*Request for a completion date
*Easy drag & drop support to add additional matter documents along with requests 
*Customized workflow for legal matter requests
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 40.png|720px|RN 8.1 40.png]]</div>
 

'''Plan & Complete Matters'''

*Assign the legal matter to legal Ops
*View legal request details
*Assign the matter to the team as Matter Manager, Matter team, Matter Approver
*Outsource the matters to external law firms
*Perform risk assessment and assign the high risk matters to external law firms   
*Structure the work on matter by tracking key working products for “Inputs”, “Working Docs”, “Outcome bucket”
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 41.png|720px|RN 8.1 41.png]]</div>
'''Outcome Management'''

When you work on any matter, you can set the outcome of that matter to be CLM type of document. Based on the type of Matter, certain outcomes are seeded. 

You can monitor, track the matter outcomes, before the Legal Matter goes in Completed Status.

*You can create and amend the contracts to enforce matter outcomes
*Track and manage financial obligations to enforce matter outcomes
*Refer to Audit History for all matter documents
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:RN 8.1 42.png|720px|RN 8.1 42.png]]</div>
The key benefits of using the ICI Matter Management app are:

*Standardized matter intake and control information collection across the enterprise
*Can collaborate with external law firms.
*Custom matters can be quickly created using standard knowledge snippets and business rules.
*Triage requests and get accurate information from business
*Amendment of contracts based on matter outcome
*Integration with legal research, document management and ERP (Enterprise Resource Planning) System. 

 

== Technical Requirements  ==

The Icertis Contract Intelligence (ICI) application can be accessed from any device with an Internet connection and a supported browser. All features may not be available in all environments.

The software and hardware requirements for the client system as well as the mobile application are listed in the table below:

[[File:RN 8.1 43.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 43.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 44.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 44.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 45.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 45.PNG]]

'''Important Changes in IE11 Support:'''

From March 2021, Microsoft has stopped its technical support to Internet Explorer (IE) and has advised its customers to move to Microsoft Edge.

ICI will no longer support IE11. ICI will not be certified over IE11.

If customers use IE 11 then the below message will be displayed:

“You are using a browser that is not recommended to be used since it no longer supported by its OEM. The ICI support for this browser is limited for 7.16 version and will be discontinued from version 7.17 onwards. You should switch to Microsoft Edge as recommended by the OEM or any other supported browser prescribed by your organizational policy. You may contact your administrator for further information.”

[[File:RN 8.1 46.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 46.PNG]] 

[[File:RN 8.1 47.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 47.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 48.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 48.PNG]]<br/> [[File:RN 8.1 49.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 49.PNG]]<br/> [[File:RN 8.1 50.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 50.PNG]]

[[File:RN 8.1 51.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 51.PNG]]

== Accessibility Conformance  ==

We ran accessibility conformance tests on the Icertis Contract Intelligence platform and Business Apps for Web Content Accessibility Guidelines 2.1 for Level A and Level AA standards. We did not evaluate for Level AAA standards.

While most of the product functionality has at least one method that meets the criterion without any known defects, some functionality of the product may not meet the conformance criteria. The full report is published in the following documents and can be made available on request:

*ICI Platform Accessibility Conformance Report
*ICI AI/ML Accessibility Conformance Report
*ICI Reporting Accessibility Conformance Report
*ICI Obligation Management Accessibility Conformance Report
*ICI Sourcing Accessibility Conformance Report
*ICI Proposal Management Accessibility Conformance Report
*ICI SRM Accessibility Conformance Report
*ICI Risk Management Accessibility Conformance Report

== Known Issues ==

This section includes some issues that we are aware of and plan to resolve at the earliest:

[[File:RN 8.1 52.PNG|720px|RN 8.1 52.PNG]]

 

 

 

 '''Related Topics:''' [[Agreement_Management|Agreement Management]] | [[Associations|Association Management]] | [[Compliances|Compliance Management]] | [[Templates|Template Management]] | [[Clauses|Clause Management]] | [[Configure|Configuration]] | [[Reports|Reports]] | [[Advanced_Analytics|Advanced Analytics]] | [[User_Administration|User Administration]] | [[ICI_Tools|ICI Tools ]]|  [[Icertis_Business_Apps|Icertis Business Apps]] | [[AIML|AIML ]]| [[ICI_Add-ins|ICI Add-ins]] | [[ICI_Mobile_App|ICI Mobile App]] 

ICI Mobile App

2022-06-09T10:28:28Z

IDT-1:

= ICI Mobile Application =

Icertis Contract Intelligence (ICI) is a secure, scalable and integrated platform for contract lifecycle management. It transforms contracts into strategic business assets, giving global enterprises powerful new capabilities to increase compliance, improve governance, enhance user productivity, control costs, maximize ROI and mitigate risks. <br/> ICI is available both as a Cloud (Web) offering and a Mobile application. The mobile version in an innovative, easy-to-use, and convenient platform that provides a subset of the features available on the Cloud platform. It allows you to quickly and easily access Agreements, Requests, Tasks and Commitments that you are authorized to view and perform key actions on them. You can approve or reject Agreements/Requests, or delegate tasks, anytime, anywhere from your mobile devices.

== Prerequisites to Using the ICI Mobile Application ==

The ICI Mobile application must be configured at the backend by Icertis before you can begin using it. If you have any issues logging in, please contact Icertis Customer Success.<br/> To install the ICI Mobile Application, your mobile device must meet the following minimum requirements:

*Android: Android 6.0 or later. The mobile application is not supported on custom Android operating systems.
*iPhone: iOS 13.0 or later.

 
<div class="note-box">'''NOTE:'''
In the 7.16 release, the theme color of the app has been modified as part of the new ICI branding.

Android must have the required third-party applications such as WPS Office and Microsoft Office that are necessary to work with Agreement documents, pre-installed.

The ICI mobile application is continuously being updated with new features and enhancements. If you are using an older version of ICI Web Application with a more recent version of the ICI Mobile application, some features in the mobile application may not be supported.<br/> <br/> This document explains all features of the ICI Mobile version 7.16.0, but the availability of the features is determined by the ICI Web version you may be using.
</div>
 

== ICI Mobile App Management support using Microsoft Intune ==

ICI has extended support for Microsoft Intune in Mobile Application Management (MAM). <br/> ICI employees, customers and partners use mobile devices for personal and professional tasks. While ensuring productivity, Icertis also wants to prevent data loss, both - intentional and unintentional. The MAM app protection policies allow users to manage and protect their organization's data within an application.

The ICI Mobile App which is available in the App/Play Store is ready to use for app protection policies but not for app configuration policies.

Microsoft Intune is a scalable cloud service architecture that leverages cloud for insights and baselines for our security policies and configuration settings. It helps safeguard data that is not managed by ICI and used by employees, customers or partners to access work files.

The key benefits of making ICI MS Intune-compatible include: 

*Protecting company data at the App level, for both – managed and unmanaged devices, as the management is based on user identity.
*Ensuring App layer protections are in place. For example: 

              o    Entering a pin to open the App in work context<br/>               o    Controlling the sharing of data between Apps<br/>               o    Preventing the saving of company App data to a personal storage location

*Supporting Mobile Device Management (MDM) in addition to MAM ensuring device protection and control over App management. For example:

              o    Entering a pin to access the device<br/>               o    Deploying managed apps to the device<br/>               o    Deploying apps to devices through your MDM solution

*Using app protection policies, with or without MDM, at the same time. For example, you may choose to use a company issued phone with both – MDM and App protection policies, whereas, a personal phone may be protected by only the App protection policies.
*Applying a MAM policy to the user without setting the device state. The user will get the MAM policy on both - the BYOD (bring-your-own-devices) and the Intune-managed device. You can also apply the MAM policy based on the managed state.
<div class="note-box">'''Note:''' The policies do not apply when using the app in personal context and does not affect end-user productivity. </div>
 

Administrators can configure the ICI Mobile app as a managed app using Intune configuration policies. <br/> To avail the benefits of Intune MAM settings, users will have to download the ICI app from the Intune store set by the ICI Administrator and set company portal policies on their mobile phones.

Administrators can now:

*Enroll the device in Microsoft Intune.
*Configure the access privileges for users and user groups for ICI Mobile App using Microsoft Intune policies.
*Pre-configure the system URL so that users do not need to enter it every time.
*Manage and protect organization's data within an application.

Refer to the ICI Mobile App Management support using Microsoft Intune configuration guide for details.

=== Logging on to the ICI Mobile Application for android device managed with Microsoft Intune ===

The system URL is pre-configured for users who have downloaded the ICI Mobile App from the Intune store set by the ICI Administrator and set company portal policies on their mobile phones. Please refer to the ''ICI Mobile App Management Support using Microsoft Intune'' config guide for more details on setting ''Company Portal Policies'' on your mobile phones.

 

=== Downloading the ICI Mobile Application ===

To download the mobile application: 

1. '''Open '''the App Store.

2. '''Search '''for Icertis Contract Intelligence or ICI. 

3. '''Click '''''Get on your device ''to download the ICI application. 

=== Logging on to the ICI Mobile Application  ===

To logon to the mobile application: 

1. '''Tap '''the [[File:7.15-LoginIcon.png|25px|7.15-LoginIcon.png]]  icon on your device to launch the ICI application. 

2. The ''About us'' screen opens providing details of the ''Software Version'', ''Privacy Policy'', and ''Disclaimer''.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 01.png|320x560px]]</div>
Downloading the ICI Mobile Application from the App Store

To download the mobile application:

1. '''Open '''the App Store.<br/> 2. '''Search '''for Icertis Contract Intelligence or ICI.<br/> 3. '''Click '''''Get ''on your device to download the ICI application.<br/> 4. '''Enter '''your credentials in the fields. There are two ways of doing this:

*Set system URL: '''Type '''the URL of the ICI instance. (It may be similar to [https://intqa4.icertis.com https://intqa4.icertis.com]), and
*Set port number: '''Type '''the port number. (It may be similar to 8443).<br/> OR
*Set API URL: '''Type '''the API URL. (It may be similar to [https://intqa4-api.icertis.com https://intqa4-api.icertis.com])
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 02.png|320x560px]]</div>
 
<div class="note-box">'''Note''': If you are unsure of any of these, contact the Icertis Customer Support team. </div>
3. '''Tap''' ''SAVE''.

The system authenticates your credentials.

1. On successful authentication, the application opens on your mobile displaying the ''Dashboard screen''.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.15-LoginScreen.png|RTENOTITLE]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">2. If the credentials are incorrect, a message is displayed to enter valid credentials.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 04.png|320x560px]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">3. On sucessful login, the launch screen is displayed.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 05.png|320x560px]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">4. If the App is compatible with your ICI version, then your Dashboard screen is displayed.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 06.png|320x560px]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">2. If the App is not compatible with your ICI version or there are some other issues, an Alert message is displayed.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 07.png|320x560px]]</div>

== Mobile App Features ==

=== Main Features ===

The Mobile Application offers the following features: 

*Dashboard
*Tasks
*Commitments
*Agreements
*Requests
*Settings
*Filter and Searches (Category filter, Faceted Search, Free Text Search and Saved Search)
*Notifications

 

=== Configurable Features ===

The following features are configurable (to show/hide) on the ICI Mobile application:

*Dashboard: for example, the ''Carousel ''can be configured
*Agreements
*Requests
*Faceted search
*Saved search
*Buttons: for example, ''Request Review'' and ''Remove Me'' buttons can be configured
*Tabs: for example, ''History, Notes Notifications'' can be configured

 

== Dashboard ==

The ''Dashboard ''is the first screen you see on successfully logging on to the mobile application. Here, you will see the Carousel, Saved searches, Free Text search, and Notifications. The dashboard allows you to easily access critical information and perform tasks that are important by saving your searches and viewing notifications on the main screen itself.

*By default, the ''Dashboard ''shows the top 20 saved searches: the top 5 in the Carousel view and the rest in the Tiles view. This count can be configured to increase or decrease based on your requirements by raising a Customer Service ticket. 
*A Free Text search [[File:Magnifying glass.png|middle|20x20px|Magnifying glass.png]] can be performed on Agreements and Requests.
*You can save searches that are relevant and view them from the Dashboard itself.
*A ''No records found'' the message is displayed if no saved searches are available.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 08.png|320x560px]]</div>
*Tapping the Notifications [[File:Bell image.png|20x20px|Bell image.png]] icon displays a list of Notifications for Agreements and Requests.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 09.png|320x560px]]</div>

== Tasks ==

The ICI mobile application shows a list of Tasks that are associated with the Agreement and Request entity types.

*Tasks can be filtered into the following categories:
**Tasks waiting for Approval
**Tasks related to Deviations
**Tasks pending Review

*Tasks are refreshed automatically for approval, rejection or request review actions on contract requests and agreements.
<div class="image-green-border"> [[File:7.16 Mobile App 10.png|320x560px]]</div>
*Deviated tasks display a ''Deviation List'' and the ''Deviation details'' for each of them. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 11.png|320x560px]]</div>
*The ''Deviation details'' include the old ''Clause Text'' and the new ''Deviation Text''. You can ''Approve ''or Reject the deviated Agreement, as required.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Task 3.png|240px|RTENOTITLE]]</div>
*Searching within a task is also possible using the Free Text search.
*A ''No records found'' the message is displayed if no pending tasks are available.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 13.png|320x560px]]</div>
 

== Commitments ==

The ''Commitments ''tab allows you to manage your Commitments using the mobile application. Only authorized users can view this tab.

*View Commitment details and filter them based on their status.
*Take actions on overdue and pending Commitments.
*Selecting a Commitment opens the respective Commitment’s Details screen providing details such as ''Contract Type'', ''Commitment Code'', ''Agreement Code'', ''Commitment Type'', ''Business Owner'', ''Status'' and ''Due Date''.
*A ''No records found'' message is displayed if no Commitments are available.
*To take action on a Commitment, either '''tap '''the ''Take action on commitment'' button on the List view or on the right-hand side of the Commitment that you want to view. 
*The ''Take action on commitment ''option will not be displayed for completed Commitments. 

 

=== Taking Action on Commitments ===

To take action on a Commitment:<br/> 1. '''Tap''' the ''Take action on commitment'' button to open the ''Add action details'' screen.<br/> 2. '''Enter''' information for the ''Action Taken, Action Date, Remarks'' and ''Achieved Value'' fields.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Taking Actions on Commitments.png|270x450px|RTENOTITLE]]</div>
3. '''Select '''a ''Commitment Status'' from the drop-down.<br/> 4. '''Tap '''the Save button to complete the action.<br/> 5. On tapping the ''Save ''button, an ''Alert ''popup ''Commitment will not be editable anymore''. ''Do you want to continue? ''will be displayed. '''Select''' the ''Yes'' or ''No'' action, as applicable.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Taking Actions on Commitments 2.png|RTENOTITLE]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
*Commitments are refreshed automatically for approval, rejection or request review actions on contract requests and agreements.
<div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="note-box">'''Note: '''If you select the ''Postponed ''commitment status, you will need to provide the ''New Expected Completion Date''.</div>
 

== Searches ==

Agreements and Requests can be searched using various search options.

All searches performed in ICI are case-insensitive, hence the characters can be entered in upper and/or lower case. <br/> The following search options are available for Agreements and Requests:

*Faceted Search: Filters records by applying various Attributes, such as Created date, Value, Expiry date, and so on.
*Free Text search: Text-based search for Agreements. 
*Saved Search: Provides a list of your own saved searches created on the ICI Web user interface.
*Favorites Tile: This tile on the Dashboard allows you to directly access Agreements/Requests that have been marked as Favorite.

 

=== Faceted Search ===

To apply the Faceted search:

*Tap the Filter[[File:Filter image.png|20x20px|Filter image.png]]icon on the ''Agreements'' screen to apply various facets to filter the search results.
*Use the Faceted search to apply filters on Agreements or Requests on the basis of facets and its value.
*On selecting multiple values for a facet such as ''Created By'', the ICI Mobile Application applies the ''OR'' condition for that specific facet.
*However, on selecting multiple filters such as ''Contract Value'' and ''Created By'', the ICI Mobile Application applies the ''AND ''condition for those facets.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 16.png|320x560px]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">For example, you want to view Agreements with contract value between 701M to 877M and those created by either user 1 or user 2. These facets can be applied by tapping on their values and tapping ''Apply''.</div>
*By default, 5 facets values are available to use.
*If you want to apply a filter other than the available values, '''type''' the value in the text box provided and '''tap '''''Apply''.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 17.png|320x560px]]</div>
*Applied filters can also be Reset.
*These facets can be customized based on your requirement. Since this is a backend activity, please contact the Icertis Customer Success if you wish to have any customizations done.

 

=== Free Text Search ===

To apply the Free Text search:

*'''Tap '''the [[File:Magnifying glass.png|20x20px|Magnifying glass.png]] icon to perform a free text search on Agreements and Requests.
*You can search across all Attributes of all ICI entities. Use double-quotes to find an exact match for your search phrase, such as "liability insurance".
*Search results display when relevant keywords or contract details are entered.
*A ''No records found'' message will be displayed if no search records are available.

 

=== Saved Search ===

To apply the Saved search:

*'''Tap '''the[[File:Magnifier 2 image.png|baseline|20px|Magnifier 2 image.png]]icon to view a list of other saved searches inside a particular Agreement list. 
*'''Select '''a saved search from the list, and '''tap '''the ''Back ''button.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 18.png|320x560px]]</div>
*The ICI mobile application loads the saved search and lists the result.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 19.png|320x560px]]</div>
*'''Tap''' the [[File:Exclamation icon image.png|RTENOTITLE]] icon to get help on the basic functions of the listed items.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 20.png|320x560px]]</div>
 

=== Favorites Tile ===

To save Agreements/Requests as Favorites:

*'''Select '''the Agreements or Requests that you want to mark as Favorites by tapping the ''Favorite ''icon[[File:Star image icon.png|RTENOTITLE]]for each of the Agreements. 
*This creates a ''Favorites ''tile on the Dashboard.
<div class="image-green-border"> [[File:7.16 Mobile App 21.png|320x560px]]</div>
*Tap the ''Favorites ''tile to view the Agreements/Requests in your list.

 

== Agreements ==

ICI Mobile application displays a list of Agreements that you are authorized to view. 

*All Agreements display their assigned status color code. For example, Approved Agreements will have a green vertical bar next to it, Cancelled Agreements will have a black vertical bar next to it, and so on.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 22.png|320x560px]]</div>
*Agreements can be filtered using the ''Category Filter'' or the ''Faceted Filter''. 
*The ''Category Filter'' is used to filter Agreements by category. For example, Agreements expired.
*The Faceted Filter is used to filter records by applying various Attributes, such as Created date, Value, Expiry date, and so on.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 23.png|320x560px]]</div>
*Agreements can also be searched using the Faceted search, Free Text search and the Saved search.
*Agreements can be marked as ''Favorites ''by tapping the ''Favorite ''icon which creates a ''Favorite ''tile on the ''Dashboard''.
*A ''No records found'' message is displayed if no Agreements are found.

 

=== Agreement Details Tab ===

The Agreement ''Details ''tab allows you to view the details of your Agreement using the mobile application.

'''Key Features'''

*The Attributes on this list can be modified by selecting the appropriate Attributes using the ICI Cloud Platform.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 24.png|320px]]</div>
*Tapping the[[File:Eye icon image.png|text-top|RTENOTITLE]]icon at the top of the screen, allows you to view or download a document, depending on the mobile application you are using:
**For iOS: downloads are not performed within the ICI Mobile Application. The document opens in Web view with the copy-paste option being blocked – this restricts users from copy-pasting any document details.
**For Android: the document is downloaded in a temporary folder on the device and needs the third-party applications, such as Acrobat Reader installed. Once users click the ''Back'' button, the downloaded document gets deleted.
*The ''Association'' tab displays the Association details for that Agreement.
*The ''Commitment'' tab displays a list of Commitments pertaining to that Agreement. You have an option to take appropriate action on Overdue or Incomplete Commitments.
*The ''Notes'' tab displays a list of notes added for that Agreement. You can also add new notes to the Agreement.
*You can perform the following actions on an Agreement:
**Approve
**Reject
**Request Review
**Delegate
**Recall delegate
**Remove Me
*A ''No records found'' message is displayed if no Agreements details, Associations, Commitments or Notes are available.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 25.png|320x560px]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

=== Agreement Associations Tab ===

The ''Associations ''tab lists the Associations available for a particular Agreement.

'''Key Features'''

*You can expand the list to view the basic details of the Association.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 26.png|320x560px]]</div>
*'''Tap''' the Association to view more details of the association, such as ''Summary, Client Details,'' and so on.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 27.png|320x560px]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

=== Agreement Commitments Tab ===

The ''Commitments ''tab lists the Commitments available for a particular Agreement. 

'''Key Features'''

*You can expand the list to view the basic details of the Commitments.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 28.png|320px]]</div>
*'''Tap '''the Commitment to view more details of the Commitment, such as ''Contract Type'', ''Commitment Code'', ''Commitment Type'', and so on.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 29.png|320x560px]]</div>
*A ''No records found'' message is displayed if no Commitments are found for that Agreement.

 

=== Agreement Notes Tab ===

Tapping the Agreement ''Add Note'' tab displays details of the Notes.

'''Key Features'''

*'''Tap '''any Note record to view the ''Notes ''detail screen.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 30.png|320x560px]]<br/>  </div>
*'''Tap '''''Add Note'' at the bottom of the screen to add a new note.
*'''Enter '''information in the ''Add Note'' box provided. 
*'''Tap''' the ''ADD'' button. 
*In addition, the note is listed on the ''Notes list'' screen. The note that you add here gets reflected in the UI.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 31.png|320x560px]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

=== Agreement/Request History Tab ===

Tapping the Agreement/Request History tab displays the history of the particular Agreement/Request.

'''Key Features'''

*Tapping the ''History ''tab opens the Agreement ''History ''screen.
*You can either view ''All history'' or select one of the following tabs:
**Draft
**Approval
**Execution 
**Post-Execution
<div class="note-box">'''Note''': Only tabs containing data are displayed.</div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 32.png|320x560px]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
*'''Tap '''any row or the ''Show details'' to open the ''History Details'' screen and get more information about the Agreement/Request. 
<div class="note-box">'''Note''': The states will only be visible if they are available for the Agreement.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 33.png|320px]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

=== Taking Action on Agreements/Requests ===

Tapping the Agreement/Request displays a number of actions that you can perform for the particular Agreement/Request.

'''Key Features'''

*The ICI Mobile application supports the following actions: 
**Approve
**Reject
**Request Review
**Delegate
**Recall delegate
**Remove Me

 

*Completing an action opens the Agreement list screen. The Agreement/Request list screen is refreshed displaying the latest statuses upon completing ''Approve'', ''Reject ''and ''Request Review ''actions.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 34.png|320x560px]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">'''Agreement/Request Approve Action'''</div>
 To approve an Agreement/Request:

*'''Select '''the Agreement/Request that you need to approve.
*'''Add '''a Note. Adding a note is optional.
*'''Tap '''''APPROVE ''to confirm the approval. This opens the ''Agreement Details'' screen.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 35.png|320x560px]]</div>
 

 

'''Agreement/Request Reject Action'''

To reject an Agreement/Request:

*'''Select '''the Agreement/Request that you need to reject.
*'''Add '''a Note. 
*'''Select '''a mandatory reject ''Reason Code''.
*'''Tap''' ''REJECT ''to confirm a rejection. This opens the ''Agreement Details'' screen.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 36.png|320x560px]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">'''Agreement Request Review Action'''</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">To Request Review of an Agreement/Request:</div>
*'''Select '''the Agreement/Request that that needs to be reviewed.
*'''Tap '''the ''Request Review'' button. This opens the Agreement Request Review screen. 
*'''Select '''a user to review the Agreement.
*'''Tap '''''SEND''. This opens the ''Agreement Details'' screen.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 37.png|320x560px]]</div>
 

'''Agreement Remove Me Action'''

To remove an Agreement/Request:

*'''Select '''the Agreement/Request that needs to be removed.
*'''Enter''' Notes for the particular Agreement.
*'''Tap''' ''SUBMIT''. 
*Notes can be viewed under the ''History'' tab or the ''Notes'' tab.
<div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

== Requests ==

The ''Requests ''Tab allows you to manage your Requests using the mobile application. 

*Only authorized users can view this tab.
*The Attributes on this list can be modified by selecting the proper Attributes in ICI.
*Requests will be displayed based on their assigned status color.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 38.png|320x560px]]</div>
*Requests can be filtered or searched in the following ways:
**Category Filter: Filters Agreements by category. For example, Agreements Expired.
**Faceted Search: Filters records by applying various Attributes, such as Created date, Value, Expiry date, and so on.
**Free Text search: Searches for Requests using free text.
**Saved Search: Provides a list of your own saved searches created on the Web.
*A ''No records found'' message is displayed if no Requests are available.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 39.png|320x560px]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

=== Request Details  ===

*'''Tap '''the Request to open the Details screen which displays the details of the Request, such as ''Summary'', ''Amendment'', ''Default'', and so on.
*The ''Summary ''displays details such as ''Created by'', ''Status'', ''Created Date'' and ''Business Status'' in a collapsed view.
*''Default ''displays all the Attributes in collapsed view.
*The ''Associations'' tab displays the Association details for that Request.
*The ''Notes'' tab displays a list of notes added for that Request. You can also add a note by tapping the ''Add Note'' button.
*A ''No records found'' message is displayed if no records are available for Associations or notes.
*The ''History ''tab displays ''All History'' for that Request.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 40.png|320x560px]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

=== Taking Action on Requests ===

The ICI mobile application supports the following actions for Requests:

*Approve 
*Reject
*Request Review
*Delegate
*Recall Delegate

 

== Settings ==

The ''Settings ''Tab allows you to manage the settings of the application or auto delegate tasks.

*The ''mobile Application'' has the following two options:
**Auto delegation
**Sign out
*'''Tap''' ''Auto delegation'' to add or edit a delegation.
*'''Tap''' ''Sign out'' to log out from the ICI Mobile application.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 41.png|320x560px]]</div>
 

== Auto Delegation ==

*'''Tap '''''Auto delegation'' to view the ''Delegations ''screen. You can either add, edit or delete records as applicable.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 42.png|320x560px]]</div>
To add a new Auto delegation:

*'''Tap''' the ''Add new delegation'' + button at the bottom of the screen to add a new delegation.
*'''Select''' the ''Start Date'' and ''End Date''.
*'''Select''' the task you want to delegate from the ''Select Delegation'' ''Task'' drop-down.
*'''Select''' a user from the ''Select User'' drop-down to whom you want to delegate the task. The ''Select role'' drop-down list is displayed when you select ''Agreement Approve'' tasks. 
*'''Tap''' ''Delegate ''to complete the auto delegation.
*'''Tap''' ''Cancel'' if you want to cancel the delegation.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 43.png|320x560px]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
 

== Notifications ==

The ''Notifications ''screen lists the notifications for your Agreements and Requests.

*Tap the Notifications [[File:Bell image.png|baseline|20px|RTENOTITLE]] icon on the Dashboard. This opens the Notifications screen.
*Here, you can view notifications such as number of Agreements created, approved, executed, expired, sent for approval or review, or the number of Contracts/Requests/Amendments created or submitted, and so on.
*By default, notifications are set to 15 days. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 44.png|320x560px|7.16 Mobile App 44.png]]</div>
*'''Tap '''the date range [[File:Tap image.png|RTENOTITLE]]icon to open the ''Select Days'' popup and change it to ''30'' ''Days'', ''60 Days'' or ''90 Days''. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 45.png|320x560px|7.16 Mobile App 45.png]]</div>
*'''Tap''' ''Cancel'' if you want to retain the default of 15 Days.
*On the ''Agreements ''tab, '''select '''the type of Agreements you want to view. This opens the ''Agreements Notifications'' screen.
*Details of the Agreement are displayed here, such as, who approved the Agreement or on what date the Agreement was approved.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 46.png|320x560px|7.16 Mobile App 46.png]]</div>
*On the ''Requests'' tab, '''select '''the type of Requests you want to view. This opens the ''Requests Notifications'' screen.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 47.png|320x560px|7.16 Mobile App 47.png]]</div>
*Details of the Contract Requests are displayed here, such as, who approved the Agreement or on what date the Agreement was approved.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:7.16 Mobile App 48.png|320x560px|7.16 Mobile App 48.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">'''Related Topics: '''[[Agreement_Management|Agreement Management]]''' | '''[[Compliances|Compliance Management]]''' | '''[[Release_Notes|Release Notes]] |</div>

Self-Serve Tools

2022-06-09T10:26:27Z

IDT-1:

= Self-Serve Tools =

Self-Serve tools include tools and features of ICI that can be used out-of-the-box by authorized users. Besides serving ICI users with specific feature and performance goals, being self-sufficient is the primary goal of these tools. These tools are user-friendly and time-saving, enabling users to perform tasks by themselves instead of reaching out to Icertis Solutions Engineering, Database or Support teams based on the requirement. Sometimes, these changes were minor and of low complexity, but the turnaround time was substantial.

The ICI Self-Serve tools include:

*Search Sync Tool
*Translations Editor Tool
*Improved ICI Health Check Tool
*Configurations Key Editor Tool
*Promote to Production (P2P) Tool
*Import Solution Tool
<div class="image-caption"> </div> <div class="image-caption">'''<span style="color:#008000;">Prerequisites</span>'''</div>
*The ICI application, version 7.11 and above
*The user must have valid credentials to access ICI and the ''User Administration'' tile.

== Search Sync Tool ==

The Search Sync tool gets data from Icertis Search for a given instance’s Sys Id and synchronizes it if required. Using the fetched ES value, the tool validates if the Sys Id is the latest for the respective instance or if sync is required. This tool can be accessed by the Administrator from the Admin Task on the "Admin" tile.

If the key exists, the latest value from ES will be displayed. If the key does not exist, the system displays an error message indicating that the value could not be fetched for the provided Sys Id. The Sys Id can be provided as an input CSV file or as a comma-separated. Either comma-separated Sys Ids can be entered or a CSV file can be uploaded.

This helps to make the entity search more streamlined and efficient. Users can quickly refer to related agreements at the time of deals or audits.

'''Note''': Data can be fetched from only one instance at a time. A dedicated key must exist for ES sync to work with Sys ID.

Refer to Search Sync Tool on the [[Admin_Task|Admin Task]] page for more details.
<div class="image-caption"><span style="color:#008000;">'''''Icertis Search Sync'''''</span></div>
Users can now get data from Icertis search for a given instance’s ''SysId'' so that they can look up the value and identify whether it is the latest or if a sync is needed. If the key exists, the latest value from ES will be displayed. If the key does not exist, the system will display the error message “Could not fetch value for provided SysId”.
<div class="note-box">'''Note''': Data can be fetched from only one instance at a time.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div>
== Translations Editor Tool ==

The ICI platform is available in different languages and different languages label text are available for localization. However, to make any changes to the localization values, users had to reach out to the Solutions Engineering or Database teams. Sometimes, these changes were minor and of low complexity, but the turnaround time was substantial.

Hence, a self-service Translations Editor tool has been introduced that contains all strings that are localized. The Translations Editor tool supports adding localized values in different languages for Reason Codes as well.

Users can now download all keys and their localization values as an Excel file, modify multiple values, and upload the modified changes to ICI. Once the values are updated in ICI, the caches are updated automatically to avoid the cache flush and server restart. This has significantly enhanced productivity as the turnaround time to update the Resource Key values has been eradicated.

Using this tool, users can now:

*Search for a specific string using the search bar and update the Resource Key value for Language and Locale.
*Update multiple language strings by selecting and saving the Resource Key value.
*Download and upload the localization key values using Microsoft Excel.
*View the modified values in the ICI instance immediately.

To use the Translations Editor Tool:

Refer to Translation Editor in [[Admin_Task|Admin Task]] page for more details

 

== ICI Health Check Tool ==

The ICI platform hosted on Azure Cloud uses services such as Icertis Search, Redis along with internal components such as APIs and Task services. However, no services were used to provide an insight on the application health except for the ICI Health Check page that provided regular application health checks and application monitoring to be able to detect issues before they became full-fledged outages.

The ICI Health Check page has been further extended to cover additional parameters to help identify potential outages and diagnose issues. The health insights will provide information on how well the ICI Instance and its service is performing, its overall health, as well as its usefulness to users. Users will now be able to access a dashboard (without logging into ICI) that tracks application health alongside usage metrics and application crash data.

The health statuses are classified into three categories:

*''Warning ''- This is indicated with a yellow warning icon
*''Healthy ''- This is indicated with a green checkmark icon
*''Unhealthy ''- This is indicated with a red warning icon

The following details are displayed in the Health Check:

*'''Icertis '''''S'''earch Health''': This displays the Status (yellow/green/red), the Icertis Search version and the Uptime, and so on.''

*'''Redis Cache Health''': This displays the Redis version, Uptime In Days, CPU usage, Connections Received and Commands Processed, and so on.

*'''API Health''': This displays the API Response Time, Status and Issues and so on.

*'''Database Server Metrics''': This displays the CPU usage percentage, User Connections, Total Server Memory, Disk Read/Write IO/Sec and so on.

*'''IIS Server Metrics''': This displays % 404 HTTP Response Sent, % 500  HTTP Response Sent, percentage of CPU utilization per process, Requests/sec, and so on.
<div class="image-green-border">To view the Health Check, add "Health/ViewHealth" (without quotes) to your ICI URL. </div>
To check the health of your system:<br/> 1. Enter your domain name'''''/health/viewhealth''''' at the end of the URL of your ICI instance. The various tools and their health are displayed.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Self Serve Tool 7.1.png|720px|Self Serve Tool 7.1]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"><br/> 2. '''Click''' the + icon next to the tool to view details regarding its health. The details for each of the tools are displayed in 2 columns with the Keys and their respective values as shown below.</div>
'''Icertis Search Health'''<br/> The details for the Icertis Search Health include the status, node total, primary and relocating shards, version, heap percent, uptime, and so on. For example, the Status is green.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Health Check 2.png|720px|Health Check 2]]</div>
'''Redis Cache Health'''<br/> The details for the Redis Cache Health include the uptime in days. Connected or blocked clients, rejected connections, CPU usage, and so on. For example, the Uptime in Days is 28.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Health Check 3.png|720px|Health Check 3]]</div>
'''API Health'''<br/> The API Health provides the response time. For example, 94 ms.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Health Check 4.png|720px|Health Check 4]]</div>
'''Task Service Health    '''<br/> The Task Service Health provides the failed count for keys and when it was last successful. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Health Check 5.png|720px|Health Check 5]]</div>
'''Database Server Metrics'''<br/> The details for the Database Server Metrics Health include the edition, SQL server resource pool stats, and so on.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Health Check 6.png|720px|Health Check 6]]</div>
'''IIS Server Metrics'''<br/> The details for the IIS Server Metrics Health include the total method requests/sec, number of seconds an IIS Worker process has been running, the percentage of CPU utilization per process, and so on.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Health Check 7.png|720px|Health Check 7]]</div>
 

== Configuration Key Editor Tool ==

The Configuration Key Editor tool facilitates a logged-in user (who has access to Azure subscription) to search and update configuration keys, as and when required. It has been introduced for easier instance management and improved productivity, thus reducing the dependency on the Engineering and DevOps teams.

It includes:

*The Config Editor
*The Redis Flush

The "Config Editor" is a self-service tool that allows teams to edit instance configurations without having to connect to the instance machines. Once the key values are changed, the cache is automatically updated to avoid the server restart. The tool only works for non-production environments. The production environment configuration changes are controlled by the Operations team, and the tool would not be available for the production environment.

The "Redis Flush" is a self-service tool that allows Administrators to flush the cache or look up a particular key for its value of Delete a Key. The tool can also be used to perform "Role Restart" on the instances to which the user has access.
<div class="note-box">'''Note:'''  The user must have access privileges to an Environment CName in Config Editor.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">To use the Configuration Key Editor Tool:<br/> 1. Login to the ICI Tools portal (icmtools.icertis.com) with your ICI credentials.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:Self Serve Tool 8.2.png|720px|Self Serve Tool 8.2]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">2. '''Click '''the "Config Editor" tab on the "Home" page.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">3. '''Select '''the environment from the Environment'' ''"CName" that you need to access for configuration. All the instances that have you have access to will be displayed. </div>
4. '''Click "'''Submit"'' ''after selecting the environment. The configuration JSON files for the selected environment are displayed for all available features, security details, database connections, and so on related to the selected instance.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Self Serve Tool 8.4.png|720px|Self Serve Tool 8.4]]</div>
5. '''Select''' a Config Key from the list to change its value as required. For example, the Config Key AgreementAutoRenewReminderNotificationPeriod has the reminder period set at 3 days may be changed to 2 days.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Self Serve Tool 8.5.png|720px|Self Serve Tool 8.5]]</div>
6. '''Click "'''Save and Role Restart" to save the new value of 2 days. The specific JSON file for the respective CName will be reset (i.e. perform a role restart). This means that the configuration is reset in the Icertis search and the server is restarted so that the new value is reflected on the instance.

7. '''Click''' "Download" to download the entire file so that you can edit it offline and then upload it directly to the instance.

 

 

 

== Promote Configurations (P2P) Tool ==

The Promote to Production (P2P) process of the ICI platform helps to move ICI Configuration from source (Config/UAT) environment to target environment, thus reducing the manual efforts to do so. P2P process enables to selectively move ICI configuration. The Promote Configuration Tool or P2P is designed to accomplish just that.

The tool already supported contract types, contract type attributes, clauses and templates (along with the documents), notification templates, rules, masterdata, users, user groups and security groups. The Icertis search sync is also supported by the tool.

With the 7.15 release, to provide a seamless P2P experience, enhancements have been made in ICI to support the following additional entities :

*Organizations (Orgs), Organization Groups (Org Groups)
*Users, User Groups, Security Groups
*Role Action Mapping
*Currencies
*Reasons
*SLA Matrix
*Notification Category
*Default Search Columns
*Application Settings
*Global/Admin Saved Searches
<div class="note-box">'''Note:''' Customers using ICI versions before 7.15 will need to upgrade to use this feature.</div>
Here is an overview of the P2P process:
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:P2P 1.png|720px|P2P 1]]</div>
 

 

=== <span style="color:#008000;">''Accessing P2P Tool''</span> ===

To access the P2P tool: 

'''Click '''"Configure"'' '''>'''''"P2P''' '''Configuration"'' ''tile or menu on the top navigation. The "Promote Configuration" page opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-P2P-Menu-Purple.png|420px|8.0-P2P-Menu-Purple.png]]</div>
The Promote Configurations''displays the current status of P2P requests and their status.''

'''Note: '''Users cannot edit a request that is in the ''Completed'' state.
<div class="image-green-border"> </div>
=== <span style="color:#008000;">''Creating a P2P Request''</span> ===

To create a P2P Request:

1. '''Click'''  "Configure" ''> ''"Promote Configurations"''> ''"Create Request". The "Create Request" page opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-P2P-1tab-Purple.PNG|920px|8.0-P2P-1tab-Purple.PNG]]</div>
2. '''Enter''' a "Request Name". 

3. '''Select''' a "Target" from the drop-down. 

4. '''Select''' the "P2P Request Start Date Time".

5. '''Select '''the time to trigger an email to the recipient from the "Intimation Email minutes before P2P Starts" drop-down list. For example, ''15 Min''.

6. '''Enter''' the intimation recipient Email Id in the "Notification Email – Intimation"'' ''field.

7. '''Enter''' the notification recipient Email Id in the "Notification Email – Success"'' ''field.

8. '''Enter''' the notification recipient email Id in the "Notification Email– Failure"'' ''field.

9. '''Enter''' the notification recipient email Id in the "Notification Email'' – ''Cancel" field.

10. '''Click''' "Next"''. ''The "Contract Type" tab opens.
<div class="note-box">'''Note: '''As stated in the disclaimer, while promoting configuration, the target environment will be down during contract type publish. This tool must be used responsibly under the project team’s approvals to avoid inconsistency and downtime.</div>
11. '''Select''' the "Contract Type"'' ''from the "Available Contract Types". 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-P2P-2tab-Purple.png|920px|8.0-P2P-2tab-Purple.png]]</div>
12. '''Click '''the right arrow to move the selected contract type to the'' ''"Selected Contract Types".
<div class="image-green-border">13. '''Click''' "Next". The "Templates and Clauses" tab opens.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-P2P-3tab-Purple.png|920px|8.0-P2P-3tab-Purple.png]]</div>
14. '''Select''' a template from the "Available Templates" columns. 

15. '''Click '''the arrow key to move the selected template to the "Selected Templates" column.
<div class="image-green-border">16. '''Select''' a clause from the'' ''"Available Clauses" columns.</div>
17. '''Click '''the arrow key to move the selected clause to the "Selected Clauses" column.
<div class="image-green-border">18. '''Click '''"Next"''. ''The "Rules" tab opens.</div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-P2P-4tab-Purple.png|420px|8.0-P2P-4tab-Purple.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">19. '''Select''' the "Contract Type" from the drop-down.</div>
20. '''Select''' the Rules that appear.

21. '''Click '''"Next". The "Notifications" tab opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-P2P-5tab-Purple.png|920px|8.0-P2P-5tab-Purple.png]]</div>
22. '''Select '''the notifications from the grid.

24. '''Click''' "Next". The "Master Data & Core Seed Data" tab opens.
<div class="note-box">'''''Note''''': Users can use the ''P2P tool Master Data'' tab for the faster transition of Master Data to production than the Bulk utility tool option.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-P2P-6tab-Purple.png|820px|8.0-P2P-6tab-Purple.png]]</div>
25. '''Click '''the arrow key to move the selected rule to the "Selected Master Data" column.

26. '''Select '''the seed data from the "Available Core Seed Data column". 

27. '''Click '''the arrow key to move the selected master data to the "Selected Core Seed Data"'' ''column.
<div class="image-green-border">28. '''Click "'''Next"''. ''The "Users & User groups" tab opens.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-P2P-7tab-Purple.png|920px|8.0-P2P-7tab-Purple.png]]</div>
31. '''Select''' the users on the "Select Users" pane. 

32. '''Click '''"Selected Users" from the top right of the pane to view the list of users that have been selected.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-P2P-7.2tab-Purple.png|920px|8.0-P2P-7.2tab-Purple.png]]</div>
33. '''Click '''"Filter Users" to view the list of users by an attribute or click "Add Another Attribute"'' ''to filter users by additional attributes. For example, Email ID, Phone Number. 
<div class="image-green-border">34. '''Click '''the trash icon''' '''to remove an added user attribute.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-P2P-7.1tab-Purple.png|920px|8.0-P2P-7.1tab-Purple.png]]</div>
35. '''Click''''' ''"Next" if any or no user or user group is selected. The "Security Groups" tab opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-P2P-8tab-Purple.png|920px|8.0-P2P-8tab-Purple.png]]</div>
36. '''Select '''the security group from the "Available Security Groups" columns.

37. '''Click '''the arrow key to move the selected security group to the "Selected Security Groups" column.

38. '''Select '''the KPI from the "Available KPI’s" columns.

39. '''Click '''the arrow key to move the selected KPI to the "Selected SaveSearchKPIs" column. 
<div class="image-green-border">40. '''Click''' "Next". The'' ''"Verify" tab opens.</div>
41. '''Verify''' details of the contract types, attributes, templates, clauses, ruleset information, notification templates, transactional master data, core seed data, user and user groups, save search KPI, and security groups that you have selected. You can expand all categories by Expand/Collapse ALL icon at the top right or can expand the individual category or tab information with arrows provided in the far right of each category.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-P2P-9tab-Purple.png|920px|8.0-P2P-9tab-Purple.png]]</div>
42. '''Click '''"Create". The confirmation window opens indicating that downtime is required for this request.
<div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="note-box">'''''Note''''': The P2P tool verifies all the information entered by the user before creating a P2P request.</div>
43. '''Click '''"Yes" if you wish to proceed. The success message opens indicating that the P2P request created successfully.

The P2P request status changes to "ADDED".

On completion of the P2P request, the status changes to "Completed".
<div class="note-box">'''Note''': Users cannot edit a request that is in ''Completed'' state.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">The Status column on Promote Configurations index page displays the InProgress percentage (calculated on the basis of weightage provided to each step). Once the task is complete, the status changes to Completed.</div> <div class="image-green-border"><br/> To view error details:</div> <div class="image-green-border">1. '''Navigate '''to Promote Configuration page from "Configure" > "Promote Configurations" > "Promote Configurations". The Promote Configuration index page listing all Requests created appears.</div> <div class="image-green-border"><br/> 2. '''Click '''the three dots in the "View" column on the far right.  </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-P2P-Index-Page-Purple.png|920px|8.0-P2P-Index-Page-Purple.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">The drawer displaying the “Request Error Details” and “Manual Work Pending” tabs are displayed.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">During validation, all errors that are auto-fixable will be fixed, and the result will be displayed.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">In case of any persisting errors, the details are displayed in the “Request Error Details” tab.</div>
*Request Error Details: This tab contains multiple columns providing more information about the P2P Request. 
**Warning: Displays if an error or warning is encountered when creating the P2P request.
**Validation Area: Displays the specific area where the validation error occurred.
**Error Message: Displays the error message for the P2P request including entity name and SysId.
**Error Description: Displays the detailed description of the error that has occurred when creating the P2P request. 
**Environments: Displays the environments where P2P request creation is not working as expected. For example, Source, Target. 
**Auto-Fix: Indicates if the error encountered when creating the P2P request can be fixed automatically. 
**Manual Step Actions: Displays the list of actions that users need to perform manually to fix the errors when creating the P2P Request. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-P2P-Index-Page-Error-Purple.png|920px|8.0-P2P-Index-Page-Error-Purple.png]]</div>
*Manual Work Pending: Displays the actions that must be taken manually after P2P request is completed. 
**Action: Displays the list of actions users must perform to fix the errors encountered when the P2P request is completed. For example, “Publish Required”, “Cache flush required” and so on. 
**The following details are displayed for an action where applicable. For example, if the action “Es Sync required” action is displayed, then the corresponding details are displayed in the three columns:
***Entity Name
***Entity Value
***SysId
<div class="note-box">'''Note''': <br/> Users can apply the fix automatically by clicking “Apply Fix”. This removes all the existing validation errors and ensures that the errors which are marked as auto fix get fixed automatically. <br/> This button appears only if at least one of the errors can be auto fixed, that is, at least one error displays the value “Yes” in the Auto Fix column. </div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">'''To Resume P2P Request:'''</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">'''Click '''the View Details eye icon for the P2P request which you want to resume.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">The “View Request” page is displayed.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:8.0-P2P-View-Request-Purple.png|920px|8.0-P2P-View-Request-Purple.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"><br/> If there are any errors encountered when creating the P2P Request, users can resume the P2P Request creation from the step where it failed by clicking “Resume” which will appear at that time.</div> <div class="image-green-border">You can edit with "Edit" or "Validate".</div>

== Import Solution Tool ==

ICI features an out-of-the-box solution for configuring ICI entities from the outset - the Import Solution tool. While saving valuable time and complexities associated with the initial configuration process, this tool provides a self-service, automated utility, and alleviates human intervention or any manual processing.

Using the Import Solution tool, ICI users can:

*Import configurations –
**From a source ICI instance to a target ICI Instance.
**Between multiple versions of ICI.
<div class="note-box">'''Note:'''</div> <div class="note-box">- On a target instance with no pre-existing configuration data.</div> <div class="note-box">- Support will be provided for up to 2 releases preceding the target ICI version. </div>
*These entities can be imported with this tool:
**Contract Types
**Templates
**Clauses
**Rules
**Notifications
**Masterdata Instances
**Seeded Masterdata entity instances
**Users & User Groups

=== Prerequisites for Import Solution to be implemented ===

==== Source instance setup ====

1.  Register and publish preconfigured import solutions, therefore availing source instances for utilization.<br/> 2.  Set up records for below seeded Masterdata contract types:

[[File:Import1.PNG|720px|Import1.PNG]]

3.  This configuration key can be used for the Source to communicate with the Import Solution engine – “Core.Tools.P2P.P2PDBConnectionString”. The value for this key should be the DB connection string of the Import Solution engine.
<div class="note-box">'''Note:''' For releases before 8.1, please reach out to the database team.</div>
==== Target instance setup ====

*This configuration key can be used for the Target to communicate with the Import Solution engine – “Core.Tools.ImportSolution.Configuration”. The value for this key should be the DB connection string of the Import Solution engine.
*“Manage” permissions will be required in the Security Groups for – “Admin Task” and “Promote Configuration”.

==== Source and Target mapping ====

The Source and Target instances need to be mapped in the Import Solution engine database. To do this, please reach out to the database team.

=== Using the Import Solution tool ===

To access the Import Solution tool and create an import configuration request:

1.  Click the “Admin” tile > “Admin Task”.<br/> 2.  Click “Import Solution”. The “Import Solution” page opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Import2.png|280px|Import2.png]]</div>
3.  Click “Create” on the Import Solution tool page. The “Create Import Configuration Request” page opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Import3.png|720px|Import3.png]]</div>
4.  Fill all required fields and click “Next”.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Import4.png|720px|Import4.png]]</div>
5.  Select and fill all necessary information across all the relevant tabs.

6.  Verify all information within the “Verify” tab.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Import5.png|720px|Import5.png]]</div>
7.  Click “Create”. The request to import the specified configuration will be created, and a confirmation message is displayed on the “Import Solution Request Progress” drawer.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:Import6.png|720px|Import6.png]]</div>
 

 

 

'''Related Topics: '''[[Agreements|Agreement Management]] | [[Associations|Association Management]] | [[Compliances|Compliance Management]] | [[Templates|Template Management]] | [[Clauses|Clause Management]] | [[Configure|Configuration]] | [[Reports|Reports]] | [[Localizing_ICI|Localizing ICI]] |

Currencies

2022-06-09T10:24:17Z

IDT-1:

= Currencies =

== Searching a Currency ==

In ICI, you can use various options given below, including the dynamic search feature, to find the desired currency.

1. '''Click''' the "Confguration" tile and then '''click '''"Currencies". The "Currencies" page appears with existing list of currencies.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:CurrenciesLandingPage.png|720px|CurrenciesLandingPage.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">2. A list of currencies is displayed. Use the "Refine Search" option to search for a specific currency.</div> <div class="image-green-border"> </div> <div class="image-green-border">[[File:ListofCurrencies.png|720px|ListofCurrencies.png]]</div>
3. Select a search "Condition" from the drop-down list, Enter the value for the type of currency. List of currencies dpending on the selected search criteria is diaplyed in the right pane.

4. '''Click '''the "Clear All" button to remove all the filters at the same time.

== Creating a Currency ==

ICI allows you to create currencies that you can use while creating Contract Types.

To create a Currency:

1. '''Click''' "CREATE" on the "Currencies" page. The "Create Currency page opens.

 The "Create Currency" page opens and consists of following tabs:

*Details
*Verify
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:CreatingCurrency.png|500px|CreatingCurrency.png]]</div>
2. '''Click''' "Next" to go to next tab. The "Verify" section opens.

4. Verify the details and '''click''' "CREATE" to create a currency.

== Editing Currency ==

ICI allows you to edit currencies for your Contract Types.

To edit a currency:

1. '''Click''' the "Confguration" tile and then '''click '''"Currencies". The "Currencies" page appears with existing list of currencies.

2. '''Click''' the "View Details" icon next to the relevant currency. The Currency Details page opens.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:ViewCurrencyDetails.png|720px|ViewCurrencyDetails.png]]</div>
2. '''Click '''the "Edit"button. The 'Edit Currency' page opens. Edit the necessary details.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:EditingACurrency.png|720px|EditingACurrency.png]]</div>
3. '''Click '''"Next". The "Verify"page opens. Verify the details you have updated. 
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:EditingACurrency1.png|500px|EditingACurrency1.png]]</div>
4. C'''lick''' "Update" to save the modifications.
<div class="image-green-border">[[File:UpdatingACurrency.png|500px|UpdatingACurrency.png]]</div> <div class="image-green-border">'''Related Topics: '''[[Agreement_Management|Agreement Management]] | [[Managing_Organization|Managing Organization]] | [[Managing_Users|Managing Users]] | [[Managing_User_Groups|Managing User Groups]] | [[Managing_Security_Groups|Managing Security Groups]] | [[Application_Settings|Application Settings]] | [[Notification_Settings|Notification Settings]] | [[Reasons|Reasons]] | [[Search_Sync|Search Sync]] | [[Legacy_Upload|Legacy Upload]] |</div>